General CatalogVol.3 Electronic Counters / Controllers

General CatalogVol.3 Electronic Counters / Controllers
Electronic Counters /
Controllers
General Catalog Vol.3
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
DIGITAL
TACHOMETERS
ELECTRONIC
COUNTERS
List of KOYO Electronic Counters
Selection Guide
B-2
B-4
KCV Single Preset Counters for Addition and
Subtraction
/Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction
B-5
KCN-A Single Preset Counters for
Addition/Subtraction
B-19
KCN-S/KCN-W Single/Dual Preset Counters for
Addition and Subtraction
B-32
KCN-B Preset Counters for Addition and Subraction
with Batch and Total Options
B-54
KCN-T Small Total Counters
B-63
KCY Small Electronic Counters for Addition,
Addition/Subtration or Totalizing (Add/Sub)
B-67
KCX- , M, D, DM Single Preset Green Counters
for Addition
B-77
KCX- W, WM Dual Preset Green Counters for
Addition
B-86
KCX- T Total Counters Green LED
B-92
KCX-B Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast
Addition and Subtraction
B-96
KCX-B T Fast Total Counters for Addition and
Subtraction
B-108
KCX- RN Presettable/Lead-out Counters for HighSpeed Addition and Subtraction
B-118
KCH-B Counters for Display of High-speed Addition
and Subtraction
B-129
KCM-50-1/51-1 Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters)
B-134
Product Related to Digital Counters
B-142
How the tachometers work
TC-V Series
TC Series List of Digital tachometers
Eight measurement mode and examples
Merits
Measurement mode
TC-61
TC-6
TC-4L-G/H
TC-41
TC-4
TC-4A
TC-4B
TC-4S/TC-4W
Wiring
Recommended applications
C-1
C-2
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-17
C-19
C-24
C-27
C-29
C-33
C-36
C-38
C-40
C-42
C-43
DIGITAL TIMERS
KT-V Series
D-2
PROGRAMMABLE CAM
SWITCHES
List of KOYO Programmable Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320
FC-21
Application Examples
Glossary
Model Number Index
E-2
E-3
E-12
E-24
F-1
F-5
F-9
Notation Used in This Catalog
The following indications are used in this catalog to allow safe use of products.
Symbols
Warning
Ignoring this indication and improperly handing the product can lead to a
major malfunction possibly resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution
Ignoring this indication and improperly handing the product can lead to
injury or physical damage to property.
This symbol represents acts that are generally prohibited.
This symbol represents items that are compulsory or prescribed.
Safety Precautions
The following safety precautions must be obeyed for handling of products noted in this catalog.
Warning
Do not use in an environment where there is a possibility of combustion or explosion.
Doing so may lead to accident involving death or injury or a fire.
Do not use this product for applications related to human safety.
Use the product only for applications that will not lead to human injury even in the event of an accident or malfunction.
Caution
Use and manage the product within the environmental ranges (vibration, impact, temperature,
humidity, etc.) dictated in the specifications. Improper use may lead to a fire or damage to the
product. Thoroughly understand the product before using it.
Understand your product well before use.
Warning
Do not use with a power-supply voltage other than that noted in the specifications. Doing so
may lead to a fire, electric shock, or a malfunction.
Do not mis-wire products.
Doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction.
Caution
Use the wiring and configuration dictated in the specifications.
Not doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction.
Do not use wiring methods that subject wiring to stress.
Doing so may lead to electric shock or a fire.
Perform wiring with power to the power source cut off.
Not doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction.
Do not use screws other than those specified to be fixed to terminals.
Doing so may lead to a fire or malfunction.
A-1
Warning
Do not touch terminals while the power is on.
Doing so may lead to an accident resulting in a malfunction or electric shock.
Do not use in methods other than as dictated in the specifications.
Doing so may lead to an accident involving death or injury or a malfunction.
Changing settings during operation may possibly lead to a major accident if operational
procedures are not followed correctly and unintended settings are set when output is ON.
Operate in ranges where safety for individuals and equipment can be maintained by licensed
personnel.
Do not place near combustibles.
Doing so may lead to a fire.
Do not insert metallic objects like a screwdriver in heat radiation slots.
Doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction.
Caution
Do not insert inappropriate items in product openings.
Doing so may lead to electric shock or a malfunction.
Do not block heat radiation slots.
Doing so may lead to a rise in internal temperature, fire, or malfunction.
Caution
Do not repair after disassembly.
Doing so may lead to a fire, electric shock, or a malfunction.
Maintenance and inspection should be performed with power to the power source cut off.
There is a danger of electric shock when working with power supplied to the power source.
Warning
When disposing of a product, dispose of the product as industrial waste.
There is a danger of the product rupturing which may lead to a fire or an accident involving
death or serious injury.
A Request Regarding Use
Handling of our products is designed with the object of their use as general electronic equipment.
Do not use products for applications where a high level of reliability is needed with regard to human life.
In addition, please contact our Sales Division beforehand when considering use of the products in
environments or under conditions other than those in specifications for general electronic equipment or
for use in units related to safety and control of transportation equipment (trains, automobiles, etc.),
traffic signal equipment, fire-fighting/fire prevention equipment, or the like.
A-2
Corresponding CE Marking
Conformity with the Low Voltage Directive and EMC Directive is as follows:
(1) Low Voltage Directive
Conformity Specification- EN6 1010-1
Conformity is provided by ensuring basic insulation with respect to the load side that is connected to
contact output when switching voltage of contact output exceeds 150 V.
(2) EMC Directive
Conformity specification
EMI: EN55011
EMS: EN50082-2*
Conformity is provided by way of connection of an EMI/EMC filter (MR-2021 Tokin equivalent) to the power
source when using a type with a DC power source.
Please be advised beforehand that the contents of this catalog may change without warning due to product modifications.
When exporting these products, fixed procedures must be followed in accordance foreign currency and export trade control laws.
Acquisition of ISO9001 Certification
We have been ISO9001 certified company sine November 7, 1995.
Date of Accreditation November 7, 1995
Inspected Factories Headquarters and the
Ohizumi Factory
(Yamanashi Prefecture)
Inspected Products Programmable Controllers
Electronic Counters
Digital Tachometers
Programmable Cam Switches
Proximity Switches
Rotary Encoders
Programmable Display Instruments
Electronic Control Systems for Factory Automation
(FA)
Automotive and Electronic Control Instruments
Inspecting Agency BVQI
(Bureau Veritas Quality International)
Applicable Scope of the ISO9000 Series
In the ISO9000 series, 9001 includes the broadest range of industrial activities, as shown in this chart.
ISO9001
Quality Assurance in designing, development, manufacturing,
installation, and incidental services
ISO9002
Quality Assurance in maunfacturing, installation,
and incidental services
ISO9003
Quality Assurance in final inspections and
testing
A-3
A-4
ELECTRONIC
COUNTERS
List of KOYO Electronic Counters
Selection Guide
B-2
B-4
KCV Single Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction
/Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction
B-5
KCN-A Single Preset Counters for Addition/Subtraction
B-19
KCN-S/KCN-W Single/Dual Preset Counters for Addition
and Subtraction
B-32
KCN-B Preset Counters for Addition and Subraction with
B-54
Batch and Total Options
KCN-T Small Total Counters
B-63
KCY Small Electronic Counters for Addition, Addition/
Subtration or Totalizing (Add/Sub)
B-67
KCX- ,
D, DM Single Preset Green Counters for
Addition
B-78
KCX- W, WM Dual Preset Green Counters for
Addition
B-86
KCX- T Total Counters Green LED
B-92
KCX-B Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast Addition
and Subtraction
B-96
KCX-B T Fast Total Counters for Addition and
Subtraction
B-108
KCX- RN Presettable/Lead-out Counters for High-Speed
Addition and Subtraction
B-118
KCH-B Counters for Display of High-speed Addition and
Subtraction
B-129
KCM-50-1/51-1 Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters) B-134
Selecting Socket
B-142
B-1
Electronic
Counters
List
List of KOYO Electronic Counters
Category
Dimensions (mm)
48 x 48
Single preset
Display
Numerical
Input/
Output
Addition
Addition and
Subtraction
Red
LED
Addition and
Subtraction
LCD
Addition/
Subtraction
LCD
Addition
Green
LED
Addition and
Subtraction
Green
LED
48 x 48
Addition and
Subtraction
Red
LED
48 x 48
Addition and
Subtraction
LCD
72 x 72
Single Preset
(with Predicted Output)
Operation
Dual Preset
Addition
Green
LED
Addition and
Subtraction
Green
LED
Green
LED
72 x 72
External Preset
72 x 144
Addition and
Subtraction
Aggregate Counter
72 x 72
Addition
Red
LED
Batch Counter
48 x 48
Addition and
Subtraction
LCD
Addition
LCD
Addition and
Subtraction
Red
LED
48 x 48
Total Counter
72 x 72
Addition
Green
LED
Addition and Subtraction
Counter for Positional
Display
B-2
72 x 144
Addition and
Subtraction
Red
LED
Model Number
1
Number of digits
2 3 4 5 6
8
Operational Speed
Source Voltage
Sensor Power
2 digits: 10 cps/1 kcps
4 digits: 10 cps/1 kcps
G : AC100V
H : AC200V
DC24V, 15mA
30Hz
1kHz
2kHz
5kHz
AC100/220V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 15mA
30Hz
200Hz
1kHz
5kHz
DC24V
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 15mA
Selectable
Optional
DC24V
-
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
10Hz/20kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 80mA
30Hz
200Hz
1kHz
10kHz
AC100 to 240V
DC24V, 60mA
DC12V, 50mA
Yes
Yes
DC12 to 24V
AC100 to 240V 50/60Hz
-
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC12V, 50mA
10Hz/20kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 80mA
500Hz/20kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC12V, 100mA
-
30Hz/500Hz
DC24V
30Hz/1kHz
AC100 to 200V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 60mA
4 digits: 30 Hz/1 kHz
6 digits: 30 Hz/5 kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
DC24V, 15mA
30Hz
200Hz
1kHz
10kHz
AC100 to 240V
DC24V
4 digits: 10 Hz/1 kHz
6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz
8 digits: 10 Hz/10 kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
10Hz/20kHz
AC100/200V 50/60Hz
B-32
Individual digit keys can set for
presetting. A large, backlit LCD for
numerical display. Prescaling and
decimal point display are also
available.
General-purpose preset counter. Green
LED for numerical display. Prescaling and
decimal point display are also available.
The 4-digit model has a timer.
Preset counter capable of both
addition and subtraction. Comparative
output operation available.
B-19
B-78
B-96
General-purpose, dual preset counter
B-86
Yes
Dual preset capable of addition and subtraction.
Comparative output operation available.
B-96
Yes
External preset, comparative output, and
zero output Count writing and read-out
B-118
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
DC24V, 60mA
Optional
DC12 to 24V
The number of digits can be selected
for presetting. A large, backlit LCD
for numerical display. Prescaling and
decimal point display are also available.
The 4-digit model has a timer.
B-32
Optional
-
Switching
B-67
The number of digits can be selected
for presetting. A large, backlit LCD for
numerical display. Prescaling and
decimal point display are also
available.
Optional
Selectable
DC12 to 24V
General-purpose, small present
counter
B-5
DC24V, 60mA
Refer to
page
Remarks
Setting of individual digit keys for
presetting.
Large, red LED for display
Predicted output and adjustment for
dual output
Optional
Switching
3/4 digits: 10 Hz/2 kHz
5/6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz
20kHz
-
Optional
Selectable
1/2 digits: 10 Hz/200 Hz
3/4 digits: 10 Hz/1 kHz
5/6 digits: 10 Hz/5 kHz
30Hz
1kHz
2kHz
5kHz
Memory Backup
Upon Power Failure
Includes 9 internal counters that are triple
preset. Pre-prediction lamp, predicted
output, and suspended equipment output
Includes 8 internal counters that are triple
preset. Arbitrary counter reset and timer
functions are available.
Includes two internal counters to allow
switching between total counting and
batch counting
B-134
B-54
Large, backlit LCD for numerical
display
B-63
Large, red LED for display
Positional display function
B-5
General-purpose
B-92
-
DC12V, 50mA
Yes
DC24V, 80mA
Positional display available.
DC24V, 100mA
Correction writing function and
zone operation available.
Yes
B-108
twin
B-129
B-3
Electronic
Counters
List
Electronic
Counters
Electronic Counters Selection Guide
Source
Voltage
Numerical
Display
Red/Green LED
for display
Operation
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition/Subtraction
With Backlight
LCD display
Size
AC100 to
240V
KCV-6S
KCV-4S
KCV-4S-C KCV-6S-C
AC100V
KCY-2D-G KCY-4D-G
AC220V
KCY-2D-H KCY-4D-H
AC100 /
220V
Relay output
KCN-4SR
DC24V
Relay output
KCN-4SR-C KCN-6SR-C
Relay output
KCN-A4SR KCN-A6SR
Transistor output
KCN-A4ST KCN-A6ST
Relay output
KCN-A4SR-C KCN-A6SR-C
Transistor output
KCN-A4ST-C KCN-A6ST-C
AC100 /
220V
Addition/
Subtraction
Numbers with Model Numbers
represent the number of digits
DC12 to
24V
48mm
Category
With memory backup
upon power failure
With Backlight
LCD display
KCN-6SR
DC24V
Single
Preset
Addition
Addition and
Subtraction
No display
AC100V
KCY-2-G KCY-4-G
AC220V
KCY-2-H KCY-4-H
Green LED
for display
AC100 /
220V
Green LED
for display
AC100 /
220V
72mm
Addition
Start
No display
AC100 /
220V
AC100 to
240V
48mm
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition/Subtraction
With Backlight
LCD display
DC12 to
24V
KCX-B4
KCX-B4M KCX-B6M
KCX-1D -2D -3D -4D -5D -6D
KCX-2DM -3DM -4DM -5DM -6DM
KCX-1 -2
Green LED
for display
AC100 /
220V
Addition
Green LED
for display
AC100/
220V
Red/Green LED
for display
Addition
With Backlight
LCD display
48mm
Total
Counter
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition
72mm
-4
KCN-4WR KCN-6WR
Transistor output
KCN-4WT KCN-6WT
Relay output
KCN-4WR-C KCN-6WR-C
Transistor output
KCN-4WT-C KCN-6WT-C
KCX-B4W KCX-B6W
KCX-B4WM KCX-B6WM
72mm
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition/Subtraction
-3
Relay output
Dual
preset
Addition and
Subtraction
KCX-B6
KCX-3W
-4W
-5W
KCX-4WM KCX-6WM
AC100 to
240V
DC12 to
24V
AC100 /
220V
KCV-4T
KCV-6T
KCV-4T-C KCV-6T-C
KCN-4T
KCN-6T
DC24V
KCN-4T-C KCN-6T-C
Green LED
for display
AC100 /
220V
KCX-B4T KCX-B6T
Green LED
for display
AC100 /
220V
KCX-4T
KCX-6T
External preset, aggregate, batch, and other counters are provided as special counters. For details, refer to page B-2.
B-4
-6W
KCX-8T
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Single Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction/Total Counters for
Addition and Subtraction
Hz/10 Hz (with Dipswitch selected)
High-speed 30
200 Hz/1 kHz (with Set-up Mode selected)
A preset counter that aggregates counts with
functions that provide a large, two-color LED for
display that is easy-to-read in a small DIN48x48 body.
Dual output of predicted output and preset output can
be set with settings for predicted output.
CE Mark
Merits
Large, easy-to-see displa
A large LED for display with character height of 12 mm (4 digits)
and 10 mm (6 digits) is used in a small DIN48x48 body.
Various types of counts
[Prescaling]
The input pulse can be converted to any values and displayed.
[Dual phase addition/subtraction by individual input]
The counting range can be from positive to negative.
However, settings are in the positive range.
[Addition-Subtraction]
Counts can be selected for positive or negative display.
Dual output with alarm output
Dual setting is possible with alarm output.
Alarm values are values prior to reaching preset values.
Easy operation
Setting and changing of preset values with individual setting keys
has the feel of digital switches
User configurabe digit number
User can configure the no. of digit.
Battery-less memory retention
EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there is no need
for battery maintenance.
Removable terminals
Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can be removed.
After wiring, the terminal cover provides a safe surface for worryfree use.
High-speed response with 10 kcps
The input response frequency for this class is a maximum of 10
kHz. Input operational speed can be adjusted to switch to 30, 200,
1 k, or 10 kHz.
IP65
Membrane is used to protect from operation with wet or dirty
hands, A special cover is also provided as an option to enhance the
protective structure.
Designed in compliance with CE and UL
Tamper proof
Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent
tampering.
Power source for a large-capacity sensor (AC
P/S type only)
You can source the power for sensor from the built-in P/S 24VDC,
60mA.
Free power supply for the AC type
The operating AC voltage is wide as 85VAC 264VAC.
B-5
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Model number system
List of Models
Category
Model Number
Source
Voltage
Number of Digits
KCV-
Sensor Source
Voltage DC24 V 60 mA
-
AC
KCV-4S
C: DC power
Blank: AC power
4
DC
KCV-4S-C
Preset counter
S Output
T Total
AC
KCV-6S
KCV
6
DC
KCV-6S-C
4 4-digit
6 6-digit
AC
KCV-4T
Series Name
4
DC
KCV-4T-C
KCN-A
Total counter
AC
KCV-6T
6
DC
KCV-6T-C
KCN-S/W
AC AC100 240V
DC DC12 24V
KCN-B
Accessories: Installation Frame
KCN-T
4-digit
6-digit
General Specifications
Specification
KCX
KCY
Item
AC power
Source voltage
AC100
240V
Permitted power fluctuation
AC85
264V
Power consumption
approx. 11 VA
KCX-RN
KCH-B
DC12
DC10
DC24 V (20-28V) 60 mA (Max. 10%p-p ripple)
Memory Backup upon
Power Failure
EEPROM (Writing Up to 100,000 times)
50
-20-70
Ambient humidity
35-85%RH (with no dewing)
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection)
(for DC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection)
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
26.4V
Memory Duration 10 years
10
Storage temperature
Vibration resistance
24V
approx. 4 W
Sensor power
Ambient temperature
KCM
DC power
(with no freezing)
Durable
Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes
No
malfunction
Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes
Durable
490 m/s2 11 ms along three axes
No
malfunction
98 m/s2 11 ms along three axes
AC power 1.5 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
DC power 1.0 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
Protective structure IP65 (front panel only)
Weight
Terminals
Approx. 150 g
Conforming wiring
0.25
Conforming crimped contact
R1.25-3
Permitted torque
B-6
0.5Nm
1.65mm
Approx. 110 g
2
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Performance Specifications
Preset Counter
Item
Category
Total Counter
Addition and Subtraction Preset Counter
Setting
Addition and Subtraction Total Counter
Single with alarm output
Number of digits
4 or 6 digits
4 or 6 digits
4-digit: 12 mm (count)/7 mm (preset) 6-digit: 10 mm (count)/7 mm (preset)
Counting range
4-digit : 0-9999 6-digit:-99999-999999
Setting range
4-digit : 0-9999 6-digit: 0-999999
KCV
Display (LED character height)
Operational speed: 30/200/1 k/10 kHz switching
Input
Negative logic 3.3 k
(AC power)/1.8 k
(DC power)
KCN-A
Input resistance: positive logic 15 k
Inpult voltage: "L" 0-3 V "H" 7-30 V
Max. signal amplitude 5 ms
Automatic reset
Responded in less than 100
Manual reset
Responded in less than 0.1 s
s
s
KCN-S/W
Responded in less than 100
External reset
Input gate duration during power failure 20
500ms
Input gate duration during power recovery
50
500ms
Output
DC output: NPN open collector output
24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V
residual voltage less than 1.5 V
KCN-B
Disabled count input
Output mode
One-shot/ Hold/Match
Output duration
10-9990 ms every 10 ms
Prescaling
0.001-99.999 (6-digit)/0.001-9.999 (4-digit)
Decimal point
Lamp for arbitrary places available
Key protection
Setting of arbitrary keys possible
Installation
Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection)
KCN-T
Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load)
KCY
Setting of reset keys possible
Prescaling is for 1x values.
I/O Specifications
Count input
200Hz
1kHz
10kHz
Positive logic 15 k
Input resistance
Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k
KCX
Input speed 30Hz
(DC power)
On delay: 0.1 ms
Off delay: 0.1 ms
Positive logic 15 k
Input resistance
Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k
KCX-RN
L 0 3V
Input voltage H 7 30V
Input response
Disabled count input
(DC power)
External reset
input
KCH-B
L 0 3V
Input voltage H 7 30V
Input response
On delay: 0.1 ms
Off delay: 0.1 ms
Input resistance
Positive logic 15 k
Negative logic 3.3 k (AC power)/1.8 k
(DC power)
Withstand voltage
Transistor output
Current
KCM
L 0 3V
Input voltage H 7 30V
Less than 35 V
Less than 100 mA
Residual voltage Less than 2 V
Relay output
Capacity
AC220V 2A
(resistance load)
AC220V 0.5A
(cos =0.4)
DC30V 0.5A
(L R=7ms)
Lifetime
more than 100,000 uses
more than 200,000 uses
more than 200,000 uses
B-7
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Output modes
Mode
Count
Output
Hold
Continuous
Hold
One-shot
Reset
One -shot
10-9990 ms
Match
Continuous
Match
Can be set in milliseconds from 10 to 9990 ms
(in Setup mode).
Output mode diagrams
One-shot output (reset count)
KCN-S/W
Hold output (continuous count)
Addition mode
Preset values
DC output
Relay output
Subtraction mode
Preset values
Alarm values
Alarm values
Reset
KCN-B
Addition mode
Subtraction mode
0
0
ON
ON
Reset
OFF
ON
DC output
OFF
ON
Relay output
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
KCN-T
One-shot duration 100 ms
(can be set from 10-9990 ms in Setup mode)
Matching mode (continuous count)
Addition mode
Subtraction mode
KCY
Alarm values
Preset values
Alarm values
0
When alarm values are set to 0,
output operations for DC output
will be the same as for relay output.
:Alarm value
setting
KCX
ON
Reset
DC output
Relay output
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
KCX-RN
When displaying alarm output (DC output), the output LED will blink on and off.
KCH-B
Counting timing
Dual input mode
KCM
Addition
Input mode for addition or subtraction
(during input of positive logic)
Addition
Subtraction
" H"
IN A
" L"
" H"
IN A
" L"
Input mode for addition or subtraction
(during input of negative logic)
Subtraction
Addition
T/2
" H"
IN B
" L"
T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4
T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4
T
T
During addition input, IN A
can be either L or H.
IN A
" L"
T/2
T/2
T
" H"
IN B
" L"
Subtraction
" H"
During addition input, IN A
can be either L or H.
T/2
T
" H"
During addition input, IN B
can be either L or H.
IN B
" L"
T/2
T/2
During addition input,
IN-B can be either L or H.
T/2
T/2
T
T
(Note)
With
B-8
or
the required counting speed is (CPS)=
1
T sec
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Wiring Diagrams
2
0V
INH
4
5
6
3
Sensor powerr
Disabled count input
INB
2
DC output
OUT
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
Count input
DC24V60mA INA
R Reset input
3
0V
INH
4
5
6
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
COM N.C. N.O.
Relay input
AC100-240 V power
KCV-4S-C
KCV-4T-C
INB
0V
INH
3
4
5
6
2
DC output
OUT
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
COM N.C. N.O.
Relay input
6T-C
Disabled count input
INA
+
R Reset input
AC100-240 V power
6S-C
Count input
Disabled count input
INB
KCV
Count input
DC24V60mA INA
Count input
2
R Reset input
Disabled count input
INA
INB
0V
INH
3
4
5
6
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
+
-
DC12-24 V power
KCN-S/W
Sensor power
6T
KCN-A
KCV-4T
6S
R Reset input
KCN-B
KCV-4S
-
DC12-24 V power
KCN-T
Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal).
I/O Circuit Diagrams
DC24V
+
Internal 24 V
ON during negative logic input
3.3k
12
5V
8 COM
1.8k
47k
10 N.O.
INA
3
22k
47k
10 N.O.
22k
5V
5V
3.3k
INB
4
1.8k
47k
INB
4
22k
47k
22k
1
OUT
5V
47k
0V
Reset
7
22k
5V
47k
22k
5
0V
47k
22k
5V
3.3k
Disabled
count
6
input
OUT
1.8k
5
7
1
5V
3.3k
Reset
8 COM
KCX-RN
3
9 N.C.
KCH-B
INA
Internal circuit
ON during negative logic input
5V
11
9 N.C.
KCX
2
KCM
Sensor
power
DC24V
DC power
KCY
AC power
1.8k
Disabled
count
6
input
47k
22k
B-9
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Input Wiring Examples
Proximity switch with NPN open collector output
Brown
KCV
Adding
Black
Input logic: Positive logic: (voltage input)(pos)
Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON)
Brown
2 Sensor source ( DC24V)
Adding
3
IN A
4
IN B
Subtracting
KCN-A
Black
Blue
Recommended proximity switch: APS
Black
-
-N
Black
Black
7 Reset input
Black
6 Disabled count input
Blue
0V
5
E
Recommended proximity switch: APS
DC 2-wire proximity switch
3
IN A
4
IN B
-
6 Disabled count input
5 0V
-E2
Input logic: Arranged with encoder output and set as positive or negative logic
Input mode: Dual input (Dip switch 2 OFF)
Red
(brown)
Adding
7 Reset input
Rotary encoder
Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input)(neg)
Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON)
KCN-B
( DC24V)
2 Sensor source
Subtracting
Black
Black
KCN-S/W
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output
Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input)(neg)
Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON)
Brown
Subtracting
3
IN A
4
IN B
Green
(black)
Blue
2 Sensor source (DC 24V)
3 IN A
KCN-T
4 IN B
White
(white)
7 Reset input
5 0V
Black
(blue)
6 Disabled count input
KCY
5 0V
Recommended proximity switch: APS
-
-Z
Recommended rotary encoder: TRD-J -RZ S
TRD-N -RZ S
With the DC type, please supply source voltage above 20 V.
Switch or relay
KCX
Input logic: Negative logic (no voltage input)(neg)
Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 OFF)
Operational speed: 30 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON)
2
Sensor power source (DC 24 V)
3
IN A
Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input)(pos)
Input mode: Input for addition or subtraction (Dip switch 2 ON)
Operational speed: 30 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON)
Addition
KCX-RN
Sensor power source (DC 24 V)
3
IN A
Addition
Subtraction
Subtraction
4
IN B
4
IN B
7
Reset
7
Reset
6 Disabled count input
KCH-B
2
5 0V
6 Disabled count input
Input flow is heavy, so this
connection is recommended.
5 0V
There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source.
KCM
Output Wiring Examples
NPN open collector output
Relay output
COM 8
OUT
1
0V
5
Load power
DC24V
B-10
Load power
Load
N.C. 9
Load
N.O. 10
Load
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Front Panel Layout and Description
Panel guide
Count value (red)
OUT
K/P
KCV
Digit keys
6
Key protection (red)
Operating mode
Blinks when key protection is ON
(only when the key is ON).
Setup Mode
Displays key protection
settings.
4
5
2
3
1
KCN-B
RST
Operating mode
Allows changes in preset values
After changing preset values,
total key input is ineffective for
about one second. Preset values
then take effect.
Setup mode
Allows to configure the setups.
KCN-A
Preset values (green)
Operating mode
Displays preset values.
Setup mode
Displays set items.
KCN-S/W
COUNTER
Operating mode
Lit when output is ON.
Blinks when alarm
output is ON.
RST key
Operating mode
Allows count values to be reset
(0 for Addition and preset values for Subtraction).
Setup mode
Allows selection of set items.
KCY
The Total Counter has several lamps that differ with respect to the Preset Counter
Output
: None
Key protection : None other than for display in compliance with RST key.
Preset values : Not displayed in Operating mode.
Digit keys
: Not effective in Operating mode.
KCN-T
Output (red)
Operating mode
Displays count values.
Setup mode
Displays setting contents.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be
verified after about one second.
2. Resetting the count
1
Press the 1 key and the
display changes to 124
2
Press the 2 key and the
display changes to 134
3
Press the 3 key and the
display changes to 234
KCX-RN
0 1
Example: When the counter is
"
"
preset to 123
KCH-B
1.Changing preset values
Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one:
KCX
Key strokes
KCM
Press the RST key to reset the currently displayed count. The
count is reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed. For
example, the current count 0010 is reset to 0 for Addition. It is
reset to the preset value for Subtraction.
3. Protecting the keys
Turning the Dip switch ON disables the reset and digit keys. If
disabled keys are pressed, the LED for the corresponding key
will blink. If Key protection is selected to disable keys in Setup
mode, Dip switch 6 will come ON. At factory setup, Key
protection in Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning
Dip switch 6 ON will disable all keys.
6
RST
4
5
2
3
1
B-11
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Configure dip switches
Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode.
Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect.
When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values.
ON
Dip switch
At the factory setups, all switches are OFF.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
KCN-A
KCV
1
Selection of the operating mode
Selection of key protection
Selection of the output mode (with a Total counter, this slot is empty)
Selection of count memory
Selection of the operational mode (with a Total counter, Addition is fixed)
Selection of the input mode
Selection of counting speed
Counting speed
KCN-S/W
The counting speed is selected with Dip switch 1.
ON
OFF
Counting speed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW1
30Hz
ON
10kHz
OFF
Input mode
SW2
Factory setup
KCN-B
Input mode
The input mode is selected with Dip switch 2.
ON
KCN-T
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Dual input
OFF
Operational mode
SW3
Factory setup
Operational mode
The operational mode is selected with Dip switch 3.
ON
OFF
KCY
Input for Addition or Subtraction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Addition
ON
Subtraction
OFF
Counting memory
SW4
Factory setup
Counting memory
The counting memory is selected with Dip switch 4.
KCX
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Memory upon power failure
ON
Power source reset
OFF
Factory setup
KCX-RN
Output mode
The output mode is selected with Dip switch 5. Match output can be selected in Setup mode.
ON
KCH-B
OFF
Output mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW5
Hold output
ON
One-shot output
OFF
Factory setup
Key protection
With Dip switch 6, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using
[Protect keys]. Setting for keys to protect can performed in Setup mode. At the factory setup,
[Do not protect keys] is set.
KCM
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operating mode
Key protection
SW6
Settings in Setup
mode take effect
ON
Do not
OFF
Operating mode
SW8
Factory setup
The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8.
ON
OFF
1
2
3
Dip switch 7 is not used.
B-12
4
5
6
7
8
Setup mode
ON
Run mode
OFF
Factory setup
Setup mode
Setting of prescaling values is with the digit
key. (*1.000)
Count values for display
1.0
Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1
Setup mode
Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the
Setup mode.
Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start
the Run mode.
2. Operations in Setup mode
4-digit: 0.001-9.999
6-digit: 0.001-99.999
Press the Reset key to proceed.
RST
Prescaling settings 2
(scL2)
Setting of the prescaling decimal point is with
the digit key.(*1.000)
Digit key: Displays count values.
RST
Input logic settings(si g)
RST
Output mode settings(c-op)
Selection is with the digit key.
Digit key: Displays count values.
RST
pos Selects positive logic.
neg Selects negative logic.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Selection is with the digit key.
Digit key: Displays count values.
1
2
Setting of the number of digits is with the
digit key. The number of digits is displayed
in accordance with the digit key.
RST
Press the Reset key to proceed.
The display position of the decimal point is set with
the digit key. The decimal place is displayed in
accordance with the digit key. Digit key 1 will set no
decimal place (*No decimal point).
Decimal point settings(d. p)
Count values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Digit key
6 5 4 3 2 1
RST
eq
Selects matching output.
di ps Selected with Dip switch 5.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
KCN-S/W
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Alarm output settings(set)
Setting is with the digit key(*0 )
Count values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Digit key
6 5 4 3 2 1
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Selection of disable or enable to
set the Reset key is with the digit key.
Reset key protection(rpro)
Digit key: for K/P display
*Disable
1
2
RST
Enable
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Digit key protection
(ppro)
Selection of disable or enable to
set the Reset key is with the digit key.
(4digit
6digit
Digit key: for K/P display
*Disabled
*Disabled
*Disabled
*Disabled
*Disabled
*Disabled
1
2
3
4
5
6
RST
/ Enabled
/ Enabled
/ Enabled
/ Enabled
/ Enabled
/ Enabled
Press the Reset key to proceed to the final menu.
di p1 Selects Dip switch 1.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
1
2
Selects 1x.
Count values for display 6 5 4 3 2 1
Digit key
6 5 4 3 2 1
Digit key: Displays count values.
1000 Selects 1 kHz.
200 Selects 200 Hz.
Selects 10x.
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Selection of number of digits(dgt)
Selection is with the digit key.
1
2
3
Selects 1000x.
Selects 100x.
KCN-B
RST
1 0 0 0
1 0 0.0
1 0.0 0
1.0 0 0
KCN-T
1
2
3
4
In Setup mode, the count can be initialized using the menu as
follows:
Represents factory setup.
Counting speed settings(cps)
0 0
KCN-A
Prescaling settings 1
(scL1)
KCV
Can be changed from 10-9990 ms
Press the Reset key to proceed.
RST
RST
Run mode
0 0s
KCY
1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode
Count values for display (Blank) 0. 1
Digit key
6 5 4 3 2 1
KCX
200/ 1 kHz, Dip switch 1
Positive or negative logic
Match output, Dip switch 5
Duration of One-shot output can be set
from 10-9990 ms (in 10-ms increments)
4-digit: 0.001-9.999
(5) Prescaling
6-digit: 0.001-99.999
(6) Prescaling factor
The scaling factor can be set for values
used in prescaling.
1x
10x
100x
1000x
(7) Number of digits
The number of counter digits for display
can be set.
4-digit: 1-4 digits
6-digit: 1-6 digits
(8) Decimal place
An arbitrary digit can be set for display
of the decimal point.
(9) Predicted output
Offset values can be set with respect to
preset values.
4-digit: 0-9999
6-digit: 0-999999
(10) Resetting key protection
Setting to disable the reset key
can be performed.
(11) Protecting digit keys
Setting to disable an arbitrary
digit key can be performed.
With a Total Counter, items 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, and 11 are skipped.
Output duration is set with the digit key.
Digit key 1 to set in increments of 10 ms
will be rendered ineffective (*100 ms).
Digit key
1 Not used
1 Used
KCX-RN
(1) Counting speed
(2) Input logic
(3) Output mode
(4) Output duration
Output duration settings(outt)
KCH-B
Items that can be configured in Setup Mode
K/P display
Disabled with lamp on
Enabled with blinking lamp off
The number of digits selected for setting of digits will render effective
the settings for the decimal place, alarm output, and key protection
that follow. Only the selected number of digits is set.
With the Total Counter, items marked with an * are skipped.
When changing the setting of the number of digits selected, the
decimal point will be removed, the alarm output will be set to 0, and
preset values will automatically be changed to 5.
After changing the default settings in Setup mode, press the Reset key
in Run mode and reset count values.
B-13
KCM
Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in
Setup mode.
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Operational Example (for KCV-6S)
Run mode
Changing preset values
1. Change the preset value from 120 to 240
Before changing
KCV
COUNTER
COUNTER
OUT
OUT
OUT
K/P
K/P
K/P
6
KCN-A
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
Change complete
COUNTER
RST
4
5
6
2
3
1
RST
4
5
3
OUT
K/P
6
2
1
Press Digit key 2 twice.
COUNTER
RST
4
5
6
2
3
1
RST
4
5
2
3
1
Press Digit key 3 once.
2. The preset value will be 240, and operations will continue with the altered value. Preset values will take
effect about 1 second after being changed.
Positioning application example with encoder
KCN-T
Positioning of a conveyor can be done in increments of 0.1 mm. It sets the Alarm in 20mm prior to the
preset value to stop the conveyor in accurate position.
Pulley diameter
15 dia
Encoder pulse count 1000P/R
KCV-6S
COUNTER
Set item
OUT
KCY
Counting speed
Pulley
K/P
4
6
RST
5
2
3
Input logic
1
Output logic
Output duration
KCX
Encoder
Alarm output (deceleration)
Preset output (suspended)
Prescaling
Scale factor
No. of digits
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Control Box
Motor
1. Prescale calculation
KCM
Prescale
pulley diameter (mm)
encoder pulse count
3.1416 15
1000
0.047-mm pulse
B-14
Set item
10kHz
Negative logic
One-shot
100ms
0.047
10
6
Decimal point
Between 1st and 2nd digit
Alarm output
20.0
Represents factory setup.
Electronic
Counters
KCV
2. Switching to Setup mode
Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON (Dip switches 1-7 are OFF).
3. Changing setting contents
OUT
These values are initial values.
Set the scaling factor to 10.
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
KCV
The setting screen for
Prescaling settings 2 is displayed.
The setting screen for
Counting speed is first displayed.
OUT
K/P
Press the
3
key 1 time ans 10 will appear.
KCN-A
The setting screen for Input logic is
displayed.
OUT
OUT
Press the RST key to proceed.
Press the RST key to proceed.
The setting screen for Output mode
is displayed.
The setting screen for the
Number of digits is displayed.
K/P
OUT
These values are initial values.
Press the RST key to proceed.
Press the RST key to proceed.
The setting screen for
Output duration is displayed.
The setting screen for the
Decimal point is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
OUT
K/P
Press the 2 key and the decimal point will be displayed
between the first and second digit.
KCY
The setting screen for
Prescaling settings 1 is displayed.
Set prescaling to 0.047.
Press the 4 key 9 times.
Press the 2 key 4 times.
Press the 1 key 7 times, and 0.047
will appear.
Display the decimal point between the
first and second digit.
K/P
KCN-B
OUT
KCN-T
These values are initial values.
KCN-S/W
K/P
K/P
OUT
OUT
K/P
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
KCX
These values are initial values.
The setting screen for
Alarm output is displayed.
Set the alarm output to 20.
K/P
K/P
Press the
3
KCX-RN
Press the RST key to proceed.
OUT
key twice and 20.0 will appear.
KCH-B
OUT
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
KCM
Setting is complete after this step.
4. Switching to Run mode
Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup mode and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode)
(When power is OFF, all the setups in Setup mode are saved in the memory).
5. Starting Run mode
Be sure to turn power ON after changing the setups in Setup mode and press the RST key to reset
the count values.
B-15
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Error Codes
Common Errors
Error
Error type
e21
Memory data error
Decimal point
blinking
Counter Overflow Error
Error details
Corrective Action
Preset values and Setup mode items have
changed.
Count values have exceeded the display
range.
Counter Overflow Error
KCN-S/W
count value will be set to 5000, and the Setup mode
contents will be set to settings used at factory setup.
Decimal point blinking
Negative display Counter Underflow Error Count values are below the display range.
Error display will be cleared by the " RST " key or
when the count valup return to the count range. In the
counter, correct calculation is in a range
from - 2147483.648 to 2147483.647.
All digits in the display turn to 0
OUT
1
K/P
KCN-B
Press the RST key to eliminate the error display. The
OUT
1
K/P
Decimal point blinking
KCN-T
Counter Underflow Error
OUT
Decimal point blinking
OUT
1
K/P
KCY
Decimal point blinking
OUT
K/P
Decimal point blinking
Option
Option
Model Number
Rubber packing
KC-48P
Front cover
KC-48C
Details
Prevents water from entering the control panel by
installing this between the installation panel and
KCV.
Protects the front panel from dirt and the like.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
K/P
Negative display
1
K/P
OUT
B-16
Material: Soft silicone rubber
Key operation can be performed with the front cover as-is.
Keep the wires away from power line.
With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the
KCV counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible.
Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals.
For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended.
When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts
at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation.
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Fork-shaped crimped contacts
For angled installation, connection with the contact is
insufficient. Like in the illustration above, install the
contact perpendicular to the horizontal.
Round crimped contact
KCN-B
(1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal
and the input common
0-V terminal
are internally short-circuited.
(2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the
voltage.
(3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch.
(4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about one
second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key input
takes effect when the count is reset valid preset value will be saved in
the memory at loss of power.
(5)It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep the
setups for the future maintenance.
(6) Use in the following environments should be avoided:
A location where the ambient temperature is above 50 or below
10 .
A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt
temperature changes may cause condensation.
A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like.
A location exposed to direct sunlight.
A location with significant vibrations or impact.
(7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation
resistance, or the like, remove the KCV counter from control box.
Precautions for Wiring
Installation and Removal of the Main Body
Installation
Installation of the Terminal Block and Terminal Cover
KCX
KCY
Insert the main body through the panel installation port.
KCN-T
Precautions for Use
KCV
Precautions
Electronic
Counters
KCV
Main body
From the rear, mount the installation frame.
Terminal block
KCX-RN
Fixing screw
Terminal block cover
KCH-B
Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal
block during shipping.
Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm.
Install the terminal block after wiring is complete.
Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally.
KCM
Removal
Holding the tabs, spread them 2-3 mm.
While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you.
B-17
Electronic
Counters
KCV
(in mm)
External Dimensions
63
100 (AC power source)
48
60 (DC power source)
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
48
44.5
KCV
Installation frame
Depth
Panel thickness 1-5
6
Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block
50
10
480+0.2
Close installation possible
70 or more
55 or more
KCX
KCX-RN
KCH-B
1
45+0.3
0
Square
6.5
KCN-T
KCY
2.When the installation handle is vertical
Hole
45+0.3
0
When aligning the front cover (KC48C and
KC48P), line dimensions should be more
than 55 mm.
KCM
106mm
70 or more
Installation frame
Complying wiring
: 0.25 1.65mm2
Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3
Permitted torque
: 0.5Nm
B-18
AC power source
30.48
9.5
KCN-B
Terminal screw
66mm
Boring Dimensions for Installation
1.When the installation handle is horizontal
4 7.62
7.62
6.5
1.12
DC power source
Electronic
Counters
Single Preset Counters for Addition or Subtraction
Maximum counting speed:
30cps/5kcps(selected by dip switch)
200cps/1kcps(selected in Setup mode)
KCN-A
With the DIN standard of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the full
featured preset counter incorporates an easy to read LCD
display.
Just press keys to set values by digit, or change operation
between addition and subtraction.
KCN-A
Merits
Small body and easy to read display
13mm
10mm
Count display
Preset value
Key Protection to lock keys individually
On the front panel, each digit key and the Reset key can be locked
to protect against erroneous operation. The digit keys can be also
used to increment the corresponding digit values.
Count reset key
DC power as thin as 55 mm
With minimum space requirement, the control board can be
installed anywhere.
55mm
AC power is 90 mm thick.
KCX
Displayed values are backlit to facilitate reading in darkness.
KCN-T
Keys for setting
corresponding digits
Backlit LCD integrated in all models
KCN-S/W
Easy operation.
Values can be set and changed digit by digit simply by pressing
the corresponding keys.
KCN-B
With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full
screen display of either 4-digit or 6-digit numbers with the height
of 13 mm or 10 mm.
KCY
KCN-A
Keypad protection cover
A series of models to meet all your needs
All eight models include advanced functions such as prescaling
and decimal display. These models can be combined appropriately
to satisfy your requirements.
EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement
The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells. The
memory can store all counts, preset values and mode settings.
Output options
1c relay output
Either a sink or source can be used for
DC output.
Load
Water proofed front panel
The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) for
insulation from dust and water.
Load
Isolated from internal circuit by photocoupler
B-19
KCM
61mm
KCH-B
KCX-RN
A keypad cover is also attached to provide additional protection .
Switching between addition and subtraction
Addition mode and Subtraction mode
Addition mode
In the Addition mode, the count
increments by one for each pulse
input. When the value has reached a
preset value, the counter generates a
signal.
Preset value
Count
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
3
1
Pulse input
Preset value
In the Subtraction mode, the
count decrements by one for
each pulse input. When the
value has reached zero, the
counter generates a signal.
Count
KCN-A
Subtraction mode
KCN-S/W
2
4
RST
Sensor
0
KCN-B
Incremented
to 990
Decremented
to 10
2
4
RST
Sensor
0
3
1
Pulse input
Prescaling
Converting the number of pulses to quantity or dimension
KCN-T
Quantity
Multiplied by 4
3
RST
1
Prescaled at 4
KCY
Four workpieces per pulse
Roller for length
measurement
Cut length (in mm)
Cutter
KCX
Can be set in a desired unit.
KCX-RN
You need not consider
the roller's diameter
when setting the
counter value.
2
4
Rotary
encoder
RST
3
1
Prescaled at 0.8
0.8 mm per pulse
Using a present scale, the count is converted to quantity or dimension.
Easy operation
Changing a preset value: On the front panel, press a digit key once to increment the corresponding
digit by one.
KCM
KCH-B
2
4
Sensor
Example: When the counter is preset to 123
2
4
RST
3
1
Pressing 1
key increments the first digit by one to 1 2 4
Pressing 2
key increments the second digit by one to 1 3 4
Pressing 3
key increments the third digit by one to 2 3 4
Each digit is preset upon change.
B-20
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Key Protection against erroneous operation
All keys on the front panel can be locked to secure current settings.
These keys can be protected individually.
The digit keys can be also used to increment the corresponding digit.
and the 0V
KCN-A
Example: Protecting the fourth digit of KCN-A4SR Counter
(1)In the Setup mode, select the key to be protected.
(2)Short circuit the Key Protection input
In this case, choose the digit 4.
pin .
Protectable keys
2
3
1
KCN-S/W
4
RST
KCN-A
Short circuit
Displaying a decimal point
KCN-B
A decimal point can be displayed at
a desired location.
Decimal point
2
5
3
1
KCN-T
4
6
RST
Switching the input logic between positive and negative
Device choices are expanded by two input logics available for positive (voltage) input and negative (no voltage) input.
KCX
KCY
Relay
Photoelectric sensor
Relay output
KCN-A SR
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Proximity swith
KCN-A ST
Rotary encoder
B-21
KCM
DC output
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
List of models
Source
voltage
Model number system
Sensor
power
Output
Relay
output
DC24V
only
6-digit counters
KCN-A4SR-C
KCN-A6SR-C
KCN-A4ST-C
KCN-A6ST-C
KCN-A4SR
KCN-A6SR
KCN-A
C:
DC power
Blank: AC power
None
DC output
KCV
4-digit counters
AC110V
or
AC200V
DC24V
15mA
Relay
output
Series
R: Relay output
T: DC output
S:Single setting
KCN-A
4: 4-digit
6: 6-digit
General Specifications
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Item
Source
voltage
Power
consumption
Sensor
power
Specification
AC
AC 85
115V, or AC 180
DC
DC 20
28V (Max. 10%p-p ripple)
AC
Approx. 5VA
DC
Approx. 2W
AC
DC 24V (20
DC
None
KCN-T
KCY
Storage temperature
Ambient/Storage humidity
10
50
20
70
35
(with no freezing)
85%RH (with no dewing)
Withstand
voltage
AC
AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC input, OV and relay output interconnection)
DC
AC 2kV for one monute (between 0V and relay output)
Insulation
resistance
AC
Min. 20M
at DC 500V (between AC input/0V/relay output)
DC
Min. 20M
at DC 500V (between 0V and relay output)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
KCX
28V) 15mA (Max. 10%p-p ripple)
Memory backup at power failure EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes) Either power-on reset or memory backup can be selected in Setup mode.
Ambient temperature
Noise
resistance
AC
DC
Coating
KCM
B-22
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50G)
(Shock applied three times in each case)
No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s
1.5kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1
1kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1
s width and 1 ns rise time)
s width and 1 ns rise time)
IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash.
Installation
Flush mounting
Connection
Terminal block
Mass
(weight)
KCH-B
KCX-RN
240V
AC
Approx. 220g
DC
Approx. 110g
2
(10G)
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Performance Specification
Item
Specification
Addition or subtration (selectable)
Setting
Single
Number of digits
4 or 6 digits
Setting range
4 digits: 0
Counting rage
4 igits:
Counting speed
30 cps or 5kcps (selected by Dip Switch 1) 200cps or 1kcps (selected in Setup mode)
Input mode
Addition or subtration (selected by Dip Switch 2)
9999 6 digits: 0
999999
9999 6 digits:
99999
999999
Negative (no voltage) or positive (selected in Setup mode)
Responded within 0.2ms
External reset input
Minimum pulse width: 6ms
Auto reset
Responded within 0.2ms (14ms at 30cps)
Manual reset
Responded within 0.1 s
Power reset
Power shutdown: 1 s or more Reset duration: 1 s or less (until restart)
Output
NPN open collector or relay contact 1c (depending on models)
KCN-A
Input logic
Count disable input
Output mode
One Shot (momentary output) or Hold (selected by Dip Switch 3), or Countup (selected in Setup mode)
Output duration in One Shot mode
100ms, or 10
Key protection
Both the Reset key and digit set keys, or individual key protection (selected in Setup mode)
Zero setting
Enabled or disabled (selected in Setup mode)
Off delay
Relay output
On delay
Off delay
14ms or less
15ms or less
24ms or less
24ms or less
2.5m or less
3.5ms or less
13ms or less
13ms or less
1kcps
1ms or less
2.5ms or less
11ms or less
11ms or less
5kcps
0.5ms or less
2ms or less
11ms or less
11ms or less
Decimal point display
Any location (selected in Setup mode)
Prescaling
4 digits: 0.001
9.999 6 digits: 0.001
KCY
30cps
200cps
KCN-T
Open collector output
On delay
KCN-B
9990ms (selected in Setup mode)
Maximum counting
speed
I/O response
KCN-S/W
999
KCN-A
Operation
99.999 (selected in Setup mode)
Off delay time applies only to the Countup mode.
Input
speed
1kcps
5kcps
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
KCX-RN
Input
voltage
Count disable
input
200cps
Input
Positive: 15k
resistance Negative: 3.3k
Input
On delay: 0.2ms
response Off delay: 0.2ms
Input
Positive: 15k
resistance Negative: 3.3k
Input
voltage
KCH-B
Count input
30cps
KCX
I/O Specifications
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
Input
On delay: 6ms or less
response Off delay: 6ms or less
Input
Positive: 15k
resistance Negative: 3.3k
Input
voltage
Withstand
voltage
DC output
(Type T)
Relay output
(Type R)
KCM
External reset
input
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
Max. 35 V
Current
Max. 100 mA
Residual
voltage
Max. 2 V
Capacity
AC220V 2A
(resistance load)
100,000
Durability Min.
contacts
AC220V 0.5A
(cos =0.4)
Min. 200,000
contacts
DC30V 0.5A
(L R=7ms)
Min. 200,000
contacts
B-23
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Output modes
Mode
Count
Signal output
Hold
Continued
Held
One Shot
Reset
Momentary
(for 10 to 9990 ms )
Equal
Continued
Only when the count
equals the preset value
Can be set in 10 miliseconds from 10 to 9990 ms (in Setup mode).
KCN-A
Output mode diagrams
Hold mode
OUT: Held
Count: Continued
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Addition
One Shot mode
Subtraction
OUT: One Shot
Count: Reset
Addition
SET
Subtraction
SET
0
0
Reset
Reset
OUT
OUT
KCN-T
100 ms in One Shot mode, or 10 to 9990 ms (can be set in Setup mode)
OUT: Equal
Equal mode
Count: Continued
Addition
Subtraction
KCY
SET
0
KCX
Reset
OUT
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Only when the count equals the preset value
Output duration depends on the counting speed. There is no DC
output at 2kcps or relay output at 100cps or more.
Counting timing
Positive (voltage) input
Negative (no voltage) input
"H"
"H"
"L"
"L"
T
T
2
T
B-24
2
Note
T
T
2
T
2
or
Counted at rising
or falling edge.
Minimum speed required (cps)
1
Tsec
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
ut
np
ni
tio
tec
KCN-A
KCN-A
Dimensions of Terminal
block
np
ni
ut
tio
np
8.5
10.55
5.2
1.7
Ke
6.3
yp
ro
tec
ni
mm
o
Co
DC power DC24V
ut
OV
in
bl
e
IN
isa
t
pu
in
Co
u
IN nt
H d
nt
OUT
KP
t
A6SR-C
Co
u
AC200V
DC output
pu
KCN-A4SR-C
AC100V
Reset input R
KCN-S/W
COM
N.O
Relay output
ro
Ke
Reset input R
N.C
yp
in
p
np
ut
OV
Co
mm
on
i
le
IN
isa
b
ut
in
p
Co
u
IN nt
H d
nt
Ke
Co
u
ow
rp
V
ut
A6ST-C
er
ut
KCN-A4ST-C
co
yp
inp mm
ro
ut on
tec
OV
tio
ni
np
ut
KP
A6SR
Se
n
DC sor
24 pow
V
15 er
mA
Co
un
ti
np
ut
Co
IN
u
IN nt
H dis
ab
Se
le
n
in
p
O so
KCN-A4SR
KP
Wiring Diagrams
Screw M3
7.62
1.32
6.3
1.32
N.C
COM
N.O
Relay output
KCN-T
Wire section: 0.25 1.65mm 2
Conforming criped contact: 1.25-3
DC power DC24V
I/O Circuit Diagrams
ON for negative
input ON
5V
For relay
output
2
9 N.C
11 N.O.
15k
5V
10 COM
3.3k
Count
input
3
11 N.O.
15k
5V
5V
3.3k
7
7
Reset
15k
15k
10
10
OUT
5V
OUT
5V
3.3k
3.3k
0V
11
Count
disable
input
4
15k
5
0V
4
15k
5
5V
Key
protection
input
6
KCM
11
Count
disable
input
KCH-B
3.3k
Reset
9 N.C
13
10 COM
3
Internal circuit
ON for negative
input ON
KCX-RN
2
DC24V
KCX
For relay
output
Internal power
source 24V
3.3k
Count
input
DC Power
KCY
AC Power
Sensor
power
source
DC24V
KCN-B
Reset input R
5V
Key
protection
input
6
B-25
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Input Wiring Examples (count, reset and count disable)
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output
Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos)
DC24V
power
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg)
Brown
(Red)
24V
2
KCV
Black
(White)
KCN-A
Black
(White)
KCN-S/W
24V sensor power
0V
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Recommended proximity switch: APS
-
Brown
(Red)
24V
DC24V
power
Black
(White)
Black
(White)
7 Reset input
24V sensor power
3
Count input
7 Reset input
Black
(White)
4
4
Count disable input
Blue
(Black)
5 0V
-T
E2
Recommended proximity switch: APS
Count disable input
5 0V
-
-N
E
Rotary encoder
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg)
Input logic: Positive or negative to be set according to the encoder output
2
24V sensor power
3
Count input
White
DC24V
power
24V
2
24V sensor power
3
Count input
5
0V
0V
Red
Black
KCN-T
2
0V
Count input
3
DC 2-wire proximity switch
KCN-B
Proximity switch with NPN open collector output
7 Reset input
Count disable input
KCY
4
Green
Black
5 0V
-
Recommended rotary encoder: TRD-J -S(one-phase output)
-Z
Switch or relay
Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos)
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Recommended proximity switch: APS
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input(neg)
2
24V sensor power
2
24V sensor power
3
Count input
3
Count input
7
Reset input
7
Reset input
4
Count disable input
4
Count disable input
5
0V
5
0V
KCM
This connection is preferable to accommodate high input current.
Output Wiring Examples
NPN open collector output
Relay output
Compatible with relay drive
OUT 10
Load
N.O
11
COM
10
MAX.100mA
0V 11
Load power rated at 24 V
B-26
Load
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Front Panel Layout and Description
KCN-A
Front panel
Count (zero-suppressed)
).
Hz
6
Reset key
2
5
RST
3
1
"SET" indicates that a value
is preset and displayed.
KCY
Resets initial settings in the
Setup mode.
4
Measurement unit
Displayed in the Setup mode
Hz: counts per second
ms: output duration in the One
Shot mode
KCN-B
Output status
"OUT" is displayed when output
is enabled.
KCN-T
Preset value
Initial settings are displayed in
the Setup mode.
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Character height: 13mm for 4-digit display
10mm for 6-digit display
Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode.
A negative count is preceded by the minus sigh (
Digit set keys
KCX-RN
Rear side
KCX
Use these keys to set or change a value. A
preset value can be modified digit by digit. In
the Setup mode, a preset value is replaced by
initial settings.
Array of four dip switches
4
1
10
6
setting
7
8
9
5
KCH-B
3
14
11
12
13
KCM
2
Connecting speed
Input mode
Output mode
Operation mode
B-27
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
2. Operation in Setup mode
Using the keys
In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows:
1. Changing a preset value
On the front panel, press a set key once to increment the
corresponding digit by one.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Count speed(speed)
Use the set key to select a value.
Set key: Display
1
2
3
9
200 200cps.
1000 1kcps.
dip1 Follows the setting of DIP
switch 1.*
KCV
RST
6
RST
4
5
2
3
1
Example: When the counter is preset to 123
Pressing 1 key
124
Pressing 2 key
134
Pressing 3 key
234
Count memory(count)
Input logic(signl)
2. Resetting the count
Press the RST key to reset the currently displayed count.
The count is reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed.
For example, the current count "0010" is reset to "0" in the
Addition mode, and to the preset value in the Subtraction mode.
RST
Output mode(c-op)
You can lock the RST key and the set keys by short circuiting
the Key Protection input pin
and the 0V pin . The keys to
be protected can be selected in the Setup mode.
RST
Output duration(out-t)
Standard initialization using the dip switches
Use the dip switches on the rear panel to initialize the counter
speed and modes. This initialization should be performed before
you turn the power on.
No.
Dip switches
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
All switches are set
to OFF at delivery.
Item
ON/ indicated
OFF by
ON
30
1
Counting speed OFF
5K
2
Input mode OFF
UP
3
Output mode OFF
4
Operation mode OFF
RUN
ON
DWN
ON
ON
SET
RST
KCX
KCX-RN
KCH-B
7)Decimal point:
8)Key protection:
30cps
5Kcps
Subtraction
Addition
One Shot (100 ms)
Hold
Setup
Run
can initialize the counter to non200cps or 1kcps
Off (power-on reset)
Positive (voltage) input
Countup
Output duration in the One Shot mode
can be set to 10 to 9990 ms in 10 ms
increments.
Four digits: 0.001 to 9.999
Six digits: 0.001 to 99.999
Can be displayed at any digit location.
Reset key and/or any set keys can be
RST
Decimal point(point)
KCM
Use the keys to select a value.
Set key: Display
1 pos Positive logic
2 neg Negative logic*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to select a value.
Set key: Display
Run mode
Rest key protection
(r-pro)
RST
Set key protection
(p-pro)
1. Set Dip switch 4 to ON then turn the power on to enter into the
Setup mode.
2. Set Dip switch 4 to OFF then turn the power on to enter into the
Run mode.
Initial
values set in the Setup mode are written to the memory
*
when the power is off.
switch 3.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to set the output duration.
The 1 key is invalid because the duration
must be set in 10ms unites.(100ms *)
Display
Blank
1 0 0 ms
6 5 4 3 2 1
Set Keys
Press the Reset key to proceed.
1. 0 0 0
6 5 4
.3
2 16
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to set the decimal point
place. The decimal point is displayed in
the digit place for the specified set key.
(Without decimal point *)
Display
0. .
0 0. .
0 .
0 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to select a value
Set key: Display
1 enab Enables the reset key.
2 disa Disables the reset key.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to set each set key to
be enabled( o )or disabled( - ).
(*4-digit type:---- 6-digit type:------)
Set key: Display
Output when the
set value is 0(p0out)
Setup mode
selected for protection.
eq Coincidence output
dip3 Follows the setting DIP
Set Keys
RST
RST
1. Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
B-28
1 cler Power on reset.
2 retn Backup for power failure*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
(1.000*)
Display
Set Keys
Mode selected
Custom initialization in the setup mode
6)Prescale:
Set key: Display
Use the set keys to set the prescale.
Prescale(scale)
Set Dip switch 4 to the OFF position to start operation.
In the Setup mode, you
standard values.
1)Counting speed:
2)Count memory:
3)Input logic:
4)Output mode:
5)Output duration:
Use the set keys to select a value.
1
2
3. Protecting the keys
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
RST
Each digit is preset upon change.
Press the Reset key to proceed.
RST
1 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 1
2 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 2
3 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 3
4 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 4
5 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 5
6 - (Disabled) o(Enabled) Digit 6
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Use the set keys to select a value.
Set key: Display
1 disa Output disabled*
2 enab Output enabled
Press the reset key to return to the count
speed menu.
Indicates a value set at delivery
Important: Always press the Reset key in the Run mode
after changing initial settings.
When you enable key protection, short circuit the
Notes
Key Protection input pin 6 and the 0V pin 5.
Keys not available for specific operation are
inversely highlighted.
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Operation Example (for KCN-A4S)
Run mode
Changing the preset value
1. Change 20 to 30 as follows:
After change
KCN-A
Before change
3
2
4
1
3
RST
1
KCN-S/W
2
4
RST
KCN-A
On the front panel,
press 2 key once.
The preset value is always zero-suppressed.
2. The new preset value 30 will be used for the subsequent operation.
Setup mode
KCN-B
Set the prescale to 4 to count the number of workpieces processed as follows:
Quantity
2
4
Sensor
RST
KCN-T
Multiplied by 4
3
1
Prescaled at 4
KCY
Four workpieces per pulse
1. Switch to Setup mode.
Set Dip switch 4 to ON then turn the power on to enter into the Setup mode.
On the counting speed screen, press
Dip switch 1 to select the initial
speed.
KCX
2. Set or change the initial settings.
On the Output duration screen, leave
the initial setting (100 ms)
unchanged.
KCX-RN
Press the RST key to proceed.
Press the RST key to proceed.
On the Prescale screen, press the
4 key three times to change the
current setting to 4.000.
KCH-B
On the Count memory screen, press
"2" key to select memory backup at
power failure.
Press the RST key to proceed.
KCM
On the Input logic screen, press "2"
key to select negative logic.
All necessary settings are now
completed.
Press the RST key to proceed.
On the Output mode screen, press
"2" key to select the mode selected
by dip switch 3.
3. Switch to Run mode.
Set Dip switch 4 to OFF, and turn the power off then turn it on
again to enter into the Run mode. (Initial values set in the Setup
mode are written to the memory when the power is off.)
4. Start up Run mode
Press the RST key to proceed.
Turn the power on after changing initial setups, and then press
the RST key in the Run mode.
B-29
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
List of Error Codes
In Run mode
Error code
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Count display
Possible cause
Description
Preset display
f f f f f f
Preset
Counter overflow
Count has exceeded upper limit.
- f f f f f
Preset
Counter underflow
Count has decreased below lower limit.
e r r (ERR)
p s e t (PRESET)
Preset memory data error
Preset value divided by prescale exceeds count range.
e r r (ERR)
set
Initial setting memory data error
(SET)
Solving errors
For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and
clear the error code.
For a preset memory error, press the RST key. The preset display returns to
the initial value (5000). Change this value as necessary.
When an initial setting error has occurred, switch to the Setup mode then
restart the counter. One of the error codes listed below will be displayed,
Initialize or change the corresponding item(s), and return to the Run mode
then press the RST key.
Simply press the RST key if no change is required. All items are reset to the
initial values set at delivery.
Error code
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
Count display
Preset display
Description
e r r (ERR)
s p e e d (SPEED)
Counting speed memory data error
e r r (ERR)
c o u n t (COUNT)
Count memory/reset data error
e r r (ERR)
s i g n l (SIGNL)
Input logic memory data error
e r r (ERR)
c- op
Output mode memory data error
e r r (ERR)
o u t - t (OUT-T)
Output duration memory data error
e r r (ERR)
s c a l e (SCALE)
Prescale memory data error
e r r (ERR)
p o i n t (POINT)
Decimal point memory data error
e r r (ERR)
pro
Key protection memory data error
e r r (ERR)
p 0 o u t (P0OUT)
(C-OP)
(PRO)
Zero output memory data error
Note:
The counter is automatically checked for errors
when its power is turned on. If an error occurs,
counting and display are disabled except for
overflow and underflow.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Initial setting memory data errors
Important
For DC power source, the 0V power terminal
and the 0V common input terminal
are internally short-circuited.
Always use negative input logic for DC 2-wire proximity switch.
After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to activate the new values.
During counting, any change to a preset value becomes effective when each digit key is pressed.
For maintenance purposes, keep records of initial settings and preset values.
Avoid using the counter in the environments where:
(1) Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 .
(2) Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing.
(3) The operation may by affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects.
(4) The machine is exposed to direct sunlight.
(5) You anticipate vibration or shock.
Keep the following in mind when wiring:
(1) The wiring of the counter should be separated from power line.
(2) Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise source.
(3) Never use a free terminal as a relay.
Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance.
B-30
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
External Dimensions (in mm)
90(for AC power)
KCN-A
KCN-A
44.5
48
Bracket
Protective cover
1 to 5 mm thick panel
45
(50.4)
6
10
Depth
55(for DC power)
63
DC power
61mm
AC power
96mm
KCN-S/W
48
Boring dimensions for Installation
45 +0.3
0
48 mm for tight
alignment without the
protective cover.
45 +0.3
0
KCY
48 +0.2
0
Square
hole
(Can be tight fit)
KCN-B
55 mm or more
70 mm or more
70 mm or more
Bracket
2. Vertically aligned handles
KCN-T
1. Horizontally aligned handles
KCX
Protective cover
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
How to remove the counter
Hold the lever then pull it 2 to 3 mm in the direction shown.
Pull the lever to your side.
B-31
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Maximum counting speed: 30cps, 1kcps, 2kcps or 5kcps
(selected by digit keys)
With the DIN standard size of only 48 mm by 48
mm, the full featured counter incorporates an easy
to read LCD display.
Integrating the latest technologies, the counter can
be used for many purposes as measuring
quantities, length and time. Other options include
single preset for general purpose models, and dual
preset setting for multifunction counters.
Merits
Easy operation
Countup values can be set or modified independently from initial
settings. Changes can be made easily and quickly on site.
Small body and easy to see display
With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides
full screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers
with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm.
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Single/Dual Preset Counters for
Addition and Subtraction
Count display
10mm
13mm
Preset value
The currently
selected digit
flashes.
KCN-T
Stores a preset value.
Increments the value of a
selected digit by one.
Select a digit to be preset.
Switches between first preset mode
or second preset mode.
Backlit LCD integrated in al models
darkness.
Multifunction
KCX-RN
A complete series of models provide advanced functions
such as dual preset nine output modes, count disable, large
capacity sensor power (DC24 V, 60 mA) and AC 100 to 240
V user-selectable power source.
Timer option
Keypad protection cover
A keypad cover is attached to prevent erroneous operation.
KCH-B
A series of models to meet all your needs
All 16 models include advanced functions such as
prescaling and decimal display. These models can be
combined appropriate to satisfy your requirements.
KCX
KCY
Displayed values are backlit to facilitate reading in
DC power as thin as 55 mm
With minimum space requirement, the control board can be
The KCN-4S general purpose 4-digit counter can be used
also as a precise digital timer.
Addition,subtraction or both operations are
available.
installed anywhere.
Twelve error codes quickly report error status.
KCM
55mm
AC power is 90 mm thick
EEPROM to avoid cell replacement
The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells.
The memory can store all counts, preset values and mode
settings.
Water proofed front panel
61mm
B-32
The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64)
to insulate dust and water.
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Mode options
Addition, subtraction and concurrent
Addition mode and Subtraction mode
Count
Preset value
Incremented
to 990
KCN-A
Addition mode
In the Addition mode, the count
increments by one for each pulse
input. When the value has
reached a preset value,
the counter generates a
signal.
MODE
RST
ENT
0
KCN-A
Sensor
Pulse input
Subtraction mode
In the Subtraction mode, the
count decrements by one for
each pulse input. When the
value has reached zero, the
counter generates a signal.
Decremented
to 10
MODE
RST
ENT
Sensor
0
KCN-S/W
Count
Preset value
KCN-B
Pulse input
Addition and Subtraction
Addition pulse and subtraction pulse can be
entered separately or simultaneously.
KCN-T
Counting operation is not affected by any deviation of roller movement.
Addition
Roller for length
measurement
Subtration
MODE
Deviation
RST
ENT
MODE
RST
ENT
KCY
Rotary encoder
Two-phase signal
KCX
Prescaling
Converting the number of pulses to quantity or dimension
KCX-RN
Quantity
Multiplied by 4
MODE
Sensor
RST
ENT
Prescaled at 4
Roller for length
measurement
Cutter
KCH-B
Four workpieces per pulse
Cut length (in mm)
KCM
Can be set to a rounded integer.
MODE
You need not consider
the roller's diameter
when setting the
counter value
Setting in inches
Rotary encoder
RST
ENT
Prescaled at 0.8
0.8 mm per pulse
Either unit is selectable with the prescaling
function
Setting in meters
Change in the mechanism
are not required
B-33
Displaying a decimal point
A decimal point can be displayed at a
desired location.
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Decimal point
MODE
ENT
Switching the input logic between positive and negative
Device choices are expanded by two input logics available for positive (voltage) input and negative (no
voltage) input.
Relay
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
RST
KCN-T
Proximity switch
Relay output
Photoelectric sensor
KCY
KCN-
R
DC output
KCN-
T
Nine operation modes
The multifunction counter has nine operation modes, including Compare, Hold, Auto Reset and One shot
Output.
Ex. Count of the number of workpieces (Compare mode)
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Rotary encoder
Addition
(Mode 7)
OUT1
C P1
Subtration
KCM
Photoelectic
sensor at entry
Photoelectic
sensor at exit
Conveyor
The counter counts and displays the number of workpieces on the conveyor.
The count is added to by input pulse generated by the photoelectric sensor
at the entry, and subtracted from by pulse generated by another sensor at
the exit. Addition and subtraction can occur at the same time.
B-34
MODE
RST
ENT
Timer option
KCN-4SR-C/4ST-C/4SR/4ST
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
General Purpose 4-digit Counters
These counters can be used also as timers from 0.01 second to 99 hours and 59 minutes
0.1s
1s
10s
99.99s
999.9s
9999s
99m59s
99h59m
Five output modes for
wide applications
Quartz crystal oscillator
assures the clock precision.
On Delay
Off Delay
One Shot
Flicker
Accumulate
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
Digital clock for easy
and error-free setting
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
1m
KCN-A
KCN-A
0.01s
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Either time elapsed or remaining can be displayed.
B-35
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter/Timer Functions
Two Categories of Models
General purpose counters
Single preset, One-Shot or Hold output, prescaling and decimal
point display
Source voltage Output type Sensor source
4-digit(and timer)
6-digit
Relay
output
KCN-4SR-C
KCN-6SR-C
KCN-4ST-C
KCN-6ST-C
KCN-4SR
KCN-6SR
KCN-4ST
KCN-6ST
DC24V
only
KCN-A
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
AC110V
or
AC220V
Relay
output
DC output
KCN-T
KCY
R Relay output
T DC output
S Single preset
W Dual preset
4 4-digit
6 6-digit
Multifunction
Source voltage Output type Sensor source
4-digit
6-digit
Relay
output
KCN-4WR-C
KCN-6WR-C
KCN-4WT-C
KCN-6WT-C
KCN-4WR
KCN-6WR
KCN-4WT
KCN-6WT
DC12
None
24V
Relay
output
AV100V
240V
DC24V
60mA
General Specifications
Item
KCX
C
DC power
Blank AC power
Single or Dual preset setting, nine modes including One-Shot, Hold and
Compare output, prescaling and decimal point display
DC output
KCX-RN
-
DC24V
15mA
DC output
KCH-B
KCN-
None
DC output
KCM
Model number System
Source
voltage
General Purpose
AC
Multifunction
240V
AC90
p-p ripple)
DC 10
AC 85
115V, or AC 180
DC
DC 20
28V (Max. 10
264V
30V (Max. 10
Power
consumption
AC
Approx. 5VA
Approx. 5VA
DC
Approx. 2W
Approx. 2W
Sensor
power
AC
DC 24V (20
DC
None
Memory backup at power failure
28V) 15mA (Max. 10
p-p ripple)
DC24V (20
p-p ripple)
28V) 60mA (Max. 10
p-p ripple)
None
EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes)
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
25
70
(with no freezing)
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnection)
Insulation resistan
20M
Vibration resistance
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
Shock resistance
Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50 G) No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G)
85
RH (with no dewing)
or more at DC 500V (AC: For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnection)
1.5 kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1
Noise resistance
Coating
IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash.
Installation
Flush mounting
Connection
Terminal block
Mass
s width and 1 ns rise time)
AC
Approx. 220 g
Approx. 150 g
DC
Approx. 110 g
Approx. 110 g
Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests.
B-36
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
Performance Specification
General Purpose (KCN-S)
Multifunction (KCN-W)
Addition and subtration
Setting
Single preset
Number of digits
4 or 6 digits (depending on models)
Setting range
4 digits:
Counting speed
30cps, 1kcps, 2kcps, or 5kcps (selected by keys) For duty factors, see Counting Timing.
Input mode
Addition and/or subtraction or two-phase (selected by keys)
Single or Dual prest (selected by keys)
9999
6 digits:
99999
999999
Positive (voltage) or negative (no voltage) (selected by keys)
Minimum pulse width: 5 ms
Auto reset
Responded within 0.5 ms (2.5 ms at 5kcps)
Manual reset
Responded within 0.1 s
Power reset
Power shutdown: 1 s or more
Output
NPN open collector or relay contact 1a (depending on models)
Output mode
One Shot (momentary output) or Hold
(selected by keys)
Output duration
0
Reset duration: 1 s or less (until restart)
One Shot (momentary output), Hold or Compare
(selected by keys)
Maximum counting speed
Open collector output
Relay output
30cps
14ms or less
19ms or less
1ms or less
6ms or less
2kcps
0.5ms or less
5.5ms or less
5kcps
2.5ms or less
7.5ms or less
KCN-T
1kcps
KCN-B
9990 ms (selected by keys in 10 ms increments)
I/O response
Decimal point display
KCN-A
Input logic
Extermal reset input
KCN-A
999
Any location (selected by keys)
Prescaling
4 ditits: 0.001
Count disable input
Not available
9.999
6 ditits: 0.001
KCN-S/W
Item
Operation
99.999
Responded within 2.5 ms
KCY
Output response delays only at 5k cps.
Count
disable
input
Input resistance
Positive: 15k
Negative: 3.3k
Input voltage
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
Input response
On delay: Max. 5ms
Off delay: Max. 5ms
Input resistance
Positive: 15k
Negative: 3.3k
Input voltage
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
Input response
On delay: Max. 2.5ms
Off delay: Max. 2.5ms
Input resistance
Positive: 15k
Negative: 3.3k
Input voltage
L 0 3V
H 7 30V
Withstand voltage
NPN open
collector Current
output
Residual voltage
Relay
output
Capacity
Durability
(1.8k
(1.8k
for DC models)
KCX-RN
(1.8k
for DC models)
KCH-B
Reset
input
30cps/ 1kcps/ 2kcps/ 5kcps
for DC models)
KCM
Pulse
input
Input speed
KCX
I/O Specifications
Max. 35V
Max. 100mA
Max. 2V
AC220V 2A
(resistance load)
AC220V 0.5A
(cos
0.4)
DC30V 0.5A
(L/R
7ms)
Min. 100,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts
B-37
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Output modes
KCN-S
Mode No
KCN-W (dual preset mode)
Count
1
2
Signal output
Continued
Held
Reset
One shot
10 9990ms
Count
2
Reset
One shot*
10 9990ms
3
Continued
KCN-S/W
4
Held
C
P
8
C
P
Signal output
Held
Reset
One shot*
10 9990ms
Continued
Continued
Held
One shot
10 9990ms
6
7
C
Held
Continued
Reset
One shot*
C
P1
8
Held
7
Count
Continued
Held
3
5
Held
Signal output
2
4
Continued
Count
OUT2
1
Signal output
1
OUT1
Mode No
KCN-W (single preset mode)
Mode No
KCN-A
KCV
Counter Functions
C
C
9
P1
P1
P2
P2
C
P2
C: Count P1: First setting P2: Second setting
C: Count P: Setting
Can be set in 10 ms increments from 10 to 9990 ms.
KCN-B
Output mode diagrams
KCN-S general purpose, single preset
Mode 1 (Hold)
Out: Held
Mode 2 (One Shot)
Out: One Shot
Addition
Subtraction
SET
SET
0
0
Reset
Reset
OUT
OUT
Count: Reset
Subtraction
One Shot means signal output for short duration from 10 to 9990 ms
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
Addition
Count: Continued
Counting at 5kcps is disabled during reset in Mode 2 ,as 2.5 ms is required
KCX-RN
for auto reset.
KCN-W Multifunction, single or dual preset
Mode 1
OUT2: Held
OUT1: Held
KCM
KCH-B
Addition
Count: Continued
Mode 2
Addition
Subtraction
SET2
SET2
SET1
SET1
0
0
Reset
Reset
OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT2
B-38
OUT2: One Shot
OUT1: Held
Count: Reset
Subtraction
Subtraction
SET1
SET1
0
0
Reset
Reset
OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT2
Addition
Mode 6
SET2
SET1
SET1
Subtraction
Reset
OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT2
OUT2: When the count is equal to or smaller than
SET2.
Mode 8
SET2
SET2
SET1
SET1
0
0
OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
OUT2
OUT2: When the count is equal to or larger than
SET2.
KCN-T
Reset
OUT2: When the count is equal to or larger than
SET1, and when it is equal to or smaller than
SET2.
KCX
Mode9
Count: Reset
0
0
Mode 7
OUT2: One Shot
OUT1: One Shot
Addition
Subtraction
SET2
Subtraction
KCN-A
SET2
OUT2: Held
Count: Continued
OUT1: One Shot
Count: Continued
Addition
SET2
Mode 5
OUT2: Held
OUT1: Held
KCN-A
Mode 4
KCN-S/W
Addition
Count: Continued
KCN-B
OUT2: One Shot
OUT1: Held
KCY
Mode 3
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
SET2
SET1
KCX-RN
0
OUT1
KCH-B
OUT2
are available only on dual preset mode.
Single preset mode operate as described under SET2, OUT2.
In One Shot mode, output duration ranges from 10 to 9990 ms.
One Shot output turns off when reset signal is entered.
In One Shot mode, another countup causes signal output for a set duration.
Mode 6 , counting at 5k cps is interrupted for 0.5 to 2.5 ms between countup and next pulse input.
In Mode 2
In both modes, counting at 2k cps is not affected by countup.
Mode 6
Mode 9
KCM
Mode 5
Signal output is controlled as follows regardless of the magnitudes and the signs of SET1 and SET2:
In Hold mode, it generates and hold signal when the count equals preset value.
In One Shot mode, it generates signal momentarily when the count equals preset value.
In Compare mode, it generates signal when the count is equal to or larger (or smaller) than the preset value.
B-39
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
Counting timing
Addition and Subtraction mode
Positive (voltage) input
Subtraction
Addition
"H"
Pulse can be counted either at rising
edge or falling edge.
INA
KCN-A
KCV
"L"
"H"
Pulse can be counted either at rising
edge or falling edge.
INB
"L"
Negative (no voltage) input
Subtraction
Addition
"H"
Pulse can be counted either at rising
edge or falling edge.
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
INA
"L"
"H"
Pulse can be counted either at rising
edge or falling edge.
INB
"L"
Note: Counting occurs at the rising edge or falling edge.
Two-Phase mode
Subtraction
KCN-T
Addition
"H"
"L"
"L"
"H"
"H"
"L"
"L"
INA
INB
KCY
"H"
Note: Counting always occurs at rising edge.
Duty factors
at 5kcps
KCX
INA and INB in Two-Phase mode: 50
T (200 s)
"H"
KCX-RN
INA
"L"
"H"
INB
KCH-B
"L"
T
T
4
4
T
4
T
4
(50 s or more ) (50 s or more )
KCM
Counting speed (cps)
B-40
1
(s)
T
Minimum width that
enables counting.
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Wiring Diagrams
General purpose (KCN-S)
Multifunction (KCN-W)
KCN-4
Sensor power
DC24V
IN-A
15mA
IN - B
6WR
Sensor power
DC24V
IN-A
60mA
Sensor power
0V
IN-B
Sensor
power
0V
R Reset input
Count
disable input
INH
KCN-A
KCN-4 6SR
R Reset input
AC
100V
AC100V
240V
OUT1
Relay output 1
AC
200V
OUT
Relay output
OUT2
Relay output2
KCN-4 6ST
KCN-A
Counter Functions
IN - B
Sensor power
DC24V
IN-A
60mA
Sensor power
0V
IN-B
Sensor
power
0V
KCN-S/W
KCN-4 6WT
Sensor power
DC24V
IN-A
15mA
Count
disable input
INH
R Reset input
KCN-B
R Reset input
OUT1
DC output 1
OUT
DC output
AC100V
240V
AC
200V
OUT2
DC output 2
0V
Common output
KCN-4 6SR-C
KCN-4
IN - B
6WR-C
Common input
0V
IN-A
IN-B
Common
input
0V
Count
disable input
INH
KCY
IN-A
0V
Common output
KCN-T
AC
100V
R Reset input
KCX
R Reset input
OUT1
Relay output 1
KCN-4 6ST-C
KCN-4
IN-A
IN - B
DC power DC12
24V
KCX-RN
OUT2
Relay output2
DC power DC24V
6WT-C
Common input
0V
IN-A
IN-B
Common
input
0V
Count
disable input
INH
KCH-B
OUT
Relay output
R Reset input
R Reset input
OUT2
DC output 2
DC power DC24V
8.5
1.7
6.3
Dimensions of
Terminal Block
0V
Common output
DC power DC12
24V
Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65mm2
Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3
M3 screw
7.62
1.32
10.55
0V
Common output
5.2
OUT
DC output
KCM
OUT1
DC output 1
6.3
1.32
B-41
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
I/O Circuit Diagrams
AC Power
Sensor
power
source
DC24V
DC Power
For relay
output
2
For relay
output
DC24V
12
source 24VV
8
ON for negative input
13
KCV
KCN-A
15k
IN A
15k
11
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
Reset
4
IN B
4
15k
15k
8
5V
OUT1
KCN-T
8
5V
3.3k
7
7
Reset
15k
15k
10 OUT2
10 OUT2
Count
disable
input
OUT1
3.3k
5V
5V
3.3k
Count
disable
input
6
15k
11 0V
0V 5
KCY
11
3.3k
3.3k
6
15k
11 0V
0V 5
For general purpose counters. 1.8 k for multifunction models.
Input Wiring Examples (count, reset and count disable)
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output
KCX
OUT2
5V
3.3k
IN B
10
3
OUT2
5V
9
3.3k
10
3
IN A
OUT1
5V
9
3.3k
8
ON for negative input
OUT1
5V
Internal circuit
Input logic: Positive (voltege) input (pos)
Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.)
KCX-RN
Brown
(Red)
Addition
KCH-B
Subtraction
Black
(White)
Black
(White)
KCM
Black
(White)
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
2
24V sensor power
3
IN A
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.)
Brown
(Red)
2 24V sensor power
Addition
Subtraction
4
IN B
Black
(White)
3
IN A
4
IN B
Black
(White)
Black
(White)
7 Reset
7 Reset
6 Count disable input
Black
(White)
6 Count disable input
Blue
(Black)
5 0V
Recommended proximity swith: APS -
B-42
Proximity switch with NPN open collector output
5 0V
-T
E2
Recommended proximity swith: APS -
-N
E
Rotary encoder
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.)
Addition
White
3
24 V sensor power
Red
Green
(Blue)
IN A
Black
Subtraction
4
2 24 V sensor power
3 IN A
IN B
White
KCN-A
2
Input logic: Positive or negative to be set according to encoder output
Input mode: Two-phase (quad)
KCN-A
DC 2-wire proximity switch
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
4 IN B
7 Reset
5 0V
KCN-S/W
Black
6 Count disable inpurt
5 0V
-Z
Recommended proximity switch: TRD-J -RZ
20V or more is required for multifunction DC source voltage.
TRD-GK
-RZ
S
KCN-B
Recommended proximity switch: APS -
R
Switch or relay
2
24V sensor power
3
IN A
4
7
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.)
Counting speed: 30cps
2
24V sensor power
3
IN A
IN B
4
IN B
Reset
7
Reset
Addition
6 Count disable input
6 Count disable input
5 0V
5 0V
KCX
Subtraction
KCX-RN
Subtraction
KCY
Addition
KCN-T
Input logic: Positive (voltage) input (pos)
Input mode: Addition and Subtraction separate inputs (ad. sb.)
Counting speed: 30cps
KCH-B
This connection is preferable to accommodate high input current.
Output Wiring Examples
NPN open collector output
Relay output
OUT1 8
8
Load
KCM
May be driven by relay.
Load
OUT1
MAX.100mA
OUT2 10
9
Load
10
Load
OUT2
0V 11
11
Load power
rated at 24 V
B-43
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
Front Panel Layout and Description
Front panel
Preset value
Initial settings are displayed in the
Setup mode.
Output status
OUT1: First preset output
OUT2: Second preset output
Measurement unit
Hz: counts per second
ms: output duratuin in the One Shot
mode
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Count (zero-suppressed)
Character height: 13 mm for 4-digit display
10 mm for 6-digit display
Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode.
MODE
Reset key
Resets initial settings in the Setup
mode. Response time: 0.1 second
RST
ENT
MODE key:
Used to change display mode or operation
key at the
mode. Press this key and the
same time to change operation mode
between Run and Setup.
Single/dual-preset mode display
SET1: First setting
SET2: Second setting.
ENTER key:
Used to write settings.
KCX
key:
Used to select a digit or set its
value.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Right arrow key:
Press this key to shift one digit to the right.
B-44
KCN-S/KCN-W
Electronic
Counters
Counter Functions
Operating procedures
1. KCN-S General purpose counters
Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
Run mode
Setup mode
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least
0.5 second.
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least
0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute.
*
0 1. 0 0 0
Select digit:
Prescale
scale
KCN-A
Power on
Setting at 0"
cannot be made.
MODE
Select number
0
Select new value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The minus sigh (-) can be selected only for the
highest digit.
3
4
5
6
Select display
range.
Decimal point
Store new value
point
7
8
9
follows:
Initializing the counter
h
h
h
h
h
digit before the
decimal point is set.
Select decimal point setting mode
MODE
Select counting speed
n n n n n h. *
h denotes the ones'
h
Counting speed
2
speed
Select decimal point position
MODE
5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0
*
KCN-T
ENT
1
9 (-)
KCN-B
Select digit
KCN-S/W
Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as
KCN-A
Changing a preset value
(CPS)
.n .n .n .n .n .n
Select input mode
in
MODE
Select reset key mode
Reset key mode
*
q u a d
a .
d s .
b
(two-phase)
reset
(addition or subtraction)
*
MODE
Select count memory
Count memory
e n a b
d i s a
(enable reset key)
(disable reset key)
KCY
Input mode
count
1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to
store the new value.
indicates a value set at delivery.
2.
3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to
reset the count.
4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the
decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to
1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input
increments the count as follows:
0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060...
Select operation mode
Operation mode
c-dtr
MODE
u p
*
d n
(addition) (subtraction)
Select input logic
Input logic
signl
MODE
*
p o s
n e g
positive
(voltage input)
negative
(no voltage input)
Select output mode
Output mode
The following table lists the KCN series models and their initial settings:
MODE
1
*
(Mode 1)
2
Item
(Mode 2)
Model
Counting speed
out
0 1 0 0 ms *
Select digit:
Output duration
Output duration
can be set or
changed only in
Output Mode 2.
The lowest digitI is fixed
at 0", and cannot be
changed.
Setting at 0" cannot be
made.
MODE
Select number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KCN-6SR-1879
KCN-6SR-C-1770 KCN-6ST-C-1865
30cps
1kcps
Count memory
Addition or
subtraction
Backup at
power failure
Backup at
power failure
Operation mode
Addition
Input mode
Input logic
Positive
Output mode
Mode 1
Prescale
1,000
Decimal point
No
Reset key
Enabled
KCM
c-op
KCX
Notes:
r e t n
KCX-RN
*
c l e r
(power-on reset) (memory backup)
KCH-B
MODE
Negative
B-45
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Counter Functions
2. KCN-W Multifunction Single Preset Mode
Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
Power on
Run mode
Setup mode
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least
0.5 second.
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least
0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute.
Changing a preset value
Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as follows:
out-t
KCN-A
Select digit
KCN-S/W
Output duration
can be set or
changed only in
Output Mode 2 or 3.
The lowest digit fixed at 0",
and cannot be changed.
Setting at 0" cannot be
made.
MODE
Select new value
ENT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 (-)
Select number
The minus sigh (-) can
be selected only for the
highest digit.
Store new value
0
1
In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as
2
3
4
5
6
KCN-T
5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0
*
Select number
Select input mode
0
in
1
q u a d
KCY
KCX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a .
d s .
b
(addition or subtraction)
Select display
range.
Decimal point
Select count memory
point
count
*
c l e r
h
r e t n
h
h
h
h
h
n n n n n h.*
h denotes the ones'
digit before the
decimal point is set.
(power-on reset) (memory backup)
MODE
Select operation mode
Operation mode
c-dtr
MODE
2
*
(two-phase)
Count memory
MODE
*
MODE
(CPS)
Input mode
MODE
9
Setting at "0" cannot
be made.
speed
MODE
8
scale
Select counting speed
Counting speed
7
0 1. 0 0 0
Select digit
Prescale
Initializing the counter
KCN-B
1 0 0 ms *
Select digit
OUT2 Output duration
u p
*
Select decimal point position
The operation mode
can be changed in
the Output Modes
1 to 4.
d n
(addition) (subtraction)
Select decimal point setting mode
KCX-RN
.n .n .n .n .n .n
Select input logic
Input logic
signl
MODE
KCH-B
n e g
reset
negative
(no voltage input)
MODE
Select set mode between single and
dual preset
Setmode
prset
MODE
2
*
1
Select output mode
KCM
c-op
MODE
1
*
2
3
4
7
Selecting Mode 7 or 8 changes the
operation mode to Addition.
B-46
*
e n a b
d i s a
enable
reset key
disable
reset key
Notes:
(dual preset) (single preset)
Output mode
Select reset key mode
Reset key
*
p o s
positive
(voltage input))
8
1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key
to store the new value.
indicates a value set at delivery.
2.
3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key
to reset the count.
4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the
decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to
1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input
increments the count as follows:
0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060...
KCN-S/KCN-W
Electronic
Counters
Counter Functions
3. KCN-W Multifunction Dual Preset Mode
Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
Setup mode
key at the same time for at least
KCN-A
0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute.
Changing a preset value
MODE
SET2
out-t
SET1
Output duration can
be set or changed
only in Output
Mode 2,3, or 6.
The lowest digit fixed
at "0", and cannot be
changed.
Setting at "0" cannot
be made.
MODE
Select number
OUT1 Output duration
Select digit
out-t
Output duration can
be set or changed
only in Output
Mode 5 or 6.
1 0 0 ms *
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MODE
Select new value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 (-)
The minus sigh (-) can be
selected only for the highest digit.
ENT
*
0 1. 0 0 0
Select digit
Prescale
scale
Store new value
Setting at "0" cannot
be made.
Initializing the counter
MODE
In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows:
Select number
Select counting speed
Counting speed
0
speed
MODE
5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0
1
Select input mode
Input mode
4
5
6
Select display
range.
point
in
h
*
q u a d
7
8
9
a .
d s .
b
h
h
h
h
h
n n n n n .
h*
H denotes the ones'
digit before the
decimal point is set.
(two-phase) (addition or subtraction)
MODE
Select count memory
Count memory
count
MODE
3
[Hz]
Decimal point
MODE
2
*
KCY
Switch preset
value display
Select digit
OUT2 Output duration
KCN-A
Select Dual preset in the Setup mode, then switch to the Run mode to change the
value as follows:
KCN-S/W
key at the same time for at least
KCN-B
Press the MODE key and the
0.5 second.
Press the MODE key and the
KCN-T
Run mode
Select decimal point setting mode
Select decimal point position
*
c l e r
r e t n
KCX
Power on
(power-on reset) (memory backup)
.n .n .n .n .n .n
u p
*
The operation mode
can be changed in
the Output Modes
1 to 4.
d n
(addition)
(subtraction)
Select reset key mode
Reset key
reset
MODE
Select input logic
Input logic
*
e n a b
d i s a
enable
reset key
disable
reset key
signl
MODE
p o s
Notes:
negative
(no voltage input)
Select set mode between single and
dual preset
Set mode
prset
MODE
*
n e g
positive
(voltage input)
2
*
1
(dual preset) (single preset)
Select output mode
Output mode
c-op
MODE
*
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key
to store the new value.
2. indicates a value set at delivery.
3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key
to reset the count.
4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the
decimal point location. For example, if the prescale is set to
1.200 and the decimal point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse
input increments the count as follows:
0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060...
Selecting Mode 7 or 9 changes the
operation mode to Addition.
B-47
KCH-B
MODE
KCM
c-dtr
KCX-RN
Select operation mode
Operation mode
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Timer Functions
Timer option
KCN-4S Series General Purpose 4-digit Counters can be used also as high-precision timers.
To use the timer option, connect the pins 5 and 6 before turning the power on.
Performance Specifications
Mode
Timer range
Display
Specification
Response
On Delay, Off Delay, One Shot, Flicker or
Accumulate (Use keys to select one of these modes.)
0.01 99.99 seconds
(Use keys to
0.1 999.9 seconds
select one of
1 9999 seconds
1 second 99 minutes and 59 seconds these modes.)
1 minute 99 hours and 59 minutes
KCN-T
Input
resistance
Input
voltage
Start signal
input
Response
Input
resistance
Input
voltage
Withstand
voltage
Reset input
Either time elapsed or remaining (Use keys to select either mode.)
Error caused by
voltage or tem- 0.005
perature variation
or
15ms, whichever is larger
Start
On Delay: Max. 15ms Off Delay: Max. 15ms
Reset
On Delay: Max. 5ms Off Delay: Max. 5ms
Output
NPN open collector or 1a contact (depending on the model)
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Item
I/O Specifications
Open collector
output
Relay output
On Delay: Max. 15ms
Off Delay: Max. 15ms
Positive: 15k
Negative: 3.3k
L: 0
30V
3V
H:7
On Delay: Max. 5ms
Off Delay: Max. 5ms
L
0
3V
H
7
30V
Max. 35V
Current
Max. 100mA
Residual
voltage
Max. 2V
Capacity
Negative: 3.3k
Positive: 15k
AC220V 2A AC220V 0.5A DC30V 0.5A
(resistance load) (cos =0.4) (L/R=7ms)
Durability Min. 100,000 contacts Max. 200,000 contacts Max. 200,000 contacts
Notes: 1. Start signal is required for the timer to be activated.
2. The timer starts with a delay of up to one second when activated
by power input.
3. The timer value is written to the internal EEPROM when the power
is turned off of the ENT key is pressed. The EEPROM allows up to
100,000 writes. Avoid turning the power off more than necessary.
Output mode diagrams
Mode A
On Delay
Addition
Mode B
Off Delay
Addition
Subtraction
SET
0
0
Subtraction
KCY
SET
Start
KCX
Start
OUT
Mode C
KCX-RN
Reset
Reset
OUT
One Shot
Addition
SET
Mode D
Subtraction
Addition
SET2
SET1
0
0
KCH-B
Start
Start
Reset
Reset
OUT
OUT
KCM
Mode E
B-48
Accumulation
Flicker
Subtraction
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Timer Functions
Wiring Diagrams
KCN-4SR
KCN-4ST
Sensor power
C/T
0V
Sensor power
0V
C/T
Sensor power
DC24V
Start
15mA
R Reset input
AC
100V
AC
200V
AC
100V
OUT
Relay output
AC
200V
0V
Common output
OUT
DC output
KCN-4SR-C
KCN-A
R Reset input
KCN-A
Sensor power
DC24V
Start
15mA
KCN-4ST-C
Common input
C/T
0V
Start
KCN-S/W
Common input
C/T
0V
Start
R Reset input
KCN-B
R Reset input
8.5
Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65 mm2
Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3
KCY
10.55
1.7
5.2
and the
M3 screw
7.62
1.32
DC power DC24V
To use the timer option, connect the 0V pin
C/T pin before turning the power on.
6.3
Dimensions of
Terminal Block
0V
Common output
OUT
DC output
DC power DC24V
6.3
KCN-T
OUT
Relay output
1.32
I/O Circuit Diagrams
Sensor
power
source
DC24V
For relay
output
Internal power
source 24V
2
ON for nagative input
KCX
DC Power
For relay
output
DC24V
2
10
Internal circuit
ON for negative input
10
OUT
OUT
13
11
11
5V
3.3k
Start
3
15k
15k
10 OUT
10 OUT
5V
5V
3.3k
3.3k
7
Reset
7
Reset
15k
0V
5
KCM
3
KCH-B
5V
3.3k
Start
KCX-RN
AC Power
15k
11 0V
0V
5
11 0V
B-49
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Timer Functions
Input Wiring Examples (start and reset)
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output Proxoimity switch with NPN open collector output
Input logic: Positive (voltage) input(pos)
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
2
24V sensor power
KCV
Brown
(Red)
Black
(White)
Start
Black
(White)
KCN-A
Reset
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Black
(White)
Start
3
KCN-T
Black
(White)
Reset
7
Reset signal input
Start signal input
7
Reset signal input
0V
5
0V
6
Counter/Timer switch
6
Counter/Timer
switch
-T
Recommended proximity switch: APS -
E2
-N
Input logic: Positive (voltage) input (pos)
2
24V sensor power
3
Start signal input
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
2 24V sensor power
2 24V sensor power
Start switch
Start switch
3
Start signal input
3
Start signal input
7
Reset signal input
7
Reset signal input
7
Reset signal input
5
0V
5
0V
5
0V
6
Counter/Timer
switch
6
Counter/Timer switch
6
Counter/Timer
switch
Reset switch
Reset
Recommended proximity switch: APS -
Reset switch
-Z
Output Wiring Examples
KCM
NPN open collector output
Relay output
Compatible with relay
drive
OUT
10
10
Load
MAX.100mA
OUT
11
0V 11
Load power rated at 24 V
B-50
E
Switch or relay
Start
KCX
3
5
Input logic: Negative (no voltage) input (neg)
KCX-RN
24V sensor power
Black
(White)
Recommended proximity switch: APS -
KCY
Black
(White)
Start signal input
DC 2-wire proximity switch
KCH-B
2
Brown
(Red)
Load
KCN-S/KCN-W
Electronic
Counters
Timer Functions
Front Panel Layout and Description
Front panel
Count (zero-suppressed)
Character height: 13 mm
Initial settings are displayed in the Setup mode.
Initial settings are displayed
in the Setup mode.
KCN-A
Preset value
H:M: hours: minutes
M:S: minutes: seconds
S: seconds
Output status
Flicker mode: 1- or 2-step
KCN-A
Measurement unit
Resets initial settings in the
Setup mode.
Response time: 0.5 second
KCN-S/W
Reset key
MODE
RST
ENTER key:
ENT
Used to store settings.
Used to change display mode or operation
mode. Press this key and the key at the
same time to change operation mode
between Run and Setup.
key:
Used to select a digit or set
its value.
Right arrow key:
KCN-T
Press this key to shift one digit to the right.
Operating procedures
Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
Power on
Run mode
Setup mode
Initializing the timer
Select operation mode
Operation mode
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least
u p
MODE
*
KCY
t-dtr
0.5 second.
Press the MODE key and the
KCN-B
MODE key:
d n
addition
subtraction
key at the same time for at least
0.5 second, or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute.
Select input logic
Input logic
signl
Mode A
B
C
E
Mode D
KCX
*
p o s
MODE
Changing a preset value
n e g
negative
power input
positive
power input
Select output mode
Output mode
MODE
*
a
MODE
Press the MODE key to
select SET2 or SET1.
b
c
d
KCX-RN
t-op
e
Select timer range
Timer range
MODE
Select digit
n.
n n n* n n n. n n n n .
n nnnn nnnn
S
S
S
M:S
H:M
Select reset key mode
Reset key
KCH-B
range
reset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MODE
9
*
e n a b
d i s a
enable reset key
disable reset key
KCM
Select new value
ENT
Store new value
Notes:
1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key
to store the new value.
2. indicates a value set at delivery.
3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key
to reset the count.
B-51
Counter/Timer Functions
List of Error Codes
Error code
Count display
Description
Preset display
Preset value
Counter overflow
Count has exceeded upper limit.
- f f f f f
Preset value
Counter underflow
Count has decreased below lower limit.
p s e t
p s e t 1
p s e t 2
Preset memory data error
Preset value divided by prescale exceeds count range.
The error code is followed by 1 or 2 to indicate SET1 or
SET2 error.
s p e e d
Counting speed memory data error
e r r
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
c - o p
Output mode memory data error
o u t - t
1
Output duration memory data error
o u t - t 1
2
OUT1 output duration memory data error
o u t - t 2
2
OUT2 output duration memory data error
s c a l e
Prescale memory data error
p o i n t
Decimal point memory data error
t - o p
1
Timer output mode memory data error
r a n g e
1
Timer range memory data error
KCN-T
KCN-B
1: KCN-S only
Notes:
Solving errors
For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and
clear the error code.
For any other errors, press the ENT key to clear the error code then make
the current settings.
Set value
KCN-S
KCN-W
KCY
KCX
First setting
1000
Second setting
5000
30cps
Counting speed
Operation
Addition/subtraction separate inputs
KCX-RN
Count memory
Power-on reset
Counter mode
Addition
Input mode
Negative
Preset mode
Dual preset
Output mode
Mode 1
OUT 2 output duration
100ms
KCH-B
OUT 1 output duration
100ms
Prescale
1.000
Decimal point
nnnnnh.
Reset key
Enabled
Timer
Item
Set value
First setting
10.00
Second setting
50.00
Operation
Addition
Input logic
Negative
Timer mode
Mode A
Timer range
n n. n n (s)
Reset key
B-52
Enabled
The counter continues counting even after an overflow or underflow
has occurred. This is performed in the range of -2147483.648 to
2147483.647.
The counter is self-checked for errors when its power is turned on.
When an error occurs, counting and display are disabled except for
overflow and underflow.
Important
Counter
Item
A memory data error occurs when the current settings do
not produce a meaningful result.
2: KCN-W only
Settings at delivery
KCM
Possible cause
f f f f f f
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated level.
The KCN-W counters integrate a switching source circuit. Starting the counter
causes a surge current to flow into the circuit and may prevent counter operation.
Use a power source with a sufficient capacity to prevent the surge current.
Keep the source voltage in the 20 to 30 V range for DC 2-wire proximity switch.
After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to reset the counter.
To use the counter as timer, connect the common input (sensor power) terminal 5
to the Counter-Timer switch terminal 6 then turn the power on.
After you change the timer range from " S" to " M:S" or " H:M", check that the
second digit of the preset value is set to a number less than 6. If necessary, correct
the value to prevent a preset error.
When you switch the function from timer to counter, re-enter the initial settings
and preset value.
Any changed preset value during counting is enabled by pressing the ENT key.
For maintenance purposes, keep records of the initial settings and preset values.
During counting, any change to a preset value become. Avoid using the counter
in the environments where:
(1)Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10 .
(2)Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause
dewing.
(3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other
harmful objects.
(4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight.
(5)You anticipate vibration or shock.
Keep the following in mind when wiring:
(1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from power line.
(2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources.
(3)Never use a free terminal as a relay.
Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and
resistance.
External Dimensions
(in mm)
90 (for AC power)
KCN-A
44.5
48
KCN-A
Mounting
bracket
Electronic
Counters
KCN-S/KCN-W
48
45
(50.4)
6
DC power
AC power
10
55 (for DC power)
61mm
96mm
KCN-B
63
Boring dimensions for Installation
Mounting
bracket
2. Vertically aligned handles
55 or more
70 or more
48 mm for tight alignment without
KCN-T
1. Horizontally aligned handles
the protective cover
KCY
45 +0.3
0
45 +0.3
0
70 or more
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Protective cover
KCM
48 +0.2
0
May be
aligned tight.
Square
hole
KCN-S/W
Depth
1 to 5 mm thick panel
Protective cover
B-53
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
Maximum counting speed:
Preset Counters for Addition and Subtraction with Batch and
Total Options
30cps or 1kcps
(selected by keys)
In addition to individual counts, these counters provide
batch option to allow a set of counts to be added and
displayed. Countup values can be preset for both individual
counts and batches.
They serve also as total counters that accumulate different
counts.
KCN-A
Total
Input
pulses
4- or 6-digit preset
counter
Batches
4- or 6-digit batch
preset counter
Batches output
(Displayed only
in the batch mode)
KCN-S/W
Process output
Merits
KCN-T
KCN-B
Small body and easy to read display
With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides full
screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers with the
height of 13 mm or 10 mm.
EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement
The counter integrates an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells.
The memory can store all counts, preset values and mode
settings.
Backlit LCD integrated in all models
Displayed values are backlit to faciliate reading in darkness.
Water proofed front panel
Easy operation
Countup values can be set or modified independently from initial
settings. Changes can be made easily and quickly on site.
Addition, subtraction or both operations are
available.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
The keypad on the front panel is completely coated (IP64) to
insulate dust and water.
B-54
List of Models
Model number system
Single preset, nine modes including One Shot and Hold
mode, prescaling and decimal point display
KCN-6BR
Source voltage Output type Sensor source
Relay
output
6-digit
DC24V
60mA
KCN-6BR
KCN-A
AC100
240V
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
KCN-A
R: Relay output
KCN-S/W
6: 6-digit
Item
Specification
Power consumption AC
Sensor power
AC
AC90
264V
Approx. 5VA
DC 24V (20
28V) 60mA (Max. 10
p-p ripple)
KCN-T
AC
Memory backup at power failure EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes)
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
25
70
(with no freezing)
RH (with no dewing)
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute
Insulation resistance
20M
Vibration resistance
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
Shock resistance
Durable for 11ms along three axes at 490m/s2(50G) No error for 11ms along three axes at 98m/s2 (10G)
(AC: For each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnections, DC: between 0V and relay output)
1.5 kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1
Coating
IP64 for the keypad on the front panel against dust and splash.
Installation
Flush mounting
Connection
Terminal block
Mass (weight)
Approx. 150 g
s width and 1ns rise time)
KCH-B
Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests.
KCM
Noise resistance
or more at DC 500V
KCX
85
KCX-RN
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
KCY
Source voltage
KCN-B
General Specifications
B-55
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
Performance Specifications
Specification
Item
Model
Addition and subtration counter with batch option / Addition and subtration counter with total option
Setting
One step for both normal mode and batch option
Number of digits
6 digits
Setting range
6 digits:
Counting speed
30cps or 1kcps (selected by keys)
Pulse input
Separate, Concurrent or two-phase (selected by keys)
Input logic
Positive (voltage) or negative (no voltage) (selected by keys)
External reset input
Minimum pulse width: 5ms
Auto reset
Responded within 0.5ms
Manual reset
Responded within 0.1s
Power reset
Power shutdown: 1s or more Reset duration: 1s or less (until restart)
Output
Relay contact (1a)
Output mode
Nine modes including One Shot and Hold (selected by keys)
One Shot mode
Output duration in One Shot mode: 10 9990 ms (selected by keys in 10ms increments)
99999
999999
Maximum counting speed
Relay output
30cps
Max. 40ms
1kcps
Max. 11ms
I/O response
Decimal point display
Any location (selected by keys) Available only in normal mode and total mode with separate settings.
Prescaling
6 digits: 0.001 99.999 (Available only in normal mode and total mode in the same range.)
Count block
Not available
KCY
I/O Specifications
Input speed 30cps 1kcps
Count input
Positive: 15k
Input
resistance Negative: 3.3k
KCX-RN
KCX
Input
voltage
External reset
input
normal and
batch
Relay output
Input
response
Capacity
for DC models)
L: 0 3V
H: 7 30V
On delay: Max. 5ms
Off delay: Max. 5ms
Positive: 15k
Input
resistance Negative: 3.3k
Input
voltage
(1.8k
(1.8k
for DC models)
L: 0 3V
H: 7 30V
AC220V 2A AC220V 0.5A DC30V 0.5A
(resistance load) (cos =0.4)
(L/R=7ms)
KCM
KCH-B
Durability Min. 100,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts Min. 200,000 contacts
B-56
Output modes (Batch counter)
OUT1
individual count
OUT2
batch count
Count
Signal output
1
Continued
Held
2
Reset
Mode2
Mode3
OUT2: Held
Count: Continued
Subtraction
Addition
Signal output
SET2
Held
Continued
One shot
10 9990ms
KCN-A
0
Continued
Held
4
Reset
5
6
One shot
10 9990ms
Reset 2
Reset
One shot
10 9990ms
Continued
Held
7
8
OUT2
Mode4
Continued
One shot
10
9990ms
Continued
Mode5
Mode6
OUT2: One shot
Count: Reset
Reset
9
Subtraction
Addition
SET2
KCN-S/W
Only Modes 1 to 3 of OUT1 are avairable for the
Total counter.
0
Reset 2
Output mode diagrams
OUT2
1) Normal counting (Only Modes 1 to 3 for Total counter)
Mode7
Mode8
Mode9
OUT2: One shot
Mode7
OUT1: Held
Count: Continued
SET2
Subtraction
Addition
SET1
0
0
Reset 2
KCN-T
Mode4
Count: Continued
Subtraction
Addition
Mode1
KCN-A
3
Count
Mode1
KCN-B
Mode
No
2) Batch counting
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
KCY
OUT2
Reset 1
OUT1
3) Totaling (Accumulates normal counts)
Mode5
Mode8
OUT1: One shot
Count: Reset
Subtraction
Addition
Mode1
SET1
Mode2
Mode3
OUT2: None
Count: Continued
Normal count
Total count
Addition
KCX
Mode2
Subtraction
KCX-RN
0
SET1
Reset 1
0
OUT1
Mode6
Mode9
Addition
SET1
OUT1: One shot
Count: Continued
Reset 2
KCH-B
Mode3
Subtraction
Note:
10 ms to 9.99s in One Shot mode
KCM
0
Reset 1
OUT1
B-57
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
Counting timing
Wiring Diagrams
Two-Phase pulse input
KCN-6BR
Subtraction
Addition
Sensor power
DC24V 60mA IN-A
"H"
IN-B
Sensor
power 0V
RESET 1:
reset normal
count
IN A
"L"
"H"
RESET2
reset batch
or total count
IN B
KCV
"L"
T
T
4
T
4
4
T
T
4
T
4
KCN-A
T
4
T
4
T
OUT1
relay output 1
for normal
counting
AC100V
240V
OUT2
relay output 2
for batch counting
Separate positive (voltage) input
Addition
Subtraction
"H"
In Subtraction mode, "IN A"
pulse is counted either at
rising edge or falling edge.
IN A
"L"
KCN-S/W
T
4
T
T
2
2
T
"H"
IN B
"L"
In Addition mode, "IN B"
pulse in counted either
at rising edge or falling edge.
T
T
KCN-B
2
2
T
Addition
"H"
IN A
"L"
Subtraction
In Subtraction mode, "IN A"
pulse is counted either at
rising edge or falling edge.
T
2
2
IN B
"L"
In Addition mode, "IN B"
pulse in counted either at
rising edge or falling edge.
8.5
1.7
"H"
5.2
KCY
T
T
T
2
1.32
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
T
Note: The counter can be set so as to
count pulse either at rising edge
or falling edge.
B-58
Required speed (cps)
1
T sec
Wire section: 0.25 to 1.65 mm2
Conforming crimped contact: 1.25-3
M3 screw
7.62
2
6.3
T
Dimensions of Terminal Block
10.55
KCN-T
Separate negative (no voltage) input
6.3
1.32
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
Front Panel Layout and Description
Front panel
Count (zero-suppressed)
Preset value or count
MODE
Reset key
RST
ENT
KCN-T
Resets initial settings in the Setup
mode. Response time: 0.1 second
In the Count Display mode,
individual count, batches or
total is displayed.
In the Preset Display mode,
individual preset or batch
preset is displayed.
Initial settings are displayed in
the Setup mode.
KCN-B
Output status
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCN-A
Normal count, batches or total is displayed
as selected in the Run mode.
Character height: 10mm for 6-digit
Initial settings are displayed in the Setup
mode.
MODE key:
ENTER key:
Used to change display mode or
operation mode. Press this key and
the
key at the same time to
change operation mode between
Run and Setup.
KCY
Used to store settings.
key:
KCX
Used to select a digit or set its
value.
Right arrow key:
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Press this key to shift one digit to the right.
B-59
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
Operating procedures
Switching between Setup mode and Run mode
Power on
Run mode
Setup mode
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least 0.5 second.
Press the MODE key and the
key at the same time for at least 0.5 second,
Select output mode
Output mode
c-op
or leave the system in the Setup mode for one minute.
Changing display mode in the Run mode
MODE
*
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Only Modes 1 to 3 are available for the Total option.
Individual count
Batch/total count
Individual preset
KCN-A
out-t1
preset value is not
(Adisplayed
in the total counter. )
This output duration
can be set or changed
only in Output Modes
2,3,5,6,8 and 9.
The lowest digit is fixed at
"0", and cannot be changed.
Setting at 0" cannot be
made.
MODE
out-t2
This output duration can
be set or changed only in
Output Modes 4 to 9.
0
1
Select digit
scale
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0 1. 0 0 0
Select digit
Prescale
0
2
MODE
Go to the Run mode screen, and change the value as follows:
*
(for individual or
total counting)
Setting "0"
cannot be mode
9 (-)
MODE
The minus sign (-) can be selected
only for the highest digit.
ENT
Select number
OUT2 Output duration
Batch/total count
Changing a preset value
Select new value
KCN-T
Individual count
Individual count
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Batch/total count
0 1 0 0 ms *
Select digit
OUT1 Output duration
Batch preset
Select number
Store new value
0
Initializing the counter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KCY
In the Setup mode, the counter can be initialized using the menu as follows:
Select counting speed
Counting speed
point1
speed
KCX
MODE
KCX-RN
(for individual
counting)
h
Decimal point
point2
in
h
h
h
H denotes the one
digit before the
decimal point is set.
(for total counting)
Select decimal point position
a .
d s b.
Two-phase
h
n n n n n h.*
Select dicimal point setting mode
*
q u a d
Separate
MODE
Select count memory
Count memory
h
MODE
Select input mode
n. n. n. n. n. n.
count
MODE
*
c l e r
r e t n
Power-on
reset
Memory backup
c-dtr
MODE
u p
*
d n
Addition
This selection is available
only in Output Modes 1 to 6.
Subtraction
Select input logic
signl
MODE
*
p o s
n e g
Positive
(Voltage input)
Negative
(No voltage input)
Select Batch or Total option
Batch/total option
op
MODE
B-60
*
b a o h
Batch counter
Select reset key mode
Reset key
reset
MODE
Select operation mode
Operation mode
Input logic
KCM
*
[Hz]
Input mode
MODE
KCH-B
1 0 0 0 3 0
Select display
range
Decimal point
t o t 1
Total counter
*
e n a b
Enable
e n a 2
Enable only
in batch or
total mode
e n a 1
Enable only in
normal mode
d i s a
Disable
Notes:
1. After you change a current setting, always press the ENT key to store
the new value.
2. indicates a value set at delivery.
3. After you change an initial setting, always press the RST key to reset the
count.
4. The displayed count is determined by the prescale and the decimal point
location. For example, if the prescale is set to 1.200 and the decimal
point is set as nnn.nHn, each pulse input increments the count as
follows:
0.012 0.024 0.036 0.048 0.060...
Count display
Preset display
f f f f f f
- f f f f f
Preset value
Counter overflow
Preset value
Counter underflow
Preset memory data error Preset value
divided by prescale exceeds count range.
The error code is followed by 1 or 2 to
indicate SET1 or SET2 error.
p s e t 2
p s e t 1
e r r
s p e e d
c - o p
o u t - t 1
o u t - t 2
s c a l e
Counting speed memory data error
p o i n t 1
Decimal point memory data error
(individual counting)
p o i n t 2
Decimal point memory data error
(total counting)
Output mode memory data error
OUT1 output duration memory data error
OUT2 output duration memory data error
Prescale memory data error
For an overflow or underflow, press the RST key to
reset the counter and clear the error code.
For any other errors, press the ENT key to clear the
error code then correct the current settings.
Notes:
The counter continues counting even after an
overflow or underflow has occurred. This is performed
in the range of -2147483.648 to 2147483.647.
The counter is automatically checked for errors when
is power is turned on. When an error occurs, counting
and display are disabled except for overflow and
underflow.
KCN-A
Solving errors
Description
KCN-S/W
Error code
KCN-A
List of Error Codes
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
KCN-B
A memory data error occurs when the current
settings do not produce a meaningful result.
Important
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
For DC power source, the 0V terminal 13 and common input(0V) terminal 5 are short circuited.
Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated level.
Always select negative (no voltage) input for DC 2-wire proximity switch.
After changing initial settings, always press the RST key to reset the counter.
During counting, and change to a preset value becomes effective when the ENT key is pressed.
For maintenance purposes, keep records of the initial settings and preset values.
A void using the counter in the environments where:
(1)Ambient temperature is above 50 or below 10
(2)Ambient humidity exceeds 85 , or abrupt temperature changes may cause dewing.
(3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips, corrosive gases or other harmful objects.
(4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight.
(5)You anticipate vibration or shock.
Keep the following in mind when wiring:
(1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from power line.
(2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources.
(3)Never use a free terminal as a relay.
Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing insulation voltage and resistance.
B-61
Electronic
Counters
KCN-B
External Dimensions
(in mm)
KCN-A
48
44.5
KCV
Mounting
bracket
1 to 5 mm thick panel
KCN-S/W
Protective cover
80
48
(50.4)
6
10
90 (for DC power)
Depth
KCN-B
63
96mm
Boring dimensions for Installation
1. Horizontally aligned handles
KCN-T
Mounting
bracket
2.Vertically aligned handles
55 or more
70 or more
48 mm for tight alignment without the
protective cover
45 +0.3
0
Hole
45 +0.3
0
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Protective cover
B-62
70 or more
May be
aligned tight.
48 +0.2
0
KCY
Sguare
Maximum counting speed:
Small Total Counters
Electronic
Counters
KCN-T
30cps, 1kcps (4 digits) or
5kcps (6 digits)
KCN-A
KCN-A
With the small body, the total counter features an LCD
display as large as possible to facilitate reading.
KCN-S/W
List of Models
Accessories: lnstallation frame, key protective cover.
Small body and easy to see display
With its body of only 48 mm by 48 mm, the counter provides
full screen display of either four-digit or six-digit numbers
with the height of 13 mm or 10 mm.
Source voltage
4-digit
6-digit
AC power
KCN-4T
KCN-6T
DC power
KCN-4T-C
KCN-6T-C
KCN-B
Merits
Backlit LCD display
KCN-T
Displayed values are backlit to faciliate reading in darkness.
DC power as thin as 55 mm
KCY
With minimum space requirement, the control board
can be installed anywhere.
55mm
KCX-RN
KCX
AC power is 90 mm thick.
61mm
EEPROM to eliminate cell replacement
KCH-B
The counter integrates an EEPROM to eliminate the use
of cells. All counts are stored in this memory.
Water proofed front panel
KCM
The keypad on the front panel is completely coated
(IP64) to insulate dust and water.
Keypad cover to prevent erroneous operation
A keypad cover is attached to protect the Reset key
from being pressed during operation.
B-63
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCN-T
General Specifications
Specification
Item
Source voltage
AC 85
Power consumption
Approx. 5VA
Sensor power
DC 24V (20
Memory backup at power failure
EEPROM (Up to 100,000 writes)
KCH-B
115V or AC 180
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
25
70
DC 20
240V
28V (Max. 10
8V) 15mA (Max. 10
p-p ripple)
None
(with no freezing)
35
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute between AC power and 0V
Insulation resistance
Min. 20M
Vibration resistance
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
Shock resistance
Durable for 11ms along three axes at 490m/s2(50G)
85
RH (with no dewing)
at DC 500V between AC power and 0V
No error for 11ms along three axes at 98m/s2(10G)
1.5kV between power terminals (square wave pulse with 1
Noise resistance
s width and 1ns rise time
Coating
IP64 for the keypad on the front panel againgst dust and splash.
Installation
Flush mounting
Connection
Terminal block
Mass (weight)
p-p ripple)
Approx. 2W
Ambient/Storage humidity
Approx. 220g
Approx. 110g
Noise tests also include static discharge test and NEMA compliance tests.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Total counters
Number of digits
4-digit (KCN-4T and KCN-4T-C) / 6-digit (KCN-6T and KCN-6T-C)
Count display
Backlit LCD with character height of 13mm (4-digit) or 10mm (6-digit)
Counting speed
30cps with terminals
Counting direction
Addition: Count increments when input signal to 0V terminal changes from High to Low.
Input logic
Negative: ON when input voltage is 0V
External reset input
Minimum pulse width: 5ms
Manual reset
Responded within 100ms
Count disable
Response time On delay: Max. 2.5ms Off delay: Max. 2.5ms
to
disconnected
Input Specifications
Counting
speed
Count input
Input
resistance
Input
voltage
4-digit: 30cps or 1kcps
6-digit: 30cps or 5kcps
3.3k
between 24V and input
ON: 0 3V
OFF: 7 30V
Response On delay: Max. 2.5ms
time
Off delay: Max. 2.5ms
KCM
DC power
AC power
Input
Count disable resistance
input
Input
voltage
3.3k
between 24V and input
ON: 0 3V
OFF: 7 30V
Response On delay: Max. 5ms
time
Off delay: Max. 5ms
Input
External reset resistance
input
Input
voltage
B-64
3.3k
between 24V and input
ON: 0 3V
OFF: 7 30V
1kcps (4-digit) or 5kcps (6-digit) with terminals
to
connected
Counting timing
Pulse input
L
Ta
Input circuit
The count increments by 1
at the time indicated by the
down arrow.
H
Tb
Electronic
Counters
KCN-T
5V
24V
3.3 k
T
Input pulse
15 k
KCN-A
Counting speed (cps) 1/T(s). This formula should be modified
to 1/2 Tb or 1/2 Ta if Ta is larger than Tb or vice versa.
0V common input
KCN-A
Count diagram
KCN-S/W
Pulse input
KCN-B
Reset
KCN-T
Count
disable
Count
KCY
Note: Each signal is ON at Low level, and OFF at High level.
Wiring Diagrams
Counting
speed switch
CNT SPEED
IN-A
Count
disable
input
INH
0V
common
input
Counting
speed switch
CNT SPEED
KCX-RN
0V
common
input
R Reset input
R Reset input
KCH-B
Count
disable
input
IN H
AC
100V
AC
200V
KCM
Sensor power
DC24V
IN-A
15mA
KCN-4T-C KCN-6T-C
KCX
KCN-4T KCN-6T
DC power
DC24V
B-65
Electronic
Counters
KCN-T
List of Error Codes
Error code
Description
f f f f f f
Counter overflow
KCV
Solving errors
For an overflow, press the RST key to reset the counter and clear
the error code.
Note:
The counter continues counting even after on overflow
has occurred. This is performed in the range of 0 to
2147483.647.
For DC power source, the 0V terminal 13 and common input
(0V) terminal 5 are short circuited.
Using a relay, bring the power voltage quickly to the rated
level.
Avoid using the counter in the environments where:
(1) Ambient temperature is above 50 or below -10
.
(2) Ambient humidity exceeds 85%, or abrupt temperature
changes may cause dewing.
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Important
(3)The operation may be affected by dust, metal chips,
corrosive gases or other harmful objects.
(4)The machine is exposed to direct sunlight.
(5)You anticipate vibration or shock.
Keep the following in mind when wiring:
(1)The wiring to the counter should be separated from
power line.
(2)Keep the counter body and wiring away from noise sources.
(3)Never use a free terminal as a relay.
Isolate the counter from the control circuit before testing
insulation voltage and resistance.
KCN-T
External Dimensions
(in mm)
90 (for AC power)
KCX
48
44.5
KCY
Mounting
bracket
Protective cover
Depth
1 to 5 mm thick panel
KCX-RN
48
45
(50.4)
6
DC power
AC power
10
55 (for DC power)
61mm
96mm
63
Boring dimensions for Installation
KCH-B
1. Horizontally aligned handles
Mounting
bracket
2. Vertically aligned handles
55 or more
70 or more
48mm for tight alignment without
the protective cover
45 +0.3
0
Protective cover
B-66
70 or more
45 +0.3
0
May be aligned
tight.
48 +0.2
0
KCM
Square
hole
KCY
Electronic
Counters
Small Electronic Counters for Addition, Addition/Subtraction or
Totalizing (Add/Sub)
Maximum counting speed: 2-digit: 10Hz or 1kHz
4-digit: 10Hz or 5kHz
KCN-A
With the DIN standard of only 48 mm by 48 mm,
these counters integrate advanced functions.
Operation modes include addition, addition and
subtraction with or without manual reset, and totalling.
Merits
Easy setting
Countup values can be easily set and confirmed any time.
Changes can be made also when the power is OFF.
Quick response
KCN-B
The front panel is completely coated to insulate dust and
water. This cover also serves to prevent wrong operation.
KCY-2/4 Addition Counters
Relay output: AV250V 2A
la relay contact
Open collector: DC24V 30 mA
(NPN output)
2- or 4-digit display with input and output
indicators.
One Shot output or Hold mode is
available.
KCN-T
No voltage relay contact (1a) or open collector output
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
DIN 48 48 small body for minimum space
requirement
KCY-4
Built-in 24V sensor source
Memory backup at
power failure
Subtraction
0
ON
Output
Count
Count
Preset value
0
Preset value
KCM
Addition
KCY-4D
KCH-B
The counter can be either flush mounting or wall
surface mounting.
KCX-RN
A large volume capacitor is also integrated to assure memory
backup of 100 hours or 4 days. It supports maximum security with
minimum maintenance.
ON
Output
Addition and subtraction
Count
Preset value
Addition
Subtraction
0
KCX
2- or 4-digit count display
Addition, Subtraction or concurrent mode is available.
Two-phase or separate pulse input for concurrent operation.
Allows concurrent inputs of addition and subtraction.
One Shot output option and Hold option are available.
KCY
KCY-2D/4D Addition and Subtraction Counters
Each counter incorporates a
DC24V 15 mA source available
for a proximity switch or other
external device.
ON
Output
B-67
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Specifications
Addition
Model number
KCY-2-G/H
Addition and Subtraction
Counting speed
KCV
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
External reset input
Auto reset
Output respomse
time
KCN-T
KCY
KCX
1
KCY-4D-G/H
2-digit
4-digit
10cps or 1kcps
10cps or 5kcps
Input resistance
4.7k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: 5ms
Off delay: 5ms
Input resistance
4.7k
with pullup to 24V in negative mode
6V
"H"16
30V
On delay: 3ms
Off delay: 3ms
with pullup to 24V in negative mode
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
Max. 1ms
NPN open collector
NPN output: DC 24V 30mA
Withstand voltage: 35V
Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V
Relay output
1a contact: AC 250V 2A
Electrical durability 200,000 contacts
Mechanical durability 50,000,000 contacts
open collector
10cps: Approx. 30ms
1kcps: Approx. 200 s
10cps: Approx. 30ms
5kcps: Approx. 100 s
Relay output
10cps: Approx. 40ms
1kcps: Approx. 10ms
10cps: Approx. 40ms
5kcps: Approx. 10ms
Output
Power-on reset
Shutdown time
Reset time
1
6V
"H"16
30V
Max. 0.2ms
Min. 500ms
2
Min. 500ms
Sensor power
DC+24V 15mA
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute for each of AC input, 0V and relay output interconnections
Vibration resistance
(Complies with JIS C0911)
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
Noise resistance
1kV (square wave pulse with 1
Source voltage
KCY-
Power consumption
With count display: Approx. 6VA
-G: AC 85
115V
s width)
KCY-
Ambient temperature
10
50
C
Storage temperature
25
70
C (with no freezing)
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
85
-H: AC 180
240V
Without count display: Approx. 5VA
RH (with no dewing)
Weight
Approx. 200g
Accessory
Mounting bracket, protective cover
1 Time required for the internal circuit to detect power failure
2 Time requited for the counter to restart after its power is turned on.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCY-2D-G/H
Number of digits
Count input
KCY-4-G/H
B-68
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Terminal Assignment
Terminal number
7
8
4
9
3
2
10
1
11
2
AC 110V power source (free on KCY-
3
Common negative input/output
4
DC
5
Count input IN B (Subtraction) (free on KCY-
6
Count input IN A (Addition) (free on KCY-
7
Reset
8
Open collector output (free on KCY-4T)
-H)
24V 15mA sensor power
9
Relay contact output (free on KCY-4T)
10
Power source AC 0V
11
Relay contact output (free on KCY-4T)
)
)
KCN-A
5
KCN-A
1
6
Function
AC 200/220V power source (free on KCY- -G)
Note: Terminals 1,2,5,8,9 and 11 may be left unused. Do not use them as
relay terminals.
KCY-
KCN-B
I/O Circuits
KCN-S/W
Rear side
-D
4.7K
Max. 30mA
33K
IN A
8
6
Positive load
power
Load
24V
Max. 24V
2.2K
33K
IN B
5
24V
9
KCX
Max. 6mA
Internal circuit
4.7K
KCY
Max. 6mA
KCN-T
24V
11
2.2K
4.7K
Reset
KCX-RN
33K
7
Max.
6mA
2.2K
KCY-
-G
24V
24V sensor power
4
24V
AC
V
2
AC100V
1
AC200
220V
-H
KCM
KCY-
10
KCH-B
5V
3
Note: Terminal 5 is unused and Terminal 6 is "IN" on the KCY-2/KCY-4 addition counters.
B-69
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Operating procedures
Mode selection
To select the counter modes, use the four switches (or two switches on the addition counters) located on the left side of the counter.
Note: The available dip switches are Switches 1 and 2 on the addition counters, and Switches 1,3 and 4 on the total counters.
2
3
Switch
4
Mode selected
at position A
at position B
B
1
Counting speed 1kcps or 5 kcps
10cps
A
2
Signal output One shot
Hold
Switch 1: Counting speed
3
Pulse count
4
Operation
Two-phase
Separate
Addition
Subtraction
Switch 2: Signal output
This switch is used to set or change the maximum counting speed.
Turn the switch to Position A to select 1k cps for 2-digit counters,
or 5k cps for 4-digit counters. Move it to Position B to select 10
cps for 2-digit and 4-digit counters. Position B is used for contact
output, and Position A for no contact output.
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
1
Use this switch to switch the output mode between One Shot and
Hold. In the One Shot mode, the counter generates a signal upon
countup, and turns it off after 100 ms. The count is reset upon
countup.
In the Hold mode, the counter generates a signal upon countup.
Both the signal output and the count are retained until reset.
The following charts compare the two modes of the addition
counter.
H
L
Relay contact
Preset value
Count
KCY
KCN-T
Pulse input
0
Limit switch
1
2
3
4
KCX
B
Signal
output
ON
OFF
One Shot mode
A
1
2
3
4
KCH-B
KCX-RN
B
A
H
Pulse input
L
Proximity switch
Preset value
KCM
Count
0
Rotary encoder
1
2
3
4
B
A
Signal
output
Reset
ON
OFF
H
L
Hold mode
1
2
3
4
B
A
B-70
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Switch 3: Pulse count (Unavailable on KCY-2 and KCY-4 counters)
This switch changes the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate.
Separate mode
Addition
Subtraction
3
4
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
L
B
A
H
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN B
L
KCN-A
IN A
2
1
H
Addition
IN B
2
1
3
4
H
L
L
B
H
H
A
L
L
KCN-S/W
IN A
Subtraction
H
KCN-A
Two-Phase mode
Switch 4: Operation (Unavailable on KCY-2, KCY-4 and KCY-4T counters)
KCN-B
This switch changes the operation mode between Addition and Subtraction.
Addition mode
H
L
Pulse input
1
Preset value
2
3
4
KCN-T
Reset
B
0
ON
OFF
H
L
KCY
Output
A
KCX
B
Count
Subtraction mode
H
L
Pulse input
Preset value
1
2
3
4
A
Count
Reset
KCX-RN
Output
0
ON
OFF
H
L
D Addition and Subtraction Counters
Separate mode
Addition
Subtraction
H
IN A
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
L
KCM
KCY-
KCH-B
Counting timing
H
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN B
Two-Phase mode
L
Subtraction
Addition
IN A
IN B
H
H
L
L
H
H
L
L
On the KCY- Series counters, the only option is the Pulse input A in the Separate mode shown above.
B-71
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Pulse input requirements
KCY- D, Addition and Subtraction Counters
Separate mode
IN A
Repeated additions or subtractions
H
H
IN A
L
KCV
ta
KCN-A
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
KCN-T
ta
IN A
IN B
L
L
Both A and B can be counted at the same time if the pulse width
and interval are equal to or longer than the specified time.
H
L
ta tb tc td te and tf must be:
50 s or more for 4-digit counters
250 s or more for 2-digit counters
H
IN B
tb
H
Two-Phase mode
L
tc
On the KCY-
td
te
tf
Series counters, the only option is the Pulse input A in the Separate mode shown above.
Reset input
The reset signal input initializes the counter with negative input logic.
This signal input resets the addition count to zero or the subtraction count to the preset value, and turns off the output signal. After reset, the
counter must be restarted to resume operation. On the KCY-4T counter, the count can be manually reset to zero.
Signal output
KCY-
KCY
tb
H
IN B
L
Addition Counters
Power
One Shot mode
Pulse input
ON
OFF
H
L
Preset value
KCX
Count
0
KCX-RN
Output
Reset input
KCH-B
Hold mode
Power
Pulse input
ON
OFF
H
L
ON
OFF
H
L
Preset value
Count
KCM
0
Output
Reset input
B-72
ON
OFF
H
L
100ms
100ms
KCY-
Electronic
Counters
KCY
D, Addition and Subtraction Counters
Addition
OFF
H
L
Pulse input
Hold mode
Power
H
L
Pulse input
Preset value
Preset value
Count
Count
0
ON
Output
OFF
H
Reset input
L
ON
OFF
KCN-A
Power
ON
0
ON
OFF
H
Reset input
L
Output
KCN-A
One Shot mode
Subtraction
Power
ON
OFF
H
Pulse input
L
Hold mode
Power
KCN-S/W
One Shot mode
ON
OFF
H
Pulse input
L
Preset value
Count
KCN-T
H
L
KCY
Reset input
KCX
Output
KCX-RN
H
L
0
ON
OFF
KCH-B
Reset input
0
ON
OFF
KCM
Count
Output
KCN-B
Preset value
B-73
Electronic
Counters
KCY
Connecting to input device
Relay input
Using KF-04 socket for wall surface mounting
Using KB-04 socket for flush mounting
INA
INB
KCN-A
KCN-S/W
4 5 6 7 8
E(0V)
3
Using KF-04 socket for wall surface mounting
INA
White (Black)
External
power source
Proximity switch
Addition
APS
N
KCN-T
N
The above colors
apply to APS.
White (Black)
INA
N
INB
White (Black)
8 7
Subtraction
6 5
4
4 5 6 7 8
APS
9
10 11
3
1 2
N
E(0V)
E(0V)
3
Black (Blue)
KCY
INA
INA
INB
KCX
KCX-RN
KCH-B
-RZ
24V
External
Two-phase rotary
encoder
8 7
6 5
4
4 5 6 7 8
Red
E(0V)
9
10 11
3
1 2
8 7
6 5
4
3
1 2
8 7
KB-04
6 5
4
4 5 6 7 8
KF-04
3
9
10 11
AC110V
3
1 2
KB-04
9
2 1 1110
AC210V
Free terminals: 1 on Models
B-74
9
2 1 1110
9
2 1 1110
AC110V
3
KCY- -H at 220V only
4 5 6 7 8
3
9
10 11
E(0V)
-RZ
Free terminals: 8,9 and 11 on Model KCY-4T, and 6 on Model KCY-2
and KCY-4
-G at 110V only
KF-04
TRD-J
Black
24V
External
Connecting to power source
KCY-
White
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
Black
Green
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
Red
TRD-J
INB
White
Two-phase rotary
encoder
9
2 1 1110
The above colors
apply to APS.
Black (Blue)
Green
External
power source
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
APS
24V
Red (Brown)
INB
White (Black)
APS
Using KB-04 socket for flush mounting
24V
Red (Brown)
Subtraction
KCM
9
2 1 1110
DC input
Proximity switch
Addition
KCN-B
Subtraction contact
3
1 2
9
10 11
E(0V)
Addition contact
6 5
4
8 7
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
INB
External reset contact
(reset when contact is ON)
Subtraction contact
Addition contact
KCV
INA
-G, and 2 on Models
AC210V
-H.
The KCY modes can count from 0 to 9999 for 4-digit output,
and 0 to 99 in 2-digit output. In the One Shot mode, the count
never exceeds these ranges. In the Hold mode, the count is not
automatically reset upon countup. The counter continues to
count input pulses in excess of the specified range. The signal
output is held until reset.
0
Subtraction
Addition
7500
(75)
2500
(25)
During counting, a change to the preset value may cause the
counter to generate a false signal. Before you make a change,
always turn the power off, or reset the counter.
Presetting to zero
The counter may be preset to zero; "0000" on a 4-digit counter,
or "00" on a 2-digit counter. In the Hold mode, the signal output
is held upon countup. In the One Shot mode, however, the output
signal "oscillates" and may affect subsequent processes.
Pulse input
During fast counting, the counter may erroneously count noises of
contact relays. To avoid this, use DC input instead of contact
relays.
KCN-B
5000
(50)
KCN-A
Count overrange
KCN-A
Changing the preset value
KCN-S/W
Useful Information
Electronic
Counters
KCY
KCN-T
(2-digit count in parentheses)
KCY
In the Addition mode, the count changes as
follows when it has reached the upper limit:
4 digits
KCX-RN
KCX
2 digits
In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as
follows when it has reached the lower limit (except
KCY-2 and KCY-4):
KCH-B
lower limit (except KCY-2 and KCY-4)
4 digits
KCM
2 digits
B-75
External Dimensions
(in mm)
28
Bore dimensions for wall surface mounting
(Socket F)
48
2- 4.5 hole
or
M4 screw
60
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCY
KCN-A
Socket F (option)
40 0.2
80.5
31
Bracket for wall
surface mounting
48
6
Bore dimensions for flush mounting
KCN-S/W
Socket B
(option)
+0.3
0
KCN-T
KCN-B
45
+0.3
0
51.5
45
10
Protective cover
Specified sockets
For wall surface mounting: KF-04 (applicable to DIN rails)
8
7
6
For flush mounting: KB-04
5
5
4
2–
47
3
31
10 11
3
2
1 2
40
KCX
8
9
26
9
7
4.5
60
KCY
4
6
1 11 10
45
28
48
KCX-RN
Installation procedures
Wall surface mounting using KF-04
KCH-B
KF-04 socket
Flush mounting using KB-04
Hook
Bracket
(Tighten screws with a torque
of less than 4kg-cm.)
KCM
Protective cover
When attaching the protective cover,
you cannot make panel operation.
B-76
KB-04 socket
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition
Dual preset
(with numerical
display)
Addition and
Subtraction
Addition
Total
counter
Addition and
Subtraction
3
KCX-4
4
KCX-1D
1
KCX-2D
2
KCX-2DM
2
KCX-3D
3
KCX-3DM
3
KCX-4D
4
KCX-4DM
4
KCX-5D
5
KCX-5DM
5
KCX-6D
6
KCX-6DM
6
KCX-B4
4
KCX-B4M
4
KCX-B6
6
KCX-B6M
6
KCX-3W
3
KCX-4W
4
KCX-4WM
4
KCX-5W
5
KCX-6W
6
KCX-6WM
6
KCX-B4W
4
KCX-B4WM
4
KCX-B6W
6
KCX-B6WM
6
KCX-4RN
4
KCX-6RN
6
KCX-4T
4
KCX-6T
6
KCX-8T
8
KCX-B4T
4
KCX-B6T
6
DC12V
50mA
AC90 132V
AC180 264V
50/60Hz
DC24V
80mA
AC90 132V
AC180 264V
50/60Hz
DC12V
50mA
AC90 132V
AC180 264V
50/60Hz
10cps/
1kcps
10cps/
200cps
10cps/
1kcps
10cps/
5kcps
10cps/
20kcps
KCN-A
KCX-3
10cps/
200cps
KCN-A
2
KCN-S/W
Preset
Counter
1
KCX-2
Source voltage
10cps/
2kcps
10cps/
5kcps
10cps/
20kcps
DC24V
80mA
500cps/
20kcps
DC12V
100mA
10cps/
1Kcps
10cps/
5Kcps
10cps/
10Kcps
DC12V
50mA
10cps/
20kcps
DC24V
80mA
KCN-B
Single preset
Addition with
numerical
display
KCX-1
Sensor
power
KCN-T
Addition with
I/O indicators
Number Memry backup Operation
of digits at power failure
speed
KCY
Model number
AC90 132V
AC180 264V
50/60Hz
KCX
Category
Electronic
Counters
series
AC90 132V
AC180 264V
50/60Hz
KCX-RN
KCX
KCM
KCH-B
Accessory: Metal fitting(bracket)
B-77
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D, DM
Maximum
Counting speed
1- or 2-digit: 10cps or 200cps
3- or 4-digit: 10cps or 1Kcps
5- or 6-digit: 10cps or 5Kcps
Single Preset Green
Counters for Addition
KCX-6 Counter with I/O
indicators
KCX-6D Counter with
numerical display
These counters feature an easy to read green LED
screen to display one- to six-digit values, and
operation modes and status. Advanced functions are
also integrated, including dust insulation and power
backup.
Merits
Green LED for easy reading
Dust prevention cover
On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel.
The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover.
Type A and Type B output options
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading.
Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8 mm.
Cover
With a small change to the connection, the output mode can be
switched between One shot and Hold.
Key
KCN-T
Six counter modes
Any of the six combinations can be selected as described on page
78.
KCY
Wide range of source voltage
You can choose source voltage of either AC90 to 132V, or
AC180 to 264V.
KCX
Minimum space requirement
In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72 mm
(height) 72 mm (width) 103.5 mm (depth).
Mounting
KCX-RN
Memory backup at power shutdown
KCH-B
Option to disable count input
Nickel cadmium battery is supported for minimum maintenance
work. During power shutdown, current consumption is kept as
low as several microamperes allowing memory backup for up to
2,000 hours. Power failure is detected by an integrated circuit to
activate emergency I/O gates. Input status before shutdown is
stored so the counter can resume operation upon recovery. Any
pulse input is ignored during power shutdown.
The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way,
wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket
for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall
surface mounting.
Socket B
(terminal block)
or connector
Bracket
KCM
Built-in sensor power
A DC12V, 50 mA power source is included in all counters to
allow direct connection to a proximity switch, photoelectric
sensor or rotary encoder.
Variable output duration
On the front panel, you can control the duration of One shot
(Type A) output. Using a dial, the output time can be adjusted
between 50 ms and 1,000 ms. You can extend it to 10 seconds by
adding a capacitor.
B-78
Socket F
(terminal block)
Counter body
I/O
Standard
indicators
Model number
Numerical Standard
display backup memory
KCX-3
KCX-4
KCX-1D
KCX-2D
KCX-3D
KCX-4D
KCX-5D
KCX-6D
KCX-2DM
KCX-3DM
KCX-4DM
KCX-5DM
KCX-6DM
1-digit
2-digit
3-digit
4-digit
5-digit
6-digit
Type A: One shop output with auto reset
Type B: Hold output
External reset
Auto reset
Contact input
Static input
Contact input
Static input
Maximum count speed
10cps
200cps
10cps
1kcps
10cps
5kcps
Minimum pulse width
50ms
2.5ms
50ms
0.5ms
50ms
0.1ms
Input resistance
6k
12k
6k
12k
6k
12k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: 20ms
Off delay: 4ms
Input resistance
6k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
Max. 5ms
Power shutdown
Min. 0.2s
Reset duration
Min. 0.2s
Output resistance
1.2k
Output current
Source: 2.5mA
Sink:8.0mA
Withstand voltage
45V
Output duration
Type A: Variable
Capacity
AC250V 2A
Circuit
One transfer circuit
Output duration
Type A: Variable
Electrical durability
Min. 1,000,000 contacts at AC250V resistance load)
"H"6
2V
30V
"H"6
On delay: 10ms
Off delay: 2ms
On delay: 5ms
Off delay: 1ms
Max. 1ms
Max. 0.2ms
30V
Mechanical durability
KCN-T
KCY
Type B: Held
Min. 10,000,000 contacts
10cps
200cps
10cps
1kcps
Voltage output
Approx. 10ms
Approx. 4ms
Approx. 10ms
Approx. 0.8ms Approx. 10ms
Approx. 0.15ms
Contact output
Approx. 20ms
Approx. 14ms
Approx. 20ms
Approx. 10ms
Approx. 10ms
Time for charging
Memory backup at
power shutdown
(Only models with
battery)
Type B: Held
Approx. 20ms
5kcps
50hours
4
Backup duration
Approx. 2,000 hours at 25
or 800 hours at 45
Response of emergency
input gate 5
20 200ms
(70ms typ)
Response of input
gete upon recovery
10cps
6
KCX-RN
3
(at no load voltage of 12V)
50 500ms
(120ms typ)
Sensor power
DC 12V 2V 50mA
Max. 10% (rms) ripple
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute
(For each of AC power, pin E and relay contact interconnections)
Insulation resistance
DC 500V
Vibration resistance
(In compliance with JIC C0911)
Source voltage
AC 90
KCH-B
Relay output
KCN-B
1
2
I/O response
2V
Min. 20M
132V, or AC 180
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
KCM
Power-on reset
Static input
KCN-A
Count input
Contact input
KCN-S/W
Operation
DC output
KCX-2
KCX
Number of digits
KCX-1
KCN-A
Specifications
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D, DM
264V (50/60Hz)
Power consumption
With numerical display: Approx. 5VA
Ambient temperature
(during operation)
During power supply: 0
During memory backup:
40
10
(
10
50
With I/O indicators: Approx. 3VA
50
with no risk of destroyed battery)
B-79
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D,
Storage temperature
With memory backup (included battery):
Without memory backup: 20
55
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
Noise resistance
7
20
50
(
20
70
during transportation of less than one week)
85%RH (with no dewing)
1kV (square wave pulse with 1
s width)
Approx. 0.5kg
Weight
KCV
DM
Notes:
1. Power-on reset is available on the KCX-1 to 6 and KCX-1D to 6D, the
models without the memory backup option (battery). "Reset time" is the
time required for the counter to restart counting after the power is turned
on.
2. DC output
3. Time required for the counter to generate signal after the last pulse is
counted at the rising edge.
A
Relay input
DC input
DC output
B
D
Relay output
When connected to 12V
Positive load
A or B
12V
C
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
C
KCX
t1
Source
2.4k
6V or more
t1: DC output
response
D
t2
t2: Relay output
response
KCN-B
Negative load
12
12V
14V
2k
KCN-T
Sink
5. Time for an internal circuit to disable pulse input and reset input after it
detects power failure. Until this time, these signal inputs remain active.
0.8V or less
KCY
24V
12V
KCX
Sink
Vc
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Vc is equal to or less than 3V at sink
current of 20 mA.
KCM
6. Time for an internal circuit to enable pulse input and reset input after it
detects power recovery.
7. Noise tests also include static discharge, induced load switching,
electromagnetic switch oscillation and other tests defined by KOYO.
When connected to 24V
B-80
4. Time required for the included battery to be fully charged.
DM
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D,
With memory backup
Power
The counter generates a signal upon countup, or when the
number of input pulses has reached the preset value.
Using a dial, the output duration can be adjusted between 50ms
and 1,000ms.
Upon countup, both the count and signal output are
automatically reset.
Count is reset to zero when the external reset terminal is
activated.
ON
OFF
Pulse input
Preset value
KCN-A
Type A (One shot) output
Count
Output
External
reset
KCN-A
Output modes
Count is reset by external reset.
With memory backup
Standard models
ON
OFF
Pulse input
Preset value
Power
KCN-S/W
Power
ON
OFF
t
0.2s
Pulse input
Preset value
Output
1000ms
Count
Count is reset by external reset.
Output
KCN-T
Approx. 50
External reset
External
reset
Standard models
Count is reset by external reset, or power shoutdown for
0.2 second or more.
ON
OFF
0.2s
KCY
t
Pulse input
Preset value
External reset
Approx. 50
1000ms
Type B (Hold) output
The counter generates and holds a signal upon countup, or when
the number of input pulses has reached the preset value.
On the counters with numerical displays, the terminals ,
and
can be connected. In this case, the count is not reset
upon countup, but continues to be incremented for each pulse
input.
When the terminal
and
are connected, the count is upon
countup. (See "Switching between Type A and Type B" below.)
1
12V
2
IN 10cps
3
IN High speed
4
E
5
CH1
6
CH2
7
R
Counter
Count is reset by external reset, or power shoutdown for
0.2 second or more.
Connect terminals
and
to select the Type B
operation. The count is
reset upon countup.
If the terminals ,
and
are connected, the count
is not reset upon countup. It
continues to be incremented
for each pulse input.
KCX-RN
0.2s
KCH-B
t
Output
KCX
Switching between Type A and Type B
Count
Type B operation
KCM
Power
KCN-B
Count
B-81
Terminal Assignment
KCN-A
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
KCN-T
KCY
Pulse input
Teminal number
Name
1. Relay input
Description
1
12V
2
IN(10cps)
Count input
3
IN
High speed count input
4
E
Grounding
5
CH
One shot output/Hold switch (capacitor
Sensor power output
1
1
2 IN 10cps
(capacitor
)
2
Pulse
(counted when relay is ON)
)
3
4
Not connected
7
R
External reset input
5
8
OUT
DC output
6
9
COM.
10
N.O.
11
N.C.
12
AC180
13
AC90
14
AC0V
7 R
Relay output
Reset
(Reset for ON)
264V
AC power input
132V
2. DC input
With numerical display
Teminal number
Name
Description
1
12V
2
IN(10cps)
Count input
3
IN
High speed count input
12V
Sensor power output
Max. 4.7 k
1
4
E
Grounding
5
CH1
One shot output/Hold switch (capacitor
6
CH2
Auto reset/Not auto reset switch
7
R
External reset input
8
OUT
DC output
9
COM.
10
N.O.
11
N.C.
12
AC180
13
AC90
14
AC0V
2(capacitor
1
Count input
)
Relay output
12V
2 IN (10cps)
Counter
)
3 IN (High speed)
High speed count input
4 E
5
12V
6
Max. 4.7k
Reset
7 R
Set
264V
132V
AC power input
1. See Specifications.
2. Capacitor for output time extension
Either count input or high speed count input
can be selected as count rate.
3. Connection to open collector output
4.7k
or less
PLC
KCH-B
12V
1
12V
2 IN (10cps)
3 IN (High speed)
KCM
4 E
5
6
7 R
Counter
4.7k
or less
B-82
Counter
KCX
Wiring Diagrams
With I/O indicators
6
KCX-RN
DM
Counter
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D,
2. DC output
Source load
12V
KCX
1
2 IN 10Hz
OUT
8
2
9
3
10 Static output voltage
4
E
2.5mA or less
KCN-A
1
2mA
Counter
11 L: 0.8V or less
H: 6V or more
5
12
6
13
7
14
Load
Notes on relay input
(1)On the circuit shown
on the right, the input
current to the relay is
less than 2mA. Use a
reliable relay that
responds to such small
current. Do not use an
electromagnetic switch
contact designed for
large current and
voltage.
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D, DM
or more
KCN-A
2.4k
A
Input
voltage
KCN-S/W
(2)The following table lists the standard responses of Terminal
at the pulse rate of 10 cps:
B
Input circuit
Sink load
A
9
3
10
Static output voltage
11
L: 2V or less
5
Input voltage
On delay (ton)
Off delay (toff)
6V
16ms
4ms
12V
8ms
8ms
30V
3ms
23ms
12
6
13
7
14
RL
45V or less
E
Electric current flows into the circuit when the output
voltage falls to "L" level. Contrary to the open collector,
the output rises to "H" level upon countup.
KCX-RN
These are the standard values. T1 and T0 should be at least three
times longer than ton and toff. For example, when using the
DC12V sensor power, T1 and T0 should be 24ms or more.
20mA or less
KCY
toff
E
Counter
ton
8
2
4
B
OUT
KCN-B
1
KCN-T
T0
KCX
T1
Output Connection
KCH-B
1. Relay output
8
COM
9
N.O.
10
N.C.
11
Load power
Counter
KCM
Load A
Load B
12
13
14
Upon countup, Load A is
activated and Load B is
deactivated.
B-83
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D,
DM
Connection Examples
Direct connection to a sensor
Pulse input
Red (Brown)
1
3 IN (High speed)
4 E
Black (Blue)
Count disable
3 IN (High speed)
4 E
Sensor
5
5
Red
(Brown)
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Reset
Counter
White (Black)
12V
2 IN (10cps)
2 IN (10cps)
High speed count input
Proximity switch,
photoelectric sensor
or rotary encoder
1
12V
Counter
KCV
Count input
Count disable using a free terminal
6
6
White (Black)
7 R
7 R
Black (Blue)
Proximity switch,
photoelectric sensor
or rotary encoder
Pulse count is disabled when the contact is closed
to force input to the terminal . However, the
count increments by 1 when the contact is closed
while the sensor (terminal ) output is at "L" level.
The 12V terminal should
not consume more than 5 mA.
Parallel Counters
KCN-B
1. Relay input
Count disable during signal output
12V
2 IN (10cps)
Pulse input
Counter
KCN-T
1
1
1
KCX
Counter
KCX-RN
8
9
3 IN (High speed)
10
5
Sensor
OUT
2 IN (10cps)
4 E
12V
2 IN (10cps)
12V
Counter
KCY
4 E
11
12
6
13
7 R
14
4 E
For high speed pulse input, the sensor
should be connected as shown
by the dashed lines. Use Hitachi
diodes IS2076 or equivalent.
2. DC input
Connection to TTL logic gate
4 E
R
Counter
KCH-B
5V
3 IN (High speed)
12V
1k
to TTL
Counter
Pulse input
5V
Count signal
Static relay
KTS-11L
3
8
7
KCM
1k
4
4 E
Counter
3 IN (High speed)
Reset input
Pull-in current is 4mA on the KCX counter side
(0.4V residual voltage).
R
B-84
12
(k
N
)
N: Numbers of counter that can be
connected in parallel.
RD4.7EB
(NEC)
Count
disable
Timing chart
Connection
KCN-A
Type A operation
Count
Output
KCN-A
One shot
Type B Operation
Count
Output
-
KCN-S/W
Countup
-
KCN-B
Extermal
reset
Countup
Count
Output
KCN-T
-
Extermal
reset
KCY
Not reset
Countup
Count
Output
or
One shot
KCX
Upon countup
Reset
Countup
Count
Output
Extermal
reset
KCX-RN
One shot
or
-
Held
-
KCH-B
Output
Held
One of the following six combinations can be selected for the numerical
display counters.
Count
Output
Extermal
reset
or
-
KCM
List of Counter Modes
Electronic
Counters
KCX- , M, D, DM
-
When Terminal
is connected to Terminal , the time for the count
disable to be activated is the same as the response time of Terminal
.
B-85
Maximum count speed 3- or 4-digit: 10cps or 2kcps
5- or 6-digit: 10cps or 5kcps
KCX-5W
KCX-6WM
These counters feature an easy to see green LED
screen to display three to six digit counts and dual
preset values. Other features include dust insulation
and power backup.
Merits
Green LED for easy reading
Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading.
Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8mm.
Minimum space requirement
In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72mm
(height) 72mm (width) 103.5mm (depth).
Dust prevention cover
On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel.
The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover.
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
Dual Preset Green Counters
for Addition
Output duration adjustor
Count speed switch
Mode switch
1 2
Cover
A
B
KCY
Switch 1
Mode
Type A
A
operation
Type B
B operation
Switch 2
Count speed
3 4W
2kcps 4WM
5 6W
5kcps 6WM
10cps
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Option to disable count input
Pulse input and count can be disabled by signal input to the count
disable terminal.
Memory backup at power shutdown
The integrated nickel cadmium battery allows memory backup for
up to 5,000 hours.
Wide range of source voltage
The counter accepts voltage of DC 4.5V to 30V from a source
ranging from 5V to 24V. You can choose source of either AC 90
to 132V, or AC 180 to 264V.
Integrated sensor power
DC12V, 50 mA power source is included in all counters to allow
direct connection to a proximity switch, photoelectric sensor or
rotary encoder.
Mounting
The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way,
wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket
for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall
surface mounting.
Variable output duration
On the rear panel, you can control the duration of One shot (Type
A) output. Using a dial, the output time can be adjusted between
50 ms and 1,000ms.
One shot output and Hold output options
Using the selector on the rear panel, output type can be selected
between One shot (Type A) output and hold (Type B) output.
Slow Count and Fast Count options
Using the selector on the rear panel, count speed can be switched
between 10cps and 2kcps (5kcps for 5- or 6-digit counter).
B-86
Socket B
(terminal block)
or connector
Bracket
Socket F
(terminal block)
Counter
body
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
Specifications
KCX-3W
Standard models
KCX-4W
3 digits
10cps
(selected by switch)
5kcps
Minimum pulse width
10cps 50ms
2kcps 0.25ms
10cps 50ms
5kcps 0.1ms
Input resistance
6k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay
Off delay
Input resistance
6k
2V
Response time
Input resistance
6k
Max. 0.25ms
Max. 0.25ms
"H"4.5
"L"0
Response time
Max. 0.5ms
Power-on reset
(KCX-3 6W)
Power shutdown
Min. 200ms
Reset duration
Max. 200ms
Output resistance
1.2k
Output current
Source: 2.5mA
Withstand voltage
45V
Output duration
50ms
Capacity
AC250V 2A
Circuit
One make contact
Output duration
50ms
Max. 4ms
Max. 0.8ms
30V
Max. 0.2ms
(at no load voltage of 12V)
Sink: 8mA
KCY
1s
1s
Electrical durability
Min. 10,000,000 contacts
Mechanical durability
Min. 1,000,000 contacts (resistance load)
Voltage output
10cps 10ms
2kcps 0.4ms
10cps 10ms
5kcps 0.15ms
Contact output
10cps 20ms
2kcps 10ms
10cps 20ms
5kcps 10ms
Time for charging
50h
Backup duration
5000h(25
Response of emergency input gate
Max. 200ms
I/O response
Memory backup at
power shutdown
(KCX-3 6WM)
"H"4.5
On delay
Off delay
)
2000h(40
)
Response of input
Max. 200ms
gate upon recovery
Sensor power
DC+12V
Source voltage
AC 90
Ambient temperature
During power supply: 0
During memory backup:
Storage temperature
KCX-3
KCX-3
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
Weight
0.5kg
KCH-B
Relay output
2V
Max. 0.1ms
Max. 0.1ms
30V
Max. 10ms
Max. 2ms
Input voltage
On delay
Off delay
KCN-S/W
"L"0
On delay
Off delay
30V
KCN-B
Input voltage
"H"4.5
KCN-T
2V
KCN-A
10cps
(selected by switch)
2kcps
KCN-A
Maximum count
speed
Auto reset
DC output
6 digits
KCX
External reset
KCX-6WM
5 digits
50mA
132V, or AC 180
6W:
6WM:
20
20
264V (50/60Hz) approx. 5.5VA
40
10
55
50
(
(
10
50
20
50
with no risk of destroyed battery)
KCM
Count disable input
4 digits
First preset:
Type B (Hold output) only
Second preset: Type A (One shot output) or
Type B (Hold output) selected by switch on rear panel
Operation
Count input
KCX-6W
KCX-4WM
With backup memory
Number of digits
KCX-5W
KCX-RN
Model number
70
during transportation of less than one week)
85%RH (with no dewing)
Note:
See pages 72 and 73 for withstand voltage, insulation resistance, vibration resistance, noise resistance and other related specifications.
B-87
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
Operation
Terminal Assignment
Type A (One shot) output
Type B (Hold) output
Terminal number
Selecting A or B
Only Type B output is available for the first preset value.
For the second preset value, either Type A or B can be selected by
the switch on the rear panel.
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Variable Type A output
For the second preset value, the duration of Type A output can be
changed. Use the dial on the rear panel to select the desired time
from 50ms to 1,000ms.
1
Sensor power output
2
IN
Count input
3
INH
Count disable input
4
E
Grounding
5
OUT1
DC output
6
OUT2
DC output
7
R
External reset input
OUT1
Relay output (1a contact)
OUT2
Relay output (1a contact)
8
9
11
The input speed of Terminal
can be changed. Use the selector
on the rear panel to select 10cps or 2kcps (or 5kcps for 5- or 6digit counter).
Description
12V
10
Changing count speed
Name
12
AC180 264V
13
AC90
14
AC0V
132V AC power input
Type A (One shot) output
(1) Count starts 0.2 second after the power is on.
(2) Count is interrupted when the count disable terminal
is
activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Count is
restarted when the terminal is deactivated.
(3) The counter generates a signal upon countup, or when the
number of input pulses has reached the first preset value. For
the first preset, signal output is held (Type B output).
(4) The counter generates another signal when the pulse count has
reached the second preset value. Upon countup, both the count
and signal output are automatically reset.
(5) The first signal drops to zero at the same time as the second
signal.
(6) Count is reset to zero when the external reset terminal
is
activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Signal output
is also reset if the count has previously reached the first and/or
second value.
(7) The KCX-3 to 6WM models integrates a backup memory for
power shutdown. When the power is shut down, both the count
and the output status are stored in this memory.
(8) These models also have a power-on reset function. Count and
signal output are reset when the power is off for 0.2 second
then turned on.
KCX-RN
Standard models: KCX-3 to 6W
Power
t
0.2s
Pulse input
KCH-B
Second preset value
First preset value
Count
Count disable
First output
KCM
50ms
Second output
External reset
B-88
1s
t
0.2s
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
With memory backup: KCX-3 to 6WM
Power
Pulse input
Second preset value
First preset value
KCN-A
Count
Count disable
First output
KCN-A
1s
External reset
Type B (Hold) output
(5) Count and signal output are reset when the external reset terminal
is activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V.
(6)
(7)
Same as the steps 7 and 8 of the Type A output
KCN-B
(1)
(2) Same as the Type A output.
(3)
(4) The counter generates and holds a signal when the pulse count
has reached the second preset value.
KCN-S/W
50ms
Second output
KCN-T
Standard models: KCX-3 to 6W
Power
0.2s
t
0.2s
KCY
t
Pulse input
Second preset value
First preset value
Count
Count disable
KCX
First output
Second output
KCX-RN
External reset
With memory backup: KCX-3 to 6WM
KCH-B
Power
Pulse input
Second preset value
First preset value
KCM
Count
Count disable
First output
Second output
External reset
B-89
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
Wiring Diagrams
Pulse input
Output Connection
1. Relay input
1. Relay output
1
8
12V
Load power
9
Counter
3
4
10
Counter
KCV
2 IN 10cps
Pulse input
(counted when contact is ON)
Load power
11
12
KCN-A
13
6
14
7 R
Reset
(reset when contact is ON)
KCN-S/W
Load
OUT2
5
KCN-B
Load
OUT1
Only the relay contact a is used for the first and second outputs.
On the rear panel, set the speed switch to Low (10 cps).
2. DC input
2. DC output
Source load
2
L: 0.8V or less
H: 6V or more
Max. 4.7k
1
Pulse input
4 E
2 IN
Counter
3
KCY
3
12V
4 E
2.5mA or less
Load
2.5mA or less
Load
Counter
KCN-T
1
5 OUT1
6 OUT2
7
5
6
Max. 4.7k
KCX
7 R
1
45V
or less
2
B-90
1
12V
2mA
KCX
3
8mA
20mA MAX.
8mA 20mA MAX.
2 IN 10cps
4
5 OUT1
6 OUT2
7
L: 0.8V or less
3V or less at sink current of 20mA.
Counter
Note on relay input
On the circuit shown on
the right, the input current
to the relay is less than
2mA. Use a reliable relay
that responds to such small
current. Do not use an
electromagnetic switch
contact designed for large
current and voltage.
Load
KCM
Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate.
Load
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Sink load
Electronic
Counters
KCX- W, WM
Count Disable Input Connections
1. Relay input
12V
KCN-A
1
2 IN 10cps
Counter
3
Count is disable when
relay is ON
4
KCN-A
Pulse input
5
6
KCN-S/W
7
KCN-B
When count is disabled, only slow input is available.
2. DC input
12V
KCN-T
1
Max. 4.7k
2 IN
KCY
4
5
6
KCX-RN
KCX
7
KCH-B
Count is disabled when
transistor is OFF
Counter
3
KCM
Pulse input
B-91
Electronic
Counters
KCX- T
Total Counters with
Green LED
Maximum counting speed
KCX-4T: 10cps or 1kcps
KCX-6T: 10cps or 5kcps
KCX-8T: 10cps or 10kcps
KCX-4T
KCX-6T
KCV
The counters feature an easy to see green LED
screen. Other features include variable voltage and
power backup of 5,000 hours.
Merits
KCN-A
Each model features a green LED display to facilitate reading.
Numerical values are displayed with the height of 8 mm.
KCN-S/W
Green LED for easy reading
Pulse input and count can be disable by voltage input to the
disable terminal.
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
Option to disable count input
KCX-8T
Memory backup at power shutdown
The integrated nickel cadmium battery allows memory backup for
up to 5,000 hours.
Wide range of source voltage
The counter accepts voltage of DC 4.5V to 30V from a source
ranging from TTL level to 24V. You can choose source of either
AC 90 to 132V, or AC 180 to 264V.
Latch option
Count can be latched and displayed by signal input to the latch
terminal. When the terminal is deactivated, the counter restarts
from the current count.
KCX
Option to disable manual reset
You can disable the Reset key on the front panel to prevent
accidental reset.
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Zero suppression
The counter suppresses non-significant zeroes on the left to the
count value.
Built-in sensor power
A DC 12V, 50mA power source is included in all counters to
allow direct connection to a proximity sensor, photoelectric
sensor or rotary encoder.
Socket B
(terminal block)
or connector
Bracket
Minimum space requirement
In compliance with the DIN standard, all models are sized 72mm
(height) 72mm (width).
KCM
Mounting
The counter can be mounted onto the wall surface in either way,
wall surface mounting or flush mounting. Use mounting bracket
for the flush mounting and use terminal block (socket F) for wall
surface mounting.
Dust prevention cover
On all models, a protective cover is attached to the front panel.
The keys and buttons can be operated through this cover.
Cover
B-92
Socket F
(terminal block)
Counter
body
Electronic
Counters
KCX- T
Specifications
Model number
KCX-4T
KCX-6T
KCX-8T
Number of digits
4 digits
6 digits
8 digits
10cps 50ms
Input resistance
10cps 6k
Input voltage
"L"0 2V
Response time
On delay Max. 1ms
Off delay Max. 1ms
1kcps
1kcps
"H"4.5
0.5ms
12k
10cps or 5kcps
10cps or 10kcps
10cps 50ms 5kcps 0.1ms
10cps 50ms 10kcps 50 s
10cps 6k
10cps 6k
5kcps 12k
10kcps 12k
30V
On delay Max. 0.2ms
Off delay Max. 0.2ms
On delay Max. 0.1ms
Off delay Max. 0.1ms
Count disable input
Input resistance
6k
Input voltage
"L"0 2V
Manual reset
and )
Disabled by switch on the front panel (by short circuiting Terminals
On delay Max. 0.1ms
On delay Max. 0.5ms
Response time
Off delay Max. 0.1ms
Off delay Max. 0.5ms
On delay Max. 50 s
Off delay Max. 50 s
"L"0 2V "H"4.5
Time for charging
50h
Backup duration
Response of emergency
input gate
Response of input
gate upon recovery
5000h(25 )
KCN-S/W
6k
Input voltage
30V
2000h(40 )
Max. 200ms
Max. 200ms
Max.0.1ms
Response time
Max. 0.5ms
Latch input
Input resistance
6k
Sensor power
DC
Source voltage
AC 90 132V, or AC 180 264V (50/60Hz, 5.5VA)
40 ( 10
50 with no risk of destroyed battery)
During power supply: 0
During memory backup: 10
50
Input voltage
20
Storage temperature
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
50
Max.0.1ms
30V
50mA (Max. 5% rms ripple)
(
20
70
during transportation of less than one week)
KCY
Ambient temperature
"L"0 2V "H"4.5
12V 2V
KCN-B
Memory backup
at power shutdown
Input resistance
30V
KCN-T
External reset
"H"4.5
KCN-A
10cps or 1kcps
Minimum pulse width
KCN-A
Count input
Maximum count speed
85%RH (with no dewing)
Approx. 0.5kg
Weight
See pages B-82 and B-83 for withstand voltage, insulation resistance, vibration resistance, noise resistance and other related specifications.
1
12V
Description
Terminal number
Name
Description
Sensor power output
8
Not
connected
Count input
9
Not
connected
2
IN (10cps)
3
IN(1kcps/5kcps/10kcps) High speed count input
10
4
E
Grounding
11
5
INH
Count disable
12
AC180
6
RD
Manual reset prevention
13
AC90 132V
7
R
External reset input
14
AC0V
L
Latch input
Not
KCH-B
Name
connected
264V
AC power input
KCM
Terminal number
KCX-RN
Terminal Assignment
KCX
Note:
B-93
Operation
(1)Count starts 0.2 second after the power is on.
(2)Count is reset to zero when the Reset key is pressed, or when
the external reset terminal
is activated by additional voltage
of 4.5V to 30V. Only one zero is displayed on the first digit.
(3)The minimum pulse width should be as follows:
50ms for all counters operating at 10cps
0.5ms for KCX-4T at 1k cps
0.1ms for KCX-6T at 5k cps
50 s for KCX-8T at 10k cps
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- T
The counter total individual counts and displays the current
total.
The terminal
should be used for 10 cps, and the terminal
for 1k cps, 5k cps and 10k cps.
(4)Count is interrupted when the count disable terminal
is
activated by additional voltage of 4.5V to 30V. Count is
restarted when the terminal is deactivated.
(5)Count is latched when the terminal
is activated by input
voltage of 4.5V to 30V. When the terminal is deactivated, the
counter restarts from the current count.
Timing Charts
KCN-S/W
Power
Pulse input
KCN-B
Count
Display
Count disable
KCN-T
Manual reset
Disable munual
reset
External reset
KCY
Latch
Wiring Diagrams
KCX
Pulse input
2. DC input
1. Relay input
12V
12V
2 IN 10cps
Relay input
(counted when relay is ON)
Max. 4.7k
3
4
Counter
KCX-RN
1
1
2 IN (10cps)
Count signal
3 IN (High speed)
High speed pulse input
6
7 R
4 E
5
12V
6
Max. 4.7k
KCM
Reset input
Reset signal
7 R
Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate.
B-94
Counter
KCH-B
5
Reset
(activated when relay is ON)
12V
Pulse input
Note on relay input
Latch Input Connections
1 Relay input
1
12V
Counter
9
3
10
4
5
Count Disable Input Connections
1. Relay input
Latch input
11
Count is latched
when relay is ON.
12
6
13
7
14
12V
2 IN (10cps)
Counter
3
4
KCN-B
Pulse input
KCN-S/W
For relay input, only the pulse input can be used.
1
2. DC input
5
1
7
2
Pulse input
8
3
IN (High speed)
4
E
1
Max.4.7k
Pulse input
12
6
13
7
14
Count is latched
when transistor
is OFF
Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate.
2
IN (10cps)
3
IN (High speed)
4
Max.
4.7k
Counter
12V
10
11
Counter
5
2. DC input
9
IN (10cps)
12V
KCN-T
6
KCX-RN
Count is disable when
relay is ON.
5
KCN-A
2 IN 10cps
KCY
Pulse input
8
12V
KCN-A
1
2 IN 10cps
KCX
2mA
Counter
On the circuit shown on
the right, the input
current to the relay is less
than 2mA.
Use a reliable relay that
responds to such small
current. Do not use an
electromagnetic switch
contact designed for
large current and voltage.
Electronic
Counters
KCX- T
Disabling manual reset
8
1
Pulse input
Manual
reset disable input
2
IN (10cps)
3
IN (High speed)
10
4
E
11
5
9
KCM
7
Count is disable
when transistor
is OFF
Either pulse input or high speed pulse input can be selected as count rate.
KCH-B
6
12
6
RD
13
7
R
14
(disabled when relay is ON)
B-95
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Maximum counting speed:
Single or Dual Preset Counters for Fast Addition and Subtraction
10cps or 20kcps
The counter integrates a 4- or 6-digit green LED
display, and provides Add, Subtract and Compare
options. I/O logic can be switched between positive
logic and negative. The counter can be connected to
either a source or sink I/O device.
Merits
Addition and Subtraction
KCN-S/W
With the ability to count in the two directions, the counter can be
used for precise control of a cutter or winder.
Addition
Subtraction
P2
KCN-B
P1
OUT1
OUT2
KCN-T
Addition
Subtraction
P2
P1
KCY
OUT1
OUT2
KCX
Positive and negative I/O logics
Choices of I/O devices are also expanded. The counter supports both positive and negative I/O logics.
Relay
DC output
Relay output
NPN proximity switch
Source input PC
15mA MAX.
KCX-B6W
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Sink input PC
30mA MAX.
PNP proximity switch
Motor
AC250V 2A
Rotary encoder
B-96
Solenoid
Specifications
KCX-B6
KCX-B4M
KCX-B6M
Single preset
External reset input
Auto reset
Input resistance
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 4.7k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: Max. 25
Off delay: Max. 25
Input resistance
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 4.7k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: Max. 5ms
Off delay: Max. 5ms
Input resistance
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 4.7k
Input voltage
"L"0
Reset time
Max. 50
6V
"H"12
6V
"H"12
6 digits
30V
s
s
30V
30V
s
Number of circuits
1 circuit
Positive output
Voltage: 16 28V (at no load vltage of 28V)
Current: Max. 15mA
Negative output
Load voltage: Max. 35V
Load current: Max. 30mA
Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V
Number of circuits
One transfer circuit
Capacity
AC220V 2A (resistance load)
Electrical durability
Min. 200,000 contacts (resistance load)
DC output
Relay output
"H"12
4 digits
KCN-A
10cps
(selected by switch)
20kcps
KCN-A
Count disable input
6 digits
Maximum count
speed
6V
KCX-B6WM
KCN-S/W
Pulse input
KCX-B4WM
Dual preset
4 digits
Number of digits
KCX-B6W
KCN-B
Setting
KCX-B4W
2 circuits
KCN-T
With backup memory
KCX-B4
Two N.O. contacts
KCY
Standard
Model number
10cps: Approx. 30ms
20kcps: Approx. 30 s
Relay output
10cps: Approx. 40ms
20kcps: Approx. 10ms
6
6W
)
Power shutdown
Max. 500ms
Reset time
Max. 500ms
Memory backup at
power shutdown
KCX-B4M
( KCX-B4WM
6M
6WM
)
Time for charging
50h
Backup duration
2000h(25
Response of emergency
input gate
20
500ms
Response of input
gate upon recovery
50
500ms
24V (20
Sensor power
DC
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute (For each of AC power, Terminal E and relay contact interconnections)
Vibration resistance
(In compliance with JIS C 0911)
Noise resistance
1kV (square wave pulse with 1
Source voltage
AC90
10
50
Storage temperature
20
50
Weight
80mA
132V,or AC180
Ambient temperature
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
28V)
)
(
20
KCH-B
KCX-B4
( KCX-B4W
264V
70
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
s width)
KCM
Power-on reset
KCX-RN
DC output
KCX
Mechanical durability Min. 20,000,000 contacts
I/O response
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
14VA
during transportation of less than one week)
85%RH (with no dewing)
Approx. 0.5kg
Time required for the counter to restart counting after the power is turned on.
B-97
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Front Panel and Terminal Assignment
KCX-B
(M)
T/N
Name
KCV
1
Count display
(Character height: 8mm)
KCN-A
Output status
Preset keys
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Pot. meter for adjusting
output duration
KCX-B
24V
IN A
Pulse count input A
3
IN B
Pulse count input B
4
E
Negative common I/O
5
IN H
Count disable
6
Not connected
7
R
External reset input
8
OUT
DC output
9
COM
Common Relay output
10
N.O.
N.O. Relay output
11
N.C.
12
AC180
13
AC90
14
AC0V
KCN-T
KCY
Count display
(Character height: 8mm)
Output status
Name
KCX
5
6
11
12
13
14
Description
Sensor power
2
IN A
Pulse count input A
3
IN B
Pulse count input B
4
E
Negative common I/O
5
OUT 1
DC output for the first value
DC output for the second value
External reset input
Preset keys for the second value
8
IN H
Count disable
Pot. meter for adjusting
output duration
9
COM
Connected relay output
10
N.O.1
Relay output for the first value
11
N.O.2
12
AC180
13
AC90
14
AC0V
7
KCM
10
80mA
R
KCX-RN
4
KCH-B
3
24V
OUT 2
Switch 5
B-98
Power input
6
Switches 1 to 4
9
132V
7
Preset keys for the first value
8
N.C. Relay output
264V
W(M)
1
2
Description
Sensor power
2
T/N
1
80mA
Relay output for the second value
264V
132V
Power input
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
I/O Circuits
(M)
24V
Sensor
power
Pulse
count
input A
DC output
24V
Pulse
count
input A
DC output for
the first value
24V
KCN-A
24V
24V
24V
Negative
common
Not
connected
24V
Reset
Reset
Internal circuit
Negative
common
Pulse
count
input B
Internal circuit
Pulse
count
input B
DC output for
the second
value
Common
relay output
24V
Common
relay output
N.O.
Count
disable
Relay output
for the first
value
24V
Relay output
for the second
value
Count
disable
KCN-T
N.C.
KCN-A
24V
KCN-S/W
24V
Sensor
power
W (M)
KCX-B
KCN-B
KCX-B
5V
—
24V
—
24V
24V
—
—
KCX
24V
Power
input
KCY
5V
Power
input
1. Mode selection
To select the counter modes, use the four switches located on the rear side of the counter, and ten positions of the rotary switch.
1
2
7
8
6
5
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
4
3
4
Direction
4
I/O logic
2
3
1
2
Pulse count
0
B
1
3
Count speed
9
A
Mode selected
SW5
5
Position
Value selected
A
10cps
B
20kcps
A
Separate
B
Two-phase
A
Subtraction
B
Addition
A
Negative
B
Positive
KCM
Switch
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Operating procedures
Signal output
B-99
Switch 1
Count speed
This switch used to set or change the maximum count rate. Turn the switch to Position A to
select 10cps, and Position B to select 20kcps. Position A is used for relay input such as a switch
or relay. Use Position B for DC input such s a rotary encoder or proximity switch.
Switch 2
Count mode
This switch selects the Two-Phase or
Separate count mode. For a proximity
switch or relay, set the switch to Position
A to select the Separate mode. For a rotary
encoder, set it to Position B to select the
Two-Phase mode.
Separate mode (Position A)
Addition
Subtraction
H
L
IN A
IN B
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
H
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
L
Two-Phase mode (Position B)
Addition
Switch 3
Switch 4
Subtraction
IN A
H
L
H
L
IN B
H
L
H
L
Direction
This switch changes the count direction to
Addition or Subtraction. Set the switch to
Position A to select Subtraction, and set it
to Position B to select Addition. When a
reset signal is entered, the counter is reset
as follows:
In the Subtraction mode, the single preset
counter is reset to the first preset value,
and the dual preset counter is reset to the
second preset value.
In the Addition mode, both counters are
reset to zero.
Subtration
Reset
Increments Preset
value
Count
Decrements
0
Addition
Reset
Increments
Count
Decrements
0
I/O logic
Use this switch to select either positive or negative I/O logic. To select the negative logic (active at
"L" level), set the switch to Position A. To select the positive logic (active at "H"), set it to Position B.
Negative logic (Position A)
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Countup
DC output
Input
Load
NPN
transistor
K C X -B
Load
power
Input
H
L
KCM
H
ON
Output
L
Positive logic (Position B)
Countup
DC output
PNP
transistor
Load
Input
power
Input
L
K C X -B
Input
H
H
Output
L
B-100
ON
OUT 2
Signal output
Count
Signal output
0
Held
1
2
3
"OUT 2" applies to single preset counters. P2 is reset to the
preset value, and P1 is reset to zero.
Positions 0 to 5 are used to select the Countup mode. Positions
6 to 9 select the Compare mode.
Held
4
6
C: Count
P1: First preset value
P2: Second preset value
8
9
50
1000ms
Reset
Continued
100ms
5
7
Continued
Held
Continued
50
1000ms
Reset
C
C
P1
C
P1
P2
C
C
C
P2
P2
C
P1
KCN-A
Count
Use this rotary switch to select the output mode of the counter.
Six modes are available for single preset counters, and ten modes
for dual preset counters.
Position 0
OUT 1
Position
P2
0
KCN-A
Signal output
P2
Addition
Maximum count
Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999)
Addition
Maximum count
Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999)
KCN-S/W
Switch 5
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Second
Preset value
First Preset
value
KCN-B
Count 0
O UT 1
O UT 2
Position 1
KCN-T
Reset
Second
Preset value
KCY
First Preset
value
Count 0
OUT1
50 1000ms
50 1000ms
KCX
OUT2
Reset
Position 2
Subtraction
Addition
KCX-RN
Second
Preset value
First Preset
value
Count 0
OUT1
50 1000ms
KCH-B
50 1000ms
OUT2
Reset
Position 3
Maximum count
Subtraction (4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999)
Addition
KCM
Second
Preset value
First Preset
value
Count 0
100ms
100ms
O UT 1
O UT 2
Reset
B-101
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Position 4
Addition
Subtraction
Maximum count
(4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999)
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
F irst Pre se t
va lu e
Count 0
100ms
100ms
OU T 1
50 1000ms
50 1000ms
KCV
OU T 2
Reset
Addition
Position 5
Subtraction
KCN-A
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
First Pre se t
va lu e
Count 0
KCN-S/W
100ms
100ms
OU T1
50 1000ms
50 1000ms
OU T2
KCN-B
Reset
Position 6
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
First Pre se t
va lu e
KCN-T
Count 0
OU T 1
KCY
OU T 2
Position 7
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
First Pre se t
va lu e
KCX
Count 0
OU T 1
KCX-RN
OU T 2
Position 8
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
KCH-B
F irst Pre se t
va lu e
Count 0
OU T1
KCM
OU T2
Position 9
Se co n d
Pre se t va lu e
F irst Pre se t
va lu e
Count 0
OU T1
OU T2
B-102
Maximum count
(4-digit: 9999,6-digit: 999999)
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
2. Input Circuit
The KCX-B Series counters can use either positive or negative input.
To change the input mode, use Dip switch 4 on the rear panel.
A
A
Positive
Negative
KCN-A
B
B
Switch 4 at Position B
Switch 4 at Position A
4.7k
ON voltage: Max. 6V
OFF voltage: 12 30V
ON current: Max. 6mA
ON voltage: 12 30V
OFF voltage: Max. 6V
ON current: Max. 14mA
at 30V
KCN-B
2.2k
KCN-S/W
24V
KCN-A
Positive input equivalent circuit
Negative input equivalent circuit
(1) Pulse count mode
Use Dip switch 4 to change the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate.
KCN-T
Input waveforms
A
Separate mode
B
Switch 2 at Position A
Positive mode
Addition
Addition
IN A
H
KCY
Negative mode
IN A
L
H
L
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN B
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN A
Subtraction
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN A
Subtraction
Counted either at rising edge or falling edge
IN B
H
IN B
L
KCX-RN
KCX
IN B
H
L
A
Two-Phase mode
KCH-B
B
Switch 2 at Position B
Positive mode
Addition
IN A
IN A
L
IN B
Addition
H
H
L
H
IN B
L
H
L
Subtraction
Subtraction
H
IN A
L
IN A
H
IN B
L
KCM
Negative mode
IN B
H
L
H
L
B-103
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Pulse count requirements
Separate mode
IN A
Two-Phase mode
H
H
IN A
L
L
KCV
IN B
H
IN B
12.5 s or more 12.5 s or more
L
H
L
Each interval must be 12.5
s or more
KCN-A
Repeated additions or subtractions
IN A
H
L
IN B
H
L
KCN-S/W
Both A and B can be counted at the
same time if the pulse width and
interval are equal to or longer than 12.5 s.
In the addition mode, this signal resets the count to zero. In the subtraction mode, the count is
reset to the first preset value on the single preset counters, and to the second value on the dual
preset models. The reset input overrides the pulse input and the count disable input.
(3) Count disable
The disable signal suspends the pulse count. When it turns off, count restarts from the value at the
time of suspension.
3. Output Circuit
The KCX-B Series counters can use DC output or relay output. Either positive or negative logic
can be selected. The 1c relay contact is used for the single preset models, and 2a relay contact for
the dual preset models.
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
(2) External reset
A
A
Positive
Negative
B
B
KCX-RN
Switch 4 at Position A
24V
Negative Switching current:
Negative Applied voltage:
Negative Residual voltage:
Positive Output voltage:
Positive Output current:
In the negative mode, the output
terminal generates a voltage of 20V
to 28V when signal output turns off.
For the load input terminal, use a
reverse current blocking diode that
withstands 40V backward voltage
and 40mA forward current.
Max. 30mA
Max. 35V
Max. 1.5V
16~28V
Max. 15mA
KCM
KCH-B
Equivalent circuit
Switch 4 at Position B
Use a totem-pole structure for the DC
output. Do not connect the circuit in
parallel with other DC output.
Relay output AC220V
Single preset
B-104
2A (resistance load)
Dual preset
COM
COM
N.C.
N.O.1
N.O.
N.O.2
(1) 6 digits
(2) 4 digits
When Switch 5 is between Position 0 to Position 5, the counter is
set to the Hold mode or One shot mode. In the Hold mode, signal
output is retained after countup. In the One shot mode, signal is
generated for a short period upon countup.
When Switch 5 is anywhere between Position 6 to Position 9, the
counter operates in the Compare mode. When the count exceeds
the above range, the counter retains the lower or upper limit.
In the Addition mode, the count changes as follows when it has
reached the upper limit:
When Switch 5 is positioned to select the One shot mode, no
signal is generated upon countup. When the count has exceeded
the allowable range 100 times, it changes in the same way as the
6-digit models.
9999
000000
In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as follows when it has
reached the lower limit:
000000
0000
In the Subtraction mode, the count changes as follows when it has
reached the lower limit:
999999
0000
9999
KCN-B
999999
In the Addition mode, the count changes as follows when it has
exceeded the upper limit 100 times:
KCN-A
The KCX-B models can count from 0 to 9999 (4 digits), or 0 to 999999 (6 digits).
KCN-S/W
4. Count overrange
KCN-A
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
KCN-T
Wiring Examples
Pulse input
Positive logic
2 INA
Addition
Subtraction
3 INB
1
1
2
3
4
Switch 1 at Position B
Switches 2 and 4 at
Position A
24V
Addition
2 INA
Subtraction
3 INB
4 E
Sensor connected through NPN
open collector gate
1
2
3
4
Switches 1 and 4
at Position B
Switch 2 at
Position A
4 E
Sensor connected through PNP
open collector gate
Negative logic
Positive logic
1
1
24V
Addition
24V
Addition
2 INA
Subtraction
1
2
3
4
2 INA
Switches 1, 2 and
4 at Position A
Subtraction
3 INB
3 INB
4 E
4 E
1
2
3
4
KCX-RN
Switch or relay
24V
KCX
1
KCY
Negative logic
Switches 1 and 2 at
Position A
Switch 4 at Position B
KCH-B
Proximity switch or
Photoelectric sensor
Red
Green
White
Black
1
KCM
Rotary encoder
24V
2 INA
1
2
3
4
Switches 1 and
2 at Position B
3 INB
4 E
On the TRD-J -RZ models, Switch 4
can be set to either Position A or Position B
B-105
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
Count disable input
Reset input
Single preset in negative logic
Single preset in positive logic
1
3 INB
1
KCV
4 E
2
3
4
24V
1
2 INA
Switch 4 at Position A
Negative logic
5 INH
3 INB
6
4 E
2
3
5 INH
6
NPN open collector
or contact
5 INH
NPN open collector
4 E
4
witch 4 at Position B
PNP open collector
KCN-A
7 R
1
2
3
4
KCN-S/W
Switch 4 at
Position A
Dual preset in negative logic
Dual preset in positive logic
Positive logic
1
1
NPN open collector
INH 8
24V
KCN-B
2 INA
1
COM 9
3 INB
N.O.1 10
2 INA
PNP open collector
2
8
INH
24V
3
COM 9
3 INB
24V
4
N.O.1 10
5
4 E
1
2
3
4
Switch 4 at
Position B
6
1
2
3
4
1
KCN-T
Switch 4 at Position A
2
3
7 R
4
Switch 4 at Position B
KCY
DC output
Relay output
Single preset in negative logic
Single preset in positive logic
16
24V
8
COM
9
Max. 30mA
(Do not use
relay drive.)
24V
2 INA
28V
8
15mA
MAX.
OUT 8
COM 9
Single preset
COM
9
3 INB
3 INB
Max. 35V
load power
KCX-RN
4 E
Load power
4 E
N.O. 10
N.C. 11
Load
Load
AC220V 2A
Dual preset in negative logic
KCM
KCH-B
1
Load
2 INA
OUT
Load
KCX
1
PNP open collector
or contact
Dual preset in positive logic
1
1
2
2
3
3
4 E
4 E
Dual preset
8
COM
9
Load power
30mA MAX.
Load
10
N.O.2
11
Load
15mA MAX.
Load
5 N.O.1
5 N.O.1
Load
AC220V 2A
35V MAX.
Load
30mA MAX.
B-106
N.O.1
6 N.O.2
15mA MAX.
Load
6 N.O.2
Winder with one-step reduction gear
PNP output proximity switch
Timer
The counter generates a stop signal when the
number of turns has reached the second preset value.
It generates a deceleration signal when the count has
reached the first preset value.
Select the Low count rate, Subtraction mode,
Negative I/O logic and Separate pulse input. Switch
5 should be set to Position 0.
When the pulse count has reached the first value, the
reduction gear is activated to decelerate the motor.
The bobbin stops completely when the count is
decremented to zero.
Cutter
Disk shaped
dog switch
Brake
Reduction
gear
Switches 1,2,3
and 4 at Position A
7 8
9
KCX-B
Black
(Blue)
Decelerate
Stop
4
W(M)
INH
24V
White
(Black)
Motor
controller
3
IN A
COM
IN B
N.O.1
E
N.O.2
OUT 1 AC180
264V
AC90
132V
OUT 2
Brake power
KCN-B
Red
(Brown)
2
4
1
2 3
Motor
0 1
5 6
Bobbin
KCN-S/W
Wire
KCN-T
AC100V
R
KCN-A
Recommended applications
KCN-A
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B
AC0V
Reset
KCY
Start
Stamper
W(M)
Red
24V
Green
White
Black
(Blue)
OUT
IN A
COM
IN B
N.O.
E
Shield
Solenoid power
KCX
KCX-B
N.C.
INH
AC180
264V
AC90
132V
KCX-RN
As the feed roller rotates, the workpiece is
moved by a preset distance. The number of
revolutions is converted to a pulse frequency by
the rotary encoder, and counted by the
electronic counter. When the count has reached
a preset number, the counter generates a
signal to activate the solenoid and the stamp.
Use the dial on the counter panel to adjust the
output duration. Select the Addition mode,
Positive I/O logic, Two-phase input and High
count rate. Switch 5 should be set to Position 2
or Position 5.
AC100V
R
AC0V
Reset
7 8
2
3
4
KCH-B
1
4
RZ
2 3
TRD-J-
0 1
5 6
9
Detect roller
KCM
Switches 1,2,3
and 4 at Position B
Solenoid
Stamp
Preset interval
Feed roller
Feed motor
B-107
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B T
Fast Total Counters for Addition and Subtraction
Maximum count speed: 10cps or 20kcps
In addition to counting in two directions, these
counters can use negative values. They are
displayed on the easy to see green LED screen.
Available options include count disable, reset
prevention and negative or positive input logic. The
counter can be used for positioning a moving object
as shown below.
Merits
KCX-B6T
Total counter as fast as 20kcps
Using both addition and subtraction, the counter totals individual
counts much more quickly than other similar products. With the
option of 10cps, the counter can be used for many purposes.
KCN-B
Press
Press count
KCN-T
KCY
Two-phase input and separate input
Limit switch
With these options, the counter widens choices of input devices to
rotary encoder, proximity sensors and relay contacts. It accepts
simultaneous inputs for addition and subtraction. This is ideal for
keeping track of variable quantities such as workpieces on a
conveyor and cars in a parking lot.
Rotary encoder
Positive and negative input logics
Table position
KCX
The choices of input devices are also expanded. Except for slow
reset, positive or negative can be selected to allow the use of PNP
or NPN open collector.
KCX-RN
Positive logic
Ability to count negative numbers
The count range is doubled by the ability to operate both in
positive and negative numbers.
Negative logic
IN
IN
E
E
Relay input
24V
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-B6T counter
Negative 0
DC input
Positive
E
999999
999999
IN
PNP open collector
24V
IN
E
NPN open collector
Fast reset and slow reset
The two reset signals work as AND elements. They can be used to combine two different operations. For example, the counter can be reset
only when the rotary encoder and the drilling machine are at their respective home positions. No additional circuit is required.
Pulse input Phase A
Phase B
High-speed reset input
Reset input
B-108
Rotary encoder
Phase Z
Limit switch to detect home position
Proximity switch
Electronic
Counters
KCX Series
Specifications
KCX-B4T
KCX-B6T
4 digits
6 digits
Reset input
Manual reset
Memory backup at
power shutdown
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 3.3k
"L"0
Response time
On delay: Max. 25
Off delay: Max. 25
6V
"H"16
Input resistance
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 3.3k
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: Max. 25
Off delay: Max. 25
6V
"H"16
Input resistance
Positive: 2.2k
Negative: 3.3k
30V
s
s
30V
s
s
Input voltage
"L"0
Response time
On delay: Max. 50ms
Off delay: Max. 50ms
Input resistance
Positive: 3.3k
Input voltage
"L"0
6V
"H"16
6V
"H"16
KCN-A
Input voltage
KCN-A
Input resistance
30V
30V
Manual reset is disabled by switch on front panel (by short circuiting terminals
Time for charging
50h
Backup duration
2000h(25
500ms
Response of input
gate upon recovery
50
500ms
Sensor power
DC+24V(20
80mA
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV for one minute (between AC power and Terminal E)
Vibration resistance
(In compliance to JIS C 0911)
Noise resistance
1kV (square wave pulse with 1
s width)
Source voltage
AC90
132V, or AC180
14VA
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
20
50
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
(
20
Durable for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.5mm amplitude
No error for one hour along three axes at 10 to 55Hz with 0.35mm amplitude
264V
70
)
)
Response of emer
20
gency input gate
28V)
and
KCN-T
High speed reset
input
Maximum count speed
999999
KCY
Count disable input
999999
KCX
Pulse input
9999
10cps
or (selected by switch)
20kcps
KCN-S/W
9999
Count range
KCN-B
Number of digits
during transportation of less than one week)
85%RH (with no dewing)
Approx. 350g
Weight
Character height on display: 8mm
KCX-RN
Model number
Name
24V 80mA
IN A
IN B
E
IN H
RD
RH
RL
AC180 264V
AC90 132V
AC0V
Description
Sensor power
Pulse count input A
Pulse count input B
Common input
Count disable
Manual reset prevention
High speed reset input
Reset input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
1
Power input
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
Switches 1 to 4
9
10 11 12 13 14
B-109
KCM
T/N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
KCH-B
Terminal Assignment
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B T
Operating procedures
1. Mode selection
To select the counter modes, use the four switches located on the rear side of the counter.
Switch
Mode selected
1
IN A Count speed
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
2
Position
IN B Count speed
3
Pulse count
4
Input logic
Switches 1 and 2
Value selected
A
10cps
B
20kcps
A
10cps
B
20kcps
A
Separate
B
Two-phase
A
Negative
B
Positive
A
B
1
2
3
4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Count speed
These switches are used to set or change the maximum count speed. Turn the either switch to Position A to select 10cps, and Position B to
select 20kcps. Position A is used for relay input such as a switch or relay. Use Position B for DC input such s a rotary encoder or proximity
switch.
Pulse speed
Switch 3
Separate mode (Position A)
Addition
This switch changes the pulse count mode
between Two-Phase and Separate. For a
Proximity switch or relay, set the switch to
Position A to select the Separate mode.
For a rotary encoder, set it to Position B to
select the Two-Phase mode.
IN A
IN B
Subtraction
H
L
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
H
L
Two-Phase mode (Position B)
Addition
Subtraction
IN A
H
L
H
L
IN B
H
L
H
L
Input logic
Switch 4
Use this switch to select the input logic either Positive or Negative. To select the negative logic (active at "L" level), set the switch to
Position A. To select the positive logic (active at "H"), set it to Position B.
2. Input logic selection
A
A
Negative logic
Positive logic
KCH-B
B
B
Switch 4 at Position A
Negative logic input equivalent circuit
Positive input equivalent circuit
Input terminal
Internal circuit
KCM
24V
Switch 4 at Position B
3.3k
B-110
Internal circuit
Input terminal
ON voltage: Max. 6V
OFF voltage: 16 to 30V
ON current: Max. 9mA
2.2k
ON voltage: 16 to 30V
OFF voltage: Max. 6V
ON current: Max. 14mA
at 30V
Electronic
Counters
KCX Series
3. Pulse count input
Use Dip switch 3 to change the pulse count mode between Two-Phase (90 dephased) or Separate.
Input waveforms
A
Separate mode
KCN-A
B
Switch 3 at Position A
Positive mode
Addition
Addition
IN A
L
KCN-A
IN A
H
H
L
IN B
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
IN B
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
IN A
Subtraction
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
IN A
Subtraction
Counted either at rising edge (H) or falling edge (L).
H
IN B
L
H
L
KCN-B
IN B
A
Two-phase (90 dephased) mode
B
Negative mode
Positive mode
Addition
Addition
H
IN A
L
H
L
L
H
L
Subtraction
Subtraction
H
IN A
IN A
L
H
IN B
KCY
IN B
IN B
L
H
KCX
H
L
H
L
KCX-RN
IN B
KCN-T
Switch 3 at Position B
IN A
Pulse count requirements
Separate mode
Two-Phase mode
H
IN A
L
H
s or more 12.5
s or more
IN B
KCH-B
L
12.5
IN B
H
H
L
L
Each interval must be 12.5
s or more
KCM
IN A
KCN-S/W
Negative mode
B-111
Electronic
Counters
KCX-B T
4. External reset input
On the KCX-B T Series counters, reset and high speed reset are used as an AND gate.
If you do not use both of them, keep the unused input at ON level.
Pulse input
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Count
0
High speed
reset input
ON
OFF
Reset input
ON
OFF
5. Count disable input
KCN-B
The disable signal halts the pulse count. When it turns off, count restarts from the value at the time of halt.
Input pulse
KCN-T
Count
0
ON
OFF
KCY
Count block
input
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
Count overrange
The KCX-B T models can count from-999999 to 999999 (6 digits) or-9999 to 9999 (4 digits).
(1) Six digits
In the Addition mode, the count is reset to 000000 when it has reached 999999.
In the Subtraction mode, the count is reset to 000000 when it has reached -999999.
(2) Four digits
The counter displays only four digits, but internally keeps six-digit counts.
The counter operates in the same way as the 6-digit model (KCX-B6T).
KCM
Disabling manual reset
Connect Terminals 6 and 4 if you wish to disable the Reset button on the front panel.
It allows you to prevent erroneous preset.
B-112
Electronic
Counters
KCX Series
Wiring Examples
Pulse input
Positive logic
1
24V
Addition
2 INA
Subtraction
3 INB
1
2
3
4
Switches 1 and 2 at
Position B
Switches 3 and 4 at
Position A
24V
Addition
2 INA
Subtraction
3 INB
4 E
Sensor connected through NPN
open collector gate
1
2
3
4
Switches 1,2 and
4 at Position B
Switch 3 at Position A
4 E
Sensor connected through PNP
open collector gate
Negative logic
KCN-A
Switch or relay
1
Positive logic
1
1
24V
Addition
24V
Addition
1
2 INA
2
3
4
1
2 INA
Switches 1,2,3 and
4 at Position A
Subtraction
KCN-A
Negative logic
Subtraction
3 INB
4 E
4 E
3
4
KCN-B
3 INB
2
Switches 1,2 and
3 at Position A
Switch 4 at Position B
KCN-S/W
Proximity switch or
photoelectric sensor
Rotary encoder
Green
White
Black
1
24V
2 INA
1
2
3
4
KCN-T
Red
Switches 1,2
and 3 at Position B
3 INB
4 E
Count disable input
KCY
On the TRD-J -RZ models, Switch 4 can be set
to either Position A or Position B
Reset input
Negative logic
4 E
3 INB
1
4 E
KCX
Negative logic
2
3
4
NPN open collector
1
5
Switch 4 at Position A
2
3
4
Switch 4 at Position A
KCX-RN
5 INH
6
6
8
Reset input
Positive logic (Fast reset)
1
24V
2 INA
1
1
2
3
4
24V
KCM
Positive logic
KCH-B
7 High speed reset input
NPN open collector
PNP open collector
4 E
Switch 4 at Position B
1
2
3
4
Switch 4 at Position B
3 INB
6
4 E
5 INH
7 High speed reset input
PNP open collector
NPN open collector
8 Reset input
B-113
KCN-B
KCN-T
Changing the duration of Type A output
In the One shot mode, output duration can be changed from 50ms
to 1,000ms. For adjustment, use the dial on the front panel.
(On the KCX- W and KCX- WM counters, the dial is located
on the rear panel.)
KCY
T/B/B T)
6. In the following cases, 100 hours are required for charging
the battery:
When the counter is used for the first time
When the battery is unused for a long time
7. Service life of battery
When fully charged, the battery should be able to support
memory for 2,000 hours (5,000 hours on the KCX-
Turn the dial counterclockwise
or clockwise to decrease or
increase the duration. Turn it
fully to either direction to
select the minimum or
maximum time.
Electrolytic capacitor
KCX- T models). It should be replaced when this period is
years. It can serve longer if the ambient temperature is kept
at 5 to 30 .
50ms
1000ms
Protection against noise
4 E
5 CH1
6 CH2
Output duration
Minimum
Maximum
50ms
1s
F
16V
100ms
2s
4.7
F
16V
150ms
3s
10
F
16V
250ms
5s
22
F
16V
500ms
10s
None
All of the KOYO electronic counters are tested for noise
resistance. In addition to the standard tests, we perform special
inspections to assure reliable performance. Use the following
procedures for additional enhancement:
1. When you use a solenoid valve, clutch or brake near the
counter, connect a surge absorbing circuit in parallel with its
drive coil. This circuit should consist of a capacitor serially
connected with a resistance of 100 (1/2W). Use an oilimpregnated capacitor or an MP capacitor of 0.1 to 0.5 F.
Noise absorbing circuit
R 100 1 2 W
C 0.1 0.5 F
Capacitor
C
R
KCX-RN
KCH-B
Memory backup at power shutdown
In some counters, a second battery is integrated to backup the
count memory upon power shutdown. The battery can be fully
charged in 50 hours. With only one hour charging, it can supply
power for 40 hours, or 100 hours on the KCX- WM and KCXT models.
Notes on memory backup
1. When power is shut down, the count display is cleared, and
2. In a noisy area, do not share the power line with a device that
uses large electric current. Always shield the I/O signal cables,
and connect the shielded cables between the sensor and the
counter.
If they are installed on separate frames, use a thick wire of at
least 0.5mm2 to connect the frames.
the sensor power drops to 0 V.
2. During Type B (Hold mode) operation, DC output also drops
KCM
WM and
reduced to 50%. Normally, the battery can be used for five
On the KCX single preset
counters, you can extend the
output time by adding a
capacitor
between
the
terminals and .
2.2
KCX
KCX Series
For optimum performance(KCX- , M, D, DM/ W, WM/
Counter
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
For optimum performance
to 0V resulting in random signal. Upon the recovery of
power, the signal output returns to the status before the
power shutdown.
Sensor
Counter
Shielded cable
12V
OUT
E
12V
OUT
E
G
3. If the power is turned off during pulse input, the counter
uses the battery to continue correct count.
Thick wire
4. You cannot reset the count by shutting power down.
5. During power shutdown, the count is not reset by any
external reset signal.
B-114
Frame A
Ground
Frame B
For optimum performance
E
E
Ground the frame
Other ground cable of large current
Frame
4. Use a resistor of 470
(1/2W) if you add an electromagnetic
relay to the slow pulse count terminal. Insert the resistor
between the input terminal and the ground cable. This prevents
incomplete contact, and helps improve reliability.
12V
Electromagnetic
contact
Connecting the power
On the KCX Series counters, the power transformer is set to 110V
or 220V. Avoid the following connection:
Electronic
Counters
KCN-A
Presetting to zero
The counter may be preset to zero (for example, to "000" on a 3digit counter). This may cause the counter to act as follows:
It may generate a signal unless the input pulse is at "L" level
and the reset signal is at "H" level.
In the Type B mode, the counter may display 0,1,2,3 if a
sequence of pulse signals are entered while the reset signal is at
"L" level.
KCN-T
E
2
KCN-A
Other device (1)
Wrong
AC 180
264V
AC 90
132V
W
KCX
0V
E
AC 200
220V
AC 100V
KCX
2
0V
KCX-RN
1
Correct
AC 90
132V
AC 180
264V
KCX
0V
KCX
KCH-B
470
KCY
IN
0V
AC 100V
AC 200/220V
0V
0V
KCM
Counter
During operation, a change to the preset value may cause the
counter to generate a false signal. Before you make a change,
always turn the power off, or reset the counter. Otherwise, the
counter generates no signal upon countup, or erroneously
generates a signal before or after the count has reached the new
value.
KCN-S/W
If you use a common ground for the counter and other devices,
connect the ground cable to the counter frame. Use a thick and
short ground cable, and isolate it from any other cable that
grounds a large current.
Changing the preset value
KCN-B
3. Keep the minimum distance between Terminal E and the
frames.
KCX Series
Other counters
B-115
KCV
Electronic
Counters
Cautions
KCX Series
Cautions
Output relay contact
The counter can be connected to an induced load. It may be an
electromagnetic switch, control relay, AC solenoid or
electromagnetic valve. The counter contains an output relay
contact. Its service life is reduced if higher current or voltage
flows to the contact. The following graph shows the relation
between the durability of the contact and the magnitude of load:
An effective means is to use a CR surge absorber or
varistor. Connect such element in parallel with the load as
shown below.
Counter relay contact
Counter relay contact
R
Load
Load
R
KCN-A
Relay durability curve
AC 264V or less
Machanical durability
AC 264V or less
Z: ZNR (Panasonic) ERZC05DK391
TNR (Marukon) TNR9G 431K
Counter relay contact
KCN-S/W
1000
AC 250V Resistance load
500
10E-2(IR)
W60C (Hitachi)
R
Load
DC 24V Coil load
Times of contacts
(in 100,000's)
50
AC 250V Resistance load
DC 24V Coil load
10
KCN-T
KCN-B
100
Surge absorbing circuit
0
1
2
3
Load current
On the contact surface, carbide is produced by glow discharge of
induced load being switched. This increases the contact resistance.
The carbide produced can be eliminated by arc discharge that
occurs at higher current. It keeps the contact surface clean with
minimum resistance. At lower current or voltage, the contact
cannot be switched properly because of the carbide. It becomes
unserviceable before the number of contacts reaches the normal
limit. Its life can be reduced to as short as one tenth or one
hundredth of the time estimated from the above curve. If you use
small voltage or current, action should be taken to prevent glow
discharge.
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
Under load conditions specified in JEM 1230 (1976)
B-116
The induced load of the relay contact is 10% to 20% of the
resistance load. The smaller the load is, the longer the contact
can serve.
With or without the memory backup, the status of DC output
during power shutdown is undefined. That is, the output can
randomly change between "1" and "0".
On some models, certain numbers are displayed in different
shapes as shown below. This is normal for such models.
KCX-1D/2D/3D/4D
KCX-B/KCX-B T
Other models
External Dimensions
(in mm)
Boring dimensions for wall
surface mounting using
Socket F
1-5 Thickness of panel for flush mounting
Bracket
(Tighten screws with a
torque of less than
4 kg-cm.)
2-M4
84
75
60 ± 0.2
94.5
(118.5)
9
KCN-A
72
75
72
15
Dimensions with protective cover
61
57±0.2
0.7
0
0.2
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
72
20
22
External dimensions of Socket B (KB-03): Same as
Socket F.
KA-01, KF-03 and KB-03 are options.
68
0.7
0
KCN-T
18
21
68
60
84
38
2
1.5
10±0.2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Boring dimensions for flush
mounting
4.5 hole
Socket F (KF-03) for wall
surface mounting
Specified connector:
KA-01
KA-01
KCN-S/W
72
Socket F or B
KCN-B
Protective cover
KCN-A
External Dimensions
Electronic
Counters
KCX Series
KCX
KCY
Notes:
Use the screws provided to install the counter on Socket F (KF-03) or Socket B (KB-03).
For the connector kit KA-01 and Socket B (KB-03), use screws sized as follows:
For the connector kit (KA-01): 12mm or less
For Socket B (KB-03): 30mm or less
Do not use longer screws, as they may break the internal elements.
Mounting hole dimensions
KCX-RN
75 or more
KCH-B
68
0.7
0
KCM
94 or more
68
0.7
0
Square hole
When the protective cover is used,
the mounting hole is 70 70mm.
B-117
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
Maximum operating speed
Presettable/Read-out Counter for
High-speed Addition and Subtraction
20kHz
This counter is equipped with a read-out function,
setting input, and writing via full-digit static BCD code.
In addition, size-matched output and zero output are
provided in this addition and subtraction counter for
high-precision position determination.
90 phase
difference in
operational
input for
addition and
subtraction
BCD load/preset
Matched output
Dual region counter for
addition and subtraction
Comparison circuit
Load-directed
input
KCN-T
KCN-B
BCD input
Zero output
Control output
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Basic Composition
Size output
Preset input
BCD
output latch circuit
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
BCD lead out
The KCX-4RN and KCX-6RN consist of the following
elements:
1) A counter with a positive and negative region for addition
and subtraction.
2) Data input (load and preset use common terminals) for BCD
coding.
3) Load-directed input for loading (writing) of BCD input data
to a counter and presetting.
4) Output latch circuit for external output of count values in
BCD code.
5) Comparison circuit for comparison of BCD preset data and
count values.
6) Controlled output circuit that outputs matching, zero, and
size signals using the logic circuit.
Count operations
Addition and subtraction counts can span both positive and
negative regions.
Load (writing)
BCD data is written in the counter via the load-directed
input.
Presetting
BCD input data is normally read by the comparison circuit.
Output
When count values=preset values/count values=0, respective
controlled output is produced.
B-118
Merits
Load input (writing of count values)/setting input/read-out
(read-out/output of count values) are provided by means of input
and output functions for static signals via total digit static BCD
coding. Thus, it can work obtaining count data and preset data
from units like programmable controllers and computers is
possible.
20 kHz high-speed operation
It can correspond to an input signal with a 90 phase difference or
addition and subtraction input to allow 20 kHz high-speed
operation. To that end, high-speed control naturally prevents
miscounts due to mechanical vibrations or backlash to allow highprecision control.
Dual region positive and negative operation
Counts are performed in both positive and negative regions for
addition and subtraction. In addition, count values and preset
values can also be loaded and preset in the positive and negative
regions. With comparative output, matching, large, small, and
zero outputs are provided, and comparison can be conducted in
both positive and negative regions.
Memory back-up upon power failure
The counter has memory back-up upon a power failure via a
secondary NiCd battery. When power is OFF, count values are
retained. In addition, gates are provided for individual input to
prevent malfunctions via the power source turning ON and OFF.
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
Specifications
KCX-4RN(4-digit)
Model number
Maximum operational speed
VIH
VIL
IIL
Ton 25 s
Ton 25 s
VIH
VIL
IIL
Latch input
Response
Input
Response
Toff 25 s
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
Ton 25 s
VIH
VIL
IIL
Output-disabled input
Toff 25 s
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
High-speed
Ton 25 s
Toff 25 s
Low-speed
Ton 25ms
Toff 25ms
Reset input
VIH
VIL
IIL
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
VIH
VIL
IIL
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
Ton 25 s
Response
BCD load-directed inpu
(Notes 1 and 2)
KCN-A
Response
Toff 25 s
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
KCN-S/W
VIH
VIL
IIL
Toff 100
s
Ton 25ms
Toff 25ms
(Note 7)
Voltage input
Ton 10 s
Response
VIH
VIL
Input resistance
Toff 10 s
4.5 30V
2V Max.
6k
KCY
BCD input
Minus sign
Writing/setting input
Open collector
C=P Offdelay output
Zero Offdelay output
C P Output
C P Output
Output current
100 mA Max. (residual voltage 1.5 V)
Relay drive possible (internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force)
Response
50
(Note 6)
s
KCX
Maximum permitted voltage DC45V
Open collector
Output current
30 mA Max. (residual voltage 1 V)
Relay drive not possible
Response
50
s
KCX-RN
Output
C P output
Zero output
Maximum permitted voltage DC30V
Voltage output
10-12 V (when +12 V is applied to LB1)
Output resistance
IOL
Response
2.2k
20 mA (residual voltage 2 V)
KCH-B
No-load voltage
BCD output
C P Output
25 s
Internal power source
Preset OUT
DC12V 30mA
Load OUT
DC12V 30mA
DC 12 V 100 mA (+10-14 V) ripple 5% rms
Sensor power source
Memory backup
upon power failure
KCM
Maximum permitted voltage DC45V
Source output for
digital SW common
Memory duration
Approx. 2000 hrs (25 C)
Duration of input gate response upon power failure
Duration of input gate response during power recovery
50
50
Notes:
1) Ton: Ondelay duration
2) Toff: Offdelay duration
3) VIH: High-level input voltage (non-operational)
KCV
6k
Response
Disabled count input
(Notes 3,4, and 5)
KCN-B
Input resistance
4.5V Min.(30V Max.)
1.0V Max.
5mA Max.
KCN-T
Count input
KCX-6RN (6-digit)
Dual phase
: 20 kHz/500 Hz
Addition and Subtraction: 20 kHz/500 Hz
200ms
500ms
4) VIL: Low-level input voltage (operational)
5) IIL: Low-level input current (current flowing from counter input terminals to an input device)
6) Output current: current that can flow to open collector transistors
7) When CH4(LB13) and E(LA5 and LB5) are short-circuited
B-119
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
KCX-4RN(4-digit)
Model number
Operational display
Withstand voltage
Vibration resistance
Insulation resistance
Source voltage
Power consumption
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Ambient humidity/storage humidity
Weight
Accessories
KCX-6RN(6-digit)
AC2000 V 1 minute between ground and power source terminals
Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
Conforms to JIS C 0911 No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
DC500 V more than 20 M between ground and power source terminals
AC90 132V AC180 264V 50/60Hz
16VA
10
50
(during transportation, -20-+70 is possible on the order of 1 week)
20
50
35-85% RH (with no dewing)
1.0kg
Metal fittings for installation and a card edge connector
Block Diagram
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
Minus sign input
BCD load input/preset input (common for load/preset and terminals)
LB14
CH3
LA4
CH1
LA11
LB11
Switching between phase
difference/addition and subtraction
CH2
LA12
LB12
Switching between
20 kHz/500 Hz
INA
LB2
Count input
BCD input circuit
LED driver
1
KCN-T
LB3
3
4
5
6
LA2
C P OUT
OFF Delay
LA8
C P OUT
Zero Offdelay output
LA3
Zero OUT
OFF Delay
Zero output
LA6
Zero OUT
C
P Output
LA7
C
P OUT
C
P Output
LA9
C
P OUT
Output for load selection
LA13
Load OUT
Output for preset selection
LA14
Preset OUT
Output for sensor power source
LA1
0.1A 12V
C P output Offdelay output
Input
processing
Addition input
INB
2
Up/Down counter
Count input
C
P output
Subtraction input
INH
LB4
Disabled count input
RH
LB7
High-speed reset output
RL
LB8
Low-speed reset output
Latch
LB6
BCD latch input
OUT INH
LB9
Output-disabled input
CH4
LB13
Load IN
LB10
Vcc
LB1
E
LA5
LB5
Gate
KCY
Comparison circuit
KCX
Setting input circuit
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
1
2
3
4
5
6
Output latch circuit
Load-directed input
LA10
BCD read-out
C
0 OUT
LB1
LA4
12V
CH3
2.2k
12k
2.7k
12k
8.2
6.8k
B-120
1.5k
2.7k
output or
zero output
Offdelay output
Zero Offdelay output
Addition and subtraction counts are performed via an independent
addition/subtraction signal or a dual-phase signal for a 90phase
difference. Switching operational speed between 20 kHz/500 Hz is
possible.
Addition and subtraction counts are performed for counts in both
positive and negative regions. After loading count values via BCD
data, count signals are input and addition and subtraction counts
are performed with this loaded data. Positive and negative display
is indicated only with a minus sign.
The minus sign input terminal and BCD input terminal data
is loaded (written) into the counter or becomes preset data
input depending on the Load instruction state.
BCD input and minus sign input
H
Preset data is input
L
Loaded data is input
Control output for load input terminals at the L level is locked out.
Count input is given preference for loading (even when
count input is added, forced loading will take place if the
load-directed input is at the L level).
If load-directed input is changed to BCD data and the like at the
L level, the loaded data (count values) will also change
accordingly.
If load-directed input is at the H level, BCD data will become
preset data. In this condition, changing the BCD data will
change preset values accordingly.
If the load-directed input is at the H level, preset data is usually
compared to count values.
When a load direction is via a relay, CH4(LB13) and E(LA5
and LB5) must be short-circuited.
Controlled output
Count values for load-directed input at the H level are usually
compared to setting values. In this condition, the following
controlled outputs are produced.
C
P output
C
P output
C
P output
Zero
output
C: count values/P: setting values
Note) These outputs are output
only in conditions for count
values and setting values.
Note : Timing to perform latching of BCD data is a rise in BCD
latch input terminals. When BCD latch input terminals
reach the H level again, the BCD read-out and sign outputs
will be output as current BCD data and sign data.
Reset input
Count values are reset to 0.
When count values are loaded, they are given preference in
loading and count values will become 0.
KCN-S/W
KCN-B
–3
KCN-T
–2
KCY
–1
Operational chart
Addition input
Subtraction input
Load values
KCX
0
Preset values
KCX-RN
1
BCD latch input terminals at the L level, count display, BCD readout data, and minus sign data are latched (retained). At this time,
count values and minus sign values will change if there is count
input. However, these outputs and count displays are latched as-is.
0
Reset input
Load input
output
Zero output
KCH-B
2
Loading and presetting
Load-directed input
Count values are usually output via BCD coding. In addition,
minus sign data is usually output. These data outputs have a latch
function and are held (latched) via BCD latch terminals at the L
level. As a result, count data can be easily input into a
programmable controller, computer, or the like.
output
output
output
Offdelay
Output
ZeroOffdelay
Output
approx. 50 ms
approx.
50 ms
KCM
Input signal
3
All controlled output is in open collector format.
BCD latch input
Ex.: Substraction count
4
Offdelay
BCD read-out/minus sign output
Counting operations
Display
approx. 50 ms
KCV
Setting input
KCN-A
Operations
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
Outputs other than the 4 outputs above are the C=P Offdelay
output and the zero Offdelay output.
B-121
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
Terminal Arrangement
Name
Sensor power source
KCV
KCN-A
1
Name
Vcc IN
Name
Zero OUT
OFF Delay
3
3
INB
Switching to BCD input format
CH3
4
4
INH
Ground
E
5
5
Zero OUT
6
6
Latch
Latch input
C
P OUT
7
7
RH
High-speed reset input
C
P OUT
8
8
RL
Low-speed reset input
C
P OUT
9
9
OUT INH
Output-disabled input
C
0
10
10
Load IN
Load-directed input
CH1
11
11
Switching between 20 kHz/500 Hz CH2
12
12
Load OUT
Selected output
for digital SW common Preset OUT
13
13
15
15
6A
6D
16
16
6B
17
17
18
19
19
20
20
Empty terminals
21
21
AC power source
22
22
Empty terminals
AC power source
AC90
132V
AC0V
1
A1
D1
2
2
B1
C2
3
3
A2
D2
4
4
B2
Disabled count input
C3
5
5
A3
D3
6
6
B3
C4
7
7
A4
D4
8
8
B4
3rd digit
4th digit
C5
9
9
A5
D5
10
10
B5
C6
11
11
A6
D6
12
12
B6
1C
13
13
1A
1D
14
14
1B
2C
15
15
2A
2D
16
16
2B
3C
17
17
3A
3D
18
18
3B
4C
19
19
4A
4D
20
20
4B
5C
21
21
5A
5D
22
22
5B
5th digit
1st digit
Switching load input
IN
Minus sign input
2nd digit
6th digit read-out
3rd digit
4th digit
5th digit
Name
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
4th digit
5th digit
6th digit
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
BCD read-out
6C
AC180 264V
1
2nd digit
CH4
14
18
AC power source
C1
6th digit
14
Empty terminals
Signal
Count input
BCD lead-out
6th digit read-out
UB
1st digit
INA
Switching between dual
phase/addition and subtraction input
UA
Read-out voltage input
2
Controlled output
Signal
BCD load/setting input
KCN-S/W
1
Signal
BCD load/setting input
KCN-B
LB
2
Minus sign output
KCN-T
12V
LA
C P OUT
OFF Delay
Offdelay output
KCY
Signal
4th digit
5th digit
Note: The signal ABCD in BCD input and BCD read-out corresponds to 1, 2, 4, and 8 codes in respective BCD codes.
KCX
Input operating mode/Output operating mode
Input
Output
Active Low input
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
Category
Terminal
number
Active High input
Category
Active Low output
Terminal
number
Category
Terminal
number
LB2
C
LB3
C P Offdelay output
LA2
LB4
Zero output
LA6
High-speed reset input
LB7
Zero Offdelay output
LA3
Low-speed reset input
LB8
C
P output
LA7
BCD latch input
LB6
C
P output
LA9
INA
Count input (dual phase)
INB
LB2
Disabled count input
LB3
Output-disabled input
LB9
Load-directed input
LB10
B-122
INA
Count input (addition and subtraction)
INB
P output
Active High output
Category
LA8
BCD read-out
BCD input
UA1 12
(load/preset) UB1 12
Minus sign input
LB14
Terminal
number
Minus sign output
UA13 22
UB13 22
LA15,16
LB15,16
LA10
Terminals/Explanation of Their Functions
LA 1
12V
Explanation
Reference
diagram
Sensor power source 100 mA
C
3
Zero OUT OFF Delay
Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force
C=P OUT OFF Delay When output is ON(L), the C=P lamp lights up.
3
4
CH3
The E terminal or a +12 V terminal must be connected for the format output from an input device for BCD input.
4
5
E
Ground (0 V common)
6
Zero OUT
Open collector format 30 mA relay drive not possible.
5
7
C
P OUT
Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force When output is ON(L), the C>P lamp lights up.
3
8
C
P OUT
Open collector format 30 mA relay drive not possible.
5
9
C
P OUT
Open collector format 100 mA internal protective circuit for counter electromotive force When output is ON(L), the C>P lamp lights up.
3
10
C
0 OUT
Minus sign output Voltage output format.
11
CH1
12
CH2
Input speed is 500 Hz via connection with the E terminal.
2
13
Load OUT
Output for selection of setting devices for loading (H level for load-directed input L).
6
14
Preset OUT
Output for selection of setting devices for presetting (H level for load-directed input H).
6
15
6C
4 6th digit read-out
16
6D
8 6th digit read-out
When open, 90 phase differential input format/connection with the E terminal for addition and subtraction input.
2
KCN-B
P OUT OFF Delay
KCV
2
17
18
KCN-A
Signal
KCN-S/W
Terminal number
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
AC source input AC180-264 V
19
21
22
LB 1
AC source input AC0 V
Vcc IN
Terminal that provides BCD read-out output voltage/connected to LA1(12 V) for output voltage of 12 V
1
Count input Dual phase/combined addition and subtraction
2
2
IN A
3
IN B
4
INH
5
E
Ground (0 V common)
6
Latch
BCD latch input Latches BCD lead-out and minus sign output. When input is ON(L), the Latch lamp lights up.
7
RH
High-speed reset input
8
RL
Reset input
9
OUT INH
When output-disabled input is added, controlled output is disabled.
10
Load IN
Load-directed input When input is added, BCD data is loaded in the counter. When input is ON(L), the Latch lamp lights up.
11
CH1
Input format Terminal for switching between dual phase/addition and subtraction (same as LA11).
2
12
CH2
Operational speed Terminal for switching between 20 kHz/500 Hz (same as LA12).
2
13
CH4
Switching load-directed input When open, breakless input/connection with the E terminal for relay input.
IN
Minus tally input Minus tallies are loaded for load input. When input is ON(H), the -P lamp lights up.
15
6A
1 6th digit read-out
16
6B
2 6th digit read-out
KCX
Disabled count input When input terminals are at the L level, counting is disabled.
KCH-B
14
KCY
KCN-T
AC source input AC90-132 V
KCX-RN
20
17
AC source input AC180-264 V
KCM
18
19
20
AC source input AC90-132 V
21
22
AC source input AC 0V
B-123
Terminal number Signal
UA 1
1
C1
Terminal number Signal
"4"
2
D1
"8"
3
C2
"4"
4
D2
"8"
5
C3
"4"
6
D3
"8"
7
C4
"4"
8
D4
"8"
9
C5
"4"
10
D5
"8"
11
C6
"4"
12
D6
"8"
13
1C
"4"
14
1D
"8"
15
2C
"4"
16
2D
"8"
17
3C
"4"
18
3D
"8"
19
4C
"4"
20
4D
"8"
21
5C
"4"
21
5D
"8"
A1
"1"
2
B1
"2"
3
A2
"1"
4
B2
"2"
5
A3
"1"
6
B3
"2"
7
A4
"1"
8
B4
"2"
9
A5
"1"
10
B5
"2"
11
A6
"1"
12
B6
"2"
13
1A
"1"
14
1B
"2"
15
2A
"1"
16
2B
"2"
17
3A
"1"
18
3B
"2"
19
4A
"1"
20
4B
"2"
21
5A
"1"
21
5B
"2"
2nd digit
3rd digit
BCD input
4th digit
5th digit
6th digit
1st digit
2nd diguit
BCD
read-out
3rd digit
4th digit
5th digit
Explanation
UB 1
1st digit
Treatment of Vcc IN terminal LB1
2
When the output voltage for BCD read-out is 12 V, the connection
is per the following diagram (however, supply of DC12 V to the
external load is not possible in this instance).
Vcc IN
LB
KCX-RN
Explanation
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
BCD input
4th digit
5th digit
6th digit
1st digit
2nd diguit
BCD
read-out
3rd digit
4th digit
5th digit
Note: BCD load input and BCD preset input use common terminals.
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
1
BCD read-out circuit
Count input signals
1) Dual-phase input
90
late phase
IN B
90
early phase
IN A
Subtraction
90
early phase
90
late phase
IN A
Addition
LB1
2
2.2 k
IN B
LA
1
Counts with an
2
in timing.
12V
Vcc IN
KCH-B
LB
1
0V
2) Addition and subtraction timing
Residual voltage
5
2.2 k
DC5
14V
Addition: Input in INA (INB is for the L level)
Subtraction: Input to INB (INA is for the L level)
Power
2.0V
KCM
20mA
Note: With dual-phase input at a 90 phase difference and count input
for addition and subtraction, operating modes will differ so
exercise caution.
When VccIn (LB1) is open,
use is possible. In this
case, output will be an open
collector type.
B-124
3) Count input: switching between dual-phase
input/addition and subtraction input
3
Composition of controlled output (1)
C
Dual-phase input
Leave CH1 terminal LA11 open.
P
output
C
P
output
Load
100mA
8.2
1.5V
E
4
4) Switching between count input 20 kHz/500 Hz
20kHz
Leave CH2 terminal LA12 open.
LA
LA
CH2
12
3
CH3
E
4
5
KCN-B
E
5
Treatment of CH3 terminal LA4
1) When the signal source that is added to BCD input
and IN input is voltage output
500Hz
Connect CH2 terminal LA12 and E terminal LA5.
KCV
Residual voltage
These outputs form the
circuit structure in the
figure.
KCN-A
11
C
KCN-S/W
5
8.2
Offdelay output
Power
source
CH1
Output circuit
ffdelay output
E
Addition and subtraction input
Connect CH1 terminal LA11 and E terminal LA5.
LA
P
Zero
E
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
LA4
12k
KCN-T
12k
2.7k
LA5
Input circuits (common input circuits)
BCD input circuit
Form of voltage output
12V
KCY
KCX-RN
2.7 k
2) When the signal source that is added to BCD input
and IN input is an open collector
1.5 k
12V
LA
1
CH3
E
4
5
KCX
6.8 k
KCX-RN
5) Conditions for count input
Phase-differential input
Permitted operational range for input phase
90
45
IN A
LA1
KCH-B
LA4
12k
IN B
12k
IN B
KCM
2.7k
LA5
Input for addition and subtraction
IN A
Ta
IN B
Tb
E
Ta
12.5
s
Tb
12.5
s
Tc
12.5
s
KCX-RN
BCD input circuit
Note: Treatment of step 1) or 2) must be performed. With CH3 open,
data will become unstable. To this end, 1 will be input when it
is open. Short-circuit output that is not used to E(LA5).
Tc
B-125
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
5
C P
output
Zero
output
Output circuit
These outputs form the circuit
structure in the figure. This is not
a protective circuit for counter
electromotive force.
Residual voltage
Load
Power
source
KCN-A
30mA
KCN-S/W
Memory backup upon a power failure
Composition of controlled output (2)
1V
6
Composition and operation of the selected output for setting devices
1)
180
12V
LA13
Load OUT
A secondary battery is internally mounted, so count values can
be retained in memory even during long-lasting power failures.
The internal battery is charged while power is supplied to the
power source (charging requires approx. 50 hrs). In this
condition, the duration of memory retention when power to the
power source is interrupted is approx. 2000 hrs (a standard
value).
Battery lifetime: When the duration of memory retention drops
to 1000 hrs, this point is specified as the end of the battery's
lifetime. In addition, having ambient temperature on the order
of 5-30oC for the counter tends to prolong battery lifetime.
Connection examples
Sending signals to count input terminals
Proximity switch/photoelectric sensor
IN A IN B
KCN-B
LB
LA14
Preset OUT
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
12V
LA
KCN-T
E
2
LOWER
180
12V
1
1
11
Setting device, common for presetting
2)
Setting device, common for loading
Proximity switch
Load OUT
KCY
LA
Preset OUT
13 14
LB
1
2
E
Load IN
5
10
B
A
Photoelectric sensor
Subtraction
Addition
KCX
Rotary encoder
IN A IN B
Load input
LB
1
E
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
LOWER
12V
KCH-B
KCX-RN
LA
Preset OUT
Load OUT
L
L
H
H
H
L
Note: Even when Load OUT and Preset Out are at the L level,
exercise caution since there is no current flow capacity.
7
KCM
Load input
Explanation of CH4(LB13)
When load-directed input is breakless, open CH4(LB13).
When load-directed input is relayed, connect CH4(LB13) and E (LB5 or
LA5).
LB
B-126
E
CH4
5
13
1
Red
Green White
Black
11
Open
TRD-J
TRD-GK
Sending signals to a disabled count input gate
DC output signal (general)
4
5
6
RH
RL
7
8
LB
4
E
Latch
5
6
LB
7
LOWER
LA
4
5
6
7
6
5
6
LOWER
LA
8
Latch
4
5
6
LA
7
KCV
LOWER
E
5
0V
Relay signal
DC output signal
LB
RH
RL
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
E
KCN-A
DC output signal
LOWER
LB
E
OUT INH
5
9
LOWER
E
OUT INH
5
9
5
9
LOWER
LA
Switch, relay, etc.
LB
5
LA
9
0V
Relay signal
Relay signal
DC output signal
LB
IN H
E
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
KCN-T
LA
KCN-S/W
E
LB
KCN-B
Sending signals to reset input terminals
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
DC24V
R2 Relay coil
2
3
12
4
KCX
1
DC output signal
C
POUT ZeroOUT
OFF Delay
Application example
Application to a multiplex preset counter
D1
Digital switches
LA
TRD-GK
-R
Dn
LB
1
1
Green
2
2
White
3
3
4
4
5
5
Black
D3
LA
D1
BCD input
D2
Diode
Driver
KCX-RN
C
P output
Circuit for selection of
setting devices
8
2
KCM
Red
D2
When aligned with a setting device as in the
diagram on the left, diodes as shown in the
illustration are required.
KCX-RN
LA
R1
KCH-B
LA
KCY
LOWER
C
P Off delay output
BCD input
B-127
Digital switches for BCD data input
Setting devices for loading
Output for selection of setting devices
When a digital switch is used as BCD data, L
OUT (terminal LA13) and P OUT (LA14) serve
as the voltage power source that is applied to
common terminals and are interlocked with the
load-directed input (terminal LB10). When
load-directed input is at the H level, voltage is
produced for P OUT. At this time, L OUT
becomes 0 V. Digital switch data for settings is
input as setting values to the counter. When
load-directed input is at the L level, the reverse
occurs and voltage is produced for L OUT while
P OUT becomes 0 V. When load-directed input
is at the L level, loading (writing) is possible.
Thus, digital switch data for loading is loaded
into the counter. If load-directed data is at the H
level, the counter is ready for setting again. At
this point, previously loaded values will not
change even if load-directed input is at the H
level.
Setting devices for setting
6th digit
CH3
LA4
E
LA5-LB5
KCN-B
Load input
External Dimensions
(in mm)
9
Metal fittings for installation
(Screw clanp torguei 5kg-cm or less)
134
KCX
0
144 -0.5
67
0
72 –0.5
0.2
1-5 panel thickness
KCY
KCN-T
LOUT
LA13
LA14
POUT
2nd digit
LB10
Load input
UA12
UA11
UB12
UB11
1st digit
12V
LA1
UA4
UA3
UB4
UB3
KCN-S/W
UA2
UA1
UB2
UB1
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCX- RN
Square holes for embeddable installation
KCH-B
68 +0.7
0
KCX-RN
0
137.8 –0.2
138 +10
The character height of
the numerical display
device is 12.7 mm.
KCM
Connector accessories
B-128
Upper
Lower
Multi-connector with 17-18 keys 220D-44B-208
Multi-connector with 6-7 keys AB19/21 excluded 220D-40/44B-207
Counters for Display of High-speed
Addition and Subtraction
Maximum operating speed
KCH-B
Electronic
Counters
KCH-B
switches to write settings
20kHz
Used in industrial machinery, end-measuring devices,
and the like, this electronic counter is exclusively for
display. It is used to display items like movement
distances for tables, the length of an item being
tested, and thickness.
KCV
KCH-B6RN
Merits
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Displays dual + and - zone values.
It comes equipped to write offset values. When measuring
object length, height, or the like, values for start points with
which you can set threshold at any value (+ values only).
Input format is for both 90 phase differential input and
addition/subtraction input.
A built in DC power supply is provided for proximity sensor
and encoder.
Applicable for either wall-mounting or panel-cut-mounting.
Application examples
KCY
KCN-T
Positional display for the cutting block of a lathe
Movement of the cutting block is retrieved as pulses from a rotary
encoder connected to the motor. These pulses are used for
counting/display with the counter for addition and subtraction
display and indicate the position of the cutting block.
+1958
KCH-B
KCX
+
Numerically
set position
Wiring (5-digit) with external digital
Digit output
Bit input
1
2
4
C
8
1st 2nd
digit digit
COM 1
3rd
digit
4th
digit
Digital switches (BCD) 5
Diodes 20
5th
digit
COM 2
COM 3
COM 4
COM 5
1
2
4
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KCH-B
External Relay Configuration Diagram to write settings
KCM
This counter can also be used in other machines like milling
machines and drill presses for display of the table position,
display of cutting width for shearing machines, and to display
length and thickness for digital micrometers, digital endmeasuring devices, and thickness-measuring devices.
KCX-RN
Rotary encoder
B-129
Electronic
Counters
KCH-B
Specifications
Model number
KCH-B4RN
KCH-B6RN
Number of digits
4-digit
6-digit
Maximum operational speed
Input resistance
KCV
Counting input
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
Writing-directed input
Input format
6k
6
16V
Addition/subtraction signal or dual-phase (90 ) signal
Input pulse amplitude
"1"
"0"
Responsiveness
Ondelay duration: less than 0.2 ms
Offdelay duration: less than 0.2 ms
Input resistance
6k
Digit output
Setting input
25
25
6
s
s
16V
Written (last 4 digits) as writing-directed input
for digital switch connection
Bit input
Responsiveness
Ondelay duration: less than 5 ms
Offdelay duration: less than 1 ms
Input resistance
6k
External reset
Power source reset
20kHz
Duration of power
source interruption
Reset duration
6
16V
Must be less than 0.2 s
Less than 0.2 s (the duration of count inoperability while power is supplied)
Sensor power source
DC +12 V 100 mA below 3% (ripple/effective values)
Withstand voltage
AC1500 V 1 minute between ground and power source terminals
Vibration resistance
Conforms to JIS C 0911
Insulation resistance
DC500 V more than 20 M
Source voltage
AC100V(90 132V)
AC200/220V(180 264V)
Lifetime
No output circuit, so not specified in particular
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
20
70
Ambient humidity/storage humidity 35
85
Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
between ground and power source terminals
50/60 Hz approx. 12 VA
(with no freezing)
RH (with no dewing)
Weight
Approx. 1 kg
Accessories
Metal fittings for installation, card edge connector
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
With writing directions, send a signal of more than 1 ms to write-directed terminals.
B-130
Written (last 5 digits) as writing-directed input
for digital switch connection
Wiring example
Sending signals to count input terminals
Photoelectric sensor
Proximity switch
Black
(blue)
Photoelectric sensor A
Proximity switch A
For addition and subtraction input, terminal 2 (INA) is for
addition input and terminal 3 (INB) is for subtraction input. For
90o phase differential input, a signal input in terminal 3 (INB) that
proceeded a 90 phase via terminal 2 (INA) is added. When this
order is reversed, the signal is subtracted.
When an addition input signal and subtraction input signal are
added at the same time, a miscount occurs, so have a time
difference of at least 50 s for timing of the rising edge of the
Red Green White
(green)
Black
Photoelectric sensor B
Proximity switch B
Sending signals to reset input terminals
DC signal (general)
E
Relay signal
12V
R
R
12V
DC output signal
5.6k
addition input signal and subtraction input signal.
It starts counting in 0.2s or more after power up.
Applying a voltage +6 to +16V onto write-command terminal
will display the value that is set with the external setting
Switch,
relay, etc.
c
b
e
Sending signals to write-command
input terminals
device.
When resetting the display, push the reset button, apply voltage
of a voltage +6 to +16 V to terminal 6 or interrupt the power
E
KCV
White
(black)
Red
rown)
IN B
KCN-A
CH
12V IN A
E
KCN-B
E
IN B
KCN-S/W
12V IN A
Rotary encoder
KCN-T
Connection of terminals
(E) and
(CH) is for addition and
subtraction input; when not connected, the counter is ready for
90 phase differential input.
DC signal (general)
supply for at least 0.2 s.
The POSITION display lamp lights up when sending a 1 input
Relay signal
Write-directed
E
input
Write-directed
input
12V
KCY
Operations
Electronic
Counters
KCH-B
signal to the write command input terminal. In addition, it goes
DC output signal
12V
KCX
out when the counter is reset.
5.6k
b
Switch,
relay, etc.
c
KCX-RN
e
0.2s or less
0.2s or more
ON
Power source OFF
Terminal arrangement
Addition input
Terminal
number
Connection
Terminal
number
1
12V (sensor power source)
12
1st digit
2nd digit
Display values
0
Set writing
values
Reset
(external button pushed)
Write-command
Operations Chart
The chart is for when the input format is dual signal input for
addition/subtraction.
IN A
13
KCH-B
2
3
IN B
14
3rd digit
4
Write command
15
4th digit
5
E (ground)
16
5th digit
6
R (Reset)
17
Not connected
7
Ch (switching)
18
AC 200/220 V power source
8
"1"
19
Not connected
20
AC 100 V power source
21
Not connected
22
AC 0 V power source
9
"2"
10
"4"
11
"8"
Digital switch
digital switches
KCM
Subtraction input
Connection
B-131
Electronic
Counters
KCH-B
External Dimensions
(in mm)
Wall-mounting using a designated
socket (F) Boring dimensions for
installation
Boring dimensions for installation of a
designated socket
F or B
1-5 panel thickness for
embedded installation
4
100
0.2
67
100
100
KCN-A
10
0
72 –0.5
KCV
2-M4,P=0.7
119
9
119
134
160
0
144 -0.5
KCN-S/W
0.2
KCN-B
68 +0.7
0
0
137.8 -0.2
KCN-T
138 +10
Installation Diagram
KCY
Embedded installation
Wall-mounting installation
Exclusive socket (B) use
Socket KF-12A
Metal fittings for installation
Tightening torque of less than 0.5 Nm
Metal fittings for fixture
Socket KB-12-0
Spring washer
KCX-RN
KCX
Spring washer
M4 x 8 screw
M4 x 25 screw
Spring
washer
Multi-connector use
KCH-B
M4 x 25 screw
Metal fittings for installation
Multi-connector
KCM
Tightening torque of less than 0.5 Nm
Metal fittings for connector control
M4 x 12 screw
Spring washer
B-132
Notes:
20
1 It is recommended to use Chuo Musen 120 -B-102 multi22
connector with key for the DIN standard size (72 144mm)
counter.
2 Designate our multi-connector metal fittings when ordering
separately.
3 When ordering the multi-connector connector metal fittings and
screws as one set, designate the kit model number.
100 1 2 W
0.1 0.5 F
Capacitor
C
E
2
KCV
E
1
E
KCN-A
Frame ground
Ground that flows some other large current
Frame
When sending a relay signal for a magnetic relay to a relay
input terminal, a resistor (470
1/2 W) should be provided.
Malfunctions due to poor contact can be prevented and the
degree of reliability will increase further.
Noise prevention circuit
R
C
Other device
Counter
R
KCN-S/W
When a voltage of more than +2 V is applied to the reset
terminal, counting cannot be performed.
Momentarily applying voltage to the reset terminal during
counting or interrupting the power supply may lead to the
resetting of count values.
When the setting value is 0 and a setting device is operated
while the counter is operating, output is produced so avoid
operating a setting device during operation whenever possible.
Changes in settings should be performed with power off or with
external resetting.
When using the counter near a solenoid valve, clutch, brake, or
the like, a capacitor (0.1-0.5 F condenser) aligned with the
driving coil, resistance (100 1/2 W), and a surge absorption
element in a series circuit should be connected to prevent noise.
When the counter's ground and ground wires for other devices
are used in common, the ground wire should be as thick and
short as possible and connected to the housing in at least one
location. The counter's ground wire and other ground lines
flowing other large currents should be differentiated.
KCN-B
Important
Electronic
Counters
KCH-B
12V
Electromagnetic
contact device
KCN-T
The power source transformer has antistatic shielding to
prevent noise, so the G terminal (ground) that is at the drawing
opening for the shielding wire should be connected to the
control panel (housing).
IN
470
1
2
W
E
KCX
KCY
When using the counter in locations with substantial noise,
using shielding wire and avoid wiring the counter's commercial
power source and input/output wiring other than relay output
together with heavy electrical wiring in order to avoid
malfunctions. The shield casing of shielding wires should be
connected to the counter's E terminal (ground) and the housing
with other terminals open.
Sensor
KCX-RN
In addition, a heavy lead wire (better than 0.5 mm2) should be
used for connection to the frame when the sensor and counter
are installed separately in the frames.
KCH-B
Counter
Shielding wire
12V
IN
E
Connected with a
thick lead wire
Frame A
G
KCM
12V
OUT
E
Frame ground
Frame B
B-133
Multi-counter (Maintenance Counters)
The KCM-50 series has 9 counters aggregated into
one unit, while the KCM-51 series has 8 counters
(timers) aggregated into one unit).
These devices can indicate tool replacement for
machining centers, NC industrial machinery, and the
like as well as maintainance periods for multiple tools.
Tool management: Replacement notification/warning
Whetstones for grinding: Maintenance notification
Quantity management: Total counters/preset counters
Time management: Integration timers
KCM-50 series
KCM-51 series
KCM-50/KCM-50-1
KCM-50P/KCM-50P-1
KCM-51/KCM-51-1
KCM-51P/KCM-51P-1
This counter is equipped with 9 units for count
input/presetting/independent alarm output (increased count
output). The counter produces output when an individual unit
reaches set values for equipment halt.
This counter is equipped with 8 units for count
input/presetting/independent alarm output (increased count
output). The counter produces output when an individual unit
(timer) reaches set values for equipment halt.
Open collector output: KCM-51 (Surface sheet in
Japanese)
KCH-B
Open collector output: KCM-50 (Surface sheet in
Japanese)
KCM-50-1 (Surface sheet in
English)
KCM-51-1 (Surface sheet in
English)
KCM
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1/51-1
Voltage output: KCM-50P (Surface sheet in
Japanese)
Voltage output: KCM-51P (Surface sheet in
Japanese)
KCM-50P-1 (Surface sheet in
English)
B-134
KCM-51P-1 (Surface sheet in
English)
KCM-50 series
Basic operations Timing chart
Merits
KCM-50/50-1
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1/51-1
Nine 5-digit preset counters are aggregated into one unit
Current values (count values)
Counter No. 1
Equipment halt settings
KCV
Battery-less
Alarm settings
Independent alarm (preset) output from 9 circuits
Counter input 1
Green Orange
Green Orange
Red
Pre-alarm/alarm display
Color-differentiated display pre-alarm (green)alarm (orange)-equipment halt (red)
The pre-alarm is provided to indicate when alarm values are being
approached.
KCN-A
Pre-alarm settings
Equipment halt display
Alarm output
Equipment halt output
H (OFF)
L (ON)
Reset
(external or key input)
KCN-S/W
Retention of set values and count values is maintenance-free
thanks to use of EEPROM.
Equipment halt output
KCN-B
Over-values are set with respect to set alarm values for individual
counters. Equipment halt (displayed in red) is output whenever a
counter reaches over-values.
KCN-T
These 9 preset counters can also be used as a
total counter
KCY
The counters can be preset (alarm setting) independently to output
preset values (displayed in orange) when counts are input.
Oil-resistant front operation panel
Small (DIN 72 x 72mm)
KCX
The counter's depth is 82 mm, which makes it thin enough for a
control panel.
KCX-RN
Application example: Tool maintenance for
multiaxial industrial
machinery
KCH-B
Processing count input 1
2
9
3
9
KCM
1 2
Equipment halt output
Lamp/buzzer/equipment halt, etc.
Notes 1: Counters 2-9 operate in the same
manner.
2: When counters 1-9 reach a set
value for equipment halt, the
equipment halt output and display
come ON.
Alarm output 1
Alarm output 2
Alarm output 9
B-135
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1/51-1
KCM-51 series
Merits
Basic operations Timing chart
Eight 5-digit preset counters (timers) are
aggregated into one unit
Current values
(count values/time
keeping values)
KCM-51-1/51-1
Counter/timer No. 1
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Setting 1 or 3
Setting 2
Battery-less
Retention of set values and count values is maintenance-free
thanks to use of EEPROM.
Independent alarm (preset) output from 8 circuits
Counter/timer input 1
Green Orange
KCX
KCX-RN
Green Orange
Red
Setting 1/ Setting 2 display
Color-differentiated display for counters (timers)
upon reaching set values
Setting 2 output
OR output
Setting 1 (green)-Setting 2 (orange)- Setting 3 (red)
Reset
(external or key input)
OR output
Output is produced by any of the counters (timers) upon reaching
Setting 1 values or Setting 3 values.
These 8 preset counters can also be used as a
total counter or integrated timer
Use of counter and timer functions can be mixed.
Any counter /timer can be reset with an external
signal.
Oil-resistant front operations panel
Small (DIN 72 x 72)
The counter's depth is 82 mm, which makes it thin enough for a
control panel.
Application example: Tool maintenance for
multiaxial industrial
machinery
Processing count input
Timekeeping input 1
2
KCH-B
Setting 1
1 2
8
3
8
Notes 1: Counters/timers 2-8 operate in
the same manner.
2: When counters (timers) 1-8 reach
Setting 1(Setting 3), the OR
output comes ON.
B-136
Lamp/buzzer/equipment halt, etc.
KCM
OR output
Setting 2 output 1
Setting 1 output 2
Setting 2/output 8
H (OFF)
L (ON)
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1
Front Panel Layout and Description
Count-up display (green-orange-red)
Key
Current value display
Displays pre-alarm/alarm
equipment halt if present in
Setup mode. When no displays are
lit, the counter is in Run mode.
Displays the current value of the
counter displayed by Counter No.
In Run mode, zeroes for higher
digits are not lit.
Set value display
Counter No. display
Displays the set value (alarm,
pre-alarm, or equipment halt)
of the counter displayed by
Counter No.
In Run mode, zeroes for higher
digits are not lit.
Key (Digit Selection Key)
Used for selection of digits during set value input.
5th digit 4th digit
1st digit
In Run mode, unused counters are not displayed.
The selected digit flickers.
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display
will automatically advance.
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the
display will automatically advance.
MODE
Key
Key (Value Advancement Key)
Switches between Run mode and Setting modes.
The number of the digit selected is advanced with this key.
Setting modes
Run
KCH-B
Switches the counter's Current value display and Set value display.
1
2
3
8
9
Alarm
Pre-alarm
0
1
2
8
9
Equipment halt
When no key input continues for longer than 1 minute, the
display automatically switches to Run mode.
KCX-RN
Key
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the
display will automatically advance.
SET
Key
This key sets values as set in memory in
Setting mode. Once set, a portion of the
Set value display will blink 3 times, which
represents input.
B-137
KCM
CNT
No.
KCX
Displays the selected Counter No.
When counters are counting up
(set alarm values), this display
switches to the Counter No. with
an increased count.
KCN-S/W
Mode display
KCN-B
Displays counters that have reached equipment halt settings.
KCN-A
Equipment halt display (red)
KCN-T
Resets values currently displayed.
When multiple counters are counting up, operating Reset
switches to the next counter display.
KCY
Reset
KCV
Green: Represents reaching prealarm set values.
Orange: Represents reaching alarm set values.
Red: Represents reaching equipment halt settings.
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1
Input and Output/Specifications
DC24V
IN COM
Block Diagram
KCM-50
Count input
Increased count display
Equipment halt display
5V
1
1
2
Power source
circuit
0V COM
2
Equipment halt output
3
Alarm output 1
Current value display
4
2
Count No
5
Display
3
Set value display
4
6
5
KCV
7
OR
8
9
Operational speed switching input
Count No. selection input
7
Preset counter
9
8
9
KCN-A
CH
OUT COM
DC24V
DC24V
IN COM
Count input
Increased count display
Equipment halt display
1
Power source
circuit
CPU normal
Alarm output 1
Current value display
4
2
Count No.
5
3
Set value display
Display
4
6
5
KCN-T
KCN-B
7
9
KCY
Count No. selection input
7
Preset counter
9
8
Reset input
9
Run output
CPU normal
OUT COM
Explanation of functions
Specifications
Regardless of Run mode/Setting mode, the current values of the
counter are added (+1). Current values proceed from
H L, L H, and L H (positive logic).
Operational speed
switching input
OFF 30Hz
ON 500Hz
1, 2, 3,
8, 9, 10,
15, 16, 17
Alarm output
1 9
Output when set alarm values are reached with independent output
for counter Nos. 1-9.
4
Equipment halt output Output when equipment halt settings are reached with output for any counter from Nos. 1-9.
11
Run output
ON for CPU normal/OFF for CPU abnormal
Count No.
display
Displays the Counter No. selected via the Counter No. selection key or
external counter no. selection input. Switches to the Counter No. (in order
of preference) with an increased count when counters are counting up.
Order of preference: Equipment halt alarm pre-alarm
18
26
KCX
Operational speed switching input
6
5-digit, 3-stage
CH
5, 6, 7,
Count input
12, 13, 14,
1 9
19, 20, 21
25
KCH-B
KCX-RN
OR
8
I/O
KCM-50
5V
24V
Alarm output
Equipment halt output
Run output
KCM
Input
OUT COM
0 V COM Max. DC45 V/0.1 A
3.3k
5V
Input circuit
2.2k
Input
B-138
Output circuit
KCM-50P
Input voltage
(Positive logic) ON: 0-6 V
OFF: Input open
(Negative logic) ON: 16-27.6 V
OFF: 0-6 V
Input resistance: 2.2 k
Duration of input response:
30ms 30Hz
10ms 500Hz
Notes 1: IN COM and 24 V are connected
internally to the counter.
2: OUT COM and 0 V COM are
connected internally to the counter.
24V
OUT COM
IN COM
KCM-50
Input voltage ON: 0-3 V
OFF: more than 16 V
Input resistance: 3.3 k
Response duration ON : After power supply less than 1.5 s
OFF: After abnormality sensing less than 10 ms
Output circuit
IN COM
KCM-50P
Operational speed
30/500Hz
Switching with
source ON edge
Ondelay:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Counter selection input
Count No.
30ms
Counter No. advances with H L and L H (positive logic).
Offdelay:
selection input
In Run mode, unused counters are not selected.
30ms
Ondelay:
Current values of the counter specified by Counter No. are reset.
0.1s
Reset input
When input for Counter No. selection and reset are input together within
Offdelay:
approx. a 5-seoncd interval, all counters are reset.
0.1s
Input circuit
10
0V COM
2
3
Terminal number
10
24V
5V
1
2
1 Positive logic
2 Negative logic
DC24V
15
Or
2
KCN-S/W
Run output
CPU normal
0V COM
KCM-50P
6
5-digit, 3-stage
Reset input
1
10
24V
Alarm output
Equipment halt output
Run output
Note: OUT COM and 24 V are connected
internally to the counter.
Electronic
Counters
KCM-51-1
Front Panel Layout and Description
Count-up display (green-orange-red)
KCV
Green: Represents reaching Setting 1 values.
Orange: Represents reaching Setting 2 values.
Red: Represents reaching Setting 3.
Key
Mode display
Current value display
Displays Setting 1/Setting 2/Setting
3 if present in Setup mode. When
no displays are lit, the counter is in
Run mode.
KCN-T
Displays the current value of the
counter/timer displayed by Counter
/timer No. In Run mode, zeroes for
higher digits are not lit.
Set value display
C/T No. display
Displays the set value (Setting 1,
Setting 2, or Setting 3) of the
counter/timer displayed by Counter
/timer No. In Run mode, zeroes for
higher digits are not lit.
KCX
Displays the selected Counter/
timer No.
When counters/timers are counting
up (Setting 2), this display switches
to the Counter/Timer No. with an
increased count.
KCN-S/W
Differentiates timekeeping units by color for display during timer operation.
Green: Seconds
Orange: Minutes
Red: Hours
KCN-B
Resets values currently displayed.
When multiple counters are counting up, operating Reset
switches to the next counter display.
KCN-A
Timekeeping unit display (red)
KCY
Reset
Key (Digit Selection Key)
Switches the counter's Current value display and Set value display.
1
2
3
8
Used for selection of digits during set value input.
5th digit 4th digit
1st digit
In Run mode, unused counters/timers are not displayed.
The selected digit blinks.
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the display
will automatically advance.
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the
display will automatically advance.
Key (Value Advancement Key)
MODE
KCX-RN
Key
KCH-B
C/T
No.
Key
0
1
2
KCM
The number of the digit selected is advanced with this key.
Switches between Run mode and Setting modes.
8
Setting modes
Run
Setting 1
Setting 2
Setting 3
Continue to push this key for more than 1 second and the
display will automatically advance.
When no key input continues for longer than 1 minute, the
display automatically switches to Run mode.
SET
Key
This key sets values as set in memory in
Setting mode. Once set, a portion of the
Set value display will blink 3 times, which
represents input.
B-139
Electronic
Counters
KCM-51-1
Input and Output
Functions/
Specifications
1
or
2
DC24V
15
DC24V
IN COM
Increased count/time display
1
2
Block Diagram
KCM-51-1
0V COM
2
OR output
3
4
Power source
circuit
5V
1
C/T input
Count No. 1
Current value display
C
5
2
T No
Display
3
Set value display
4
6
5
KCV
7
OR
8
C/T No. Selection
5-digit, 3-stage
7
B1
Preset counter x 8
(timers)
8
BA
KCN-A
Run output
CPU normal
Reset input
OUT COM
3
Or
4
KCM-51P-1
6
B0
B2
1 Positive logic input
2 Negative logic input
DC24V
DC24V
IN COM
KCN-S/W
Increased count/time display
Timer display
1
0V COM
2
OR output
3
4
Setting 2 output 1
Current value display
C
5
2
T No
Display
3
Set value display
6
4
7
5
OR
KCN-B
8
C/T No. Selection B0
B1
B2
KCN-T
KCY
KCX
KCX-RN
KCH-B
KCM
6
5-digit, 3-stage
7
Preset counter x 8
(timers)
8
Total C/T No. selection BA BA
I/O
15
15
24V
Power source
circuit
5V
1
2
Terminal number
DC24V
15
C/T input
3 Positive logic input
4 Negative logic input
15
24V
Timer display
Run output
CPU normal
Reset input
OUT COM
Explanation of functions
Specifications
Regardless of Run mode/Setting mode, the count (timekeeping)
of the counter (timer) is performed.
When used as a counter, current values proceed from
OFF ON
Operational speed
30 cps/500 cps
Min. pulse amplitude
16.6 ms/1 ms
5
6
7
12
13
14
19
20
C/T input
1 8
21, 26, 27
C/T No.
Selection input
Specifies 3 inputs (B0, B1, and B2) for the counter/timer No.
that is to be reset.
18
C/T No.
Selection input
Input is ON when during reset input for all timers and counters to
be selected.
25
Reset
Current values of the selected Counter/timer No. become 0.
1, 2, 3,
8, 9, 10,
15, 16
Setting 2 output
1 8
Output when Setting 2 values are reached with output for any
counter/timer from Nos. 1-8.
4
OR output
11
Run output
ON for CPU normal/OFF for CPU abnormal.
Counter/timer
No. display
Displays the Counter/timer No. selected via the Counter/timer
No. selection key or external C/T No. selection input.
When used as a timer, timing starts
OFF ON.
Timekeeping is continuous when ON.
Timing is halted with ON OFF.
Timekeeping range
Hours 1-99999 hrs
Minutes 1-99999 mins
Seconds 1-99999 s
Input voltage
(Negative logic)
ON: 0-6 V
OFF: Input open
(Positive logic)
ON: 16-27.6 V
OFF: 0-6 V
Input resistance:
2.2 k
Ondelay: 30 ms
Offdelay: 30 ms
Duration of input response:
30 ms (30-Hz timer)
Output when Setting 1 (Setting 3) values are reached with output 10 ms(500 Hz)
for any counter/timer from Nos. 1-8
Response duration ON: After power supply less than 1.5 s
OFF: After abnormality sensing less than 10 ms
Default settings: Pressing the Mode key and + key at the same time has the counter enter Default Setting Mode, and default setting of the following data is performed.1)Counter/timer selection
2)Setting of operational speed/timekeeping units 3)Selection of Reset key disable or enable 4)Set value selection with respect to OR output (Setting 1 or Setting 3)
KCM-51-1/51P-1: Input circuit
KCM-51-1: Output circuit
5V
IN COM
Input
2.2k
B-140
0V COM
KCM-51P-1: Output circuit
Setting 2 output
OR output/Run output
Open collector
24V
OUT COM
Voltage output
Setting 2 output
OR output/Run output
OUT COM
Notes 1: Input common 0 V: Positive logic
24 V: Negative logic
2: Output common
KCM-51-1: 0 V and internally short-circuited
KCM-51P-1: 24 V and internally short-circuited
70
(with no freezing)
85%RH(with no dewing)
Withstand voltage
AC500V 50/60 Hz 1 minute (uncharged metallic portion
exposed to charged portion and external portion)
Noise resistance
Between power source terminals: 1 kV (pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns)
Between input terminals: 500 kV (pulse amplitude 1 s rise 1 ns)
Vibration resistance
No malfunction: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
Durability: displacement amplitude 0.75 mm 10-55 Hz along three axes
Impact resistance 98m/s2 along three axes
Munsell N-4 (dark gray) ABS material
7
4
5
6
RUN
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
0V
OUT
+24V COM COM
IN
CH COM
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3 OR output 1
2
3
Setting 1/3
Setting 2 output
C/T input
350g
Weight
6
7
8
9 Operational 7
8
9
Predicted output speed
Count input
Insulation resistance more than 100 M DC500 V 1 minute between power source and input terminals
Case packing
5
Model numbers
Model number
KCM-50
KCM-50-1
KCM-50P
KCM-50P-1
4
5
6
RUN
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
7
8 N.C
Setting 2 output
BA
7
8
B0
C/T input
C/T No. Selection input
IN
B1 B2 COM
0V
OUT
+24V COM COM
22
25
23
24
26
27
28
KCM-51
KCV
20
45
4
KCN-A
Ambient humidity/
storage humidity
3
Counter
No.
Storage temperature
55
2
3 Equipment 1
2
3
halt
Predicted output
Count input
5W
10
2
1
Reset
Power consumption
Ambient temperature
1
KCN-S/W
KCM-50 Series
Source voltage DC 24 V 15% (20.4-27.6 V)
KCM-50-1: DC 24 V 10% (21.6-26.4 V)
KCN-B
Specification
Reset
Item
Terminal arrangement (names and functions)
KCN-T
General Specifications (Common to KCM-50-1/51-1 Series)
Electronic
Counters
KCM-50-1/51-1
KCM-51-1
KCM-51P
KCY
(Accessories)
Metal fittings for installation
KCM-51P-1
External Dimensions
KCX
(in mm)
Installation panel thickness 1-5
75
3rd
KCX-RN
Boring dimensions
Metal fittings for installation
+0.5
68 –0
COUNT
SET
67.4
MODE
1st
72
C/T No.
+0.5
68 –0
RESET
2nd
SET
Square hole
9
65
17.5
67.4
KCM
72
KCH-B
MODE
75
3rd
C/T
No.
B-141
Electronic
Counters
Products Related to Electronic Counters
Model number
Appearance
Applicable countents
External dimensions
KCV
100
22 20 18 17 16
0.2
15 14 13 12 11
60
0.2
84
Sockets for wall surface mounting
119
6 5 4 3 2 1
KCX
KCX-B
KF-03
100
21
4.5Hole
KCH-B
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
72
KCX-RN not
included.
8
23
5 4 3 2 1
2– 4.5Hole
2–
KCN-A
6.5
3-M4. P=0.7
10 9 8 7 6
KF-12A
7
6
20
22
5
4
2–
4.5Hole
KCN-B
KF-04
KCY
9
3
10 11
1
26
60
KCN-S/W
Selecting Socket
2
48
KCN-T
6.5
28
23
KCH-B
80
4.5 Hole
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 20 22
119
1 2 3
4
5 6 7
32
84
Sockets for flush mounting
KCX
KCY
2-
KCX
KCX-B
KB-03
2-M3 Hole
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4.5
22
72
4 5 6 7 8
47
KCX-RN
0.2
100
KB-12-0
6 7 8 9 10
21 0.2
1 2 3 4 5
KB-04
3
KCH-B
KCY
9
2 1 11 10
45
31
KCX-RN not
included.
KCX
KCX-B
57
KCX-RN not
included.
0.2
61
1.5
10
0.2
KCH-B
7.5
94
7.5
18.3
Multi-purpose connector
with keys(120-20
22 )manufactured by Chuo Musen)
Support metals
Screws
External dimensions
6.3
Connectors for
flush mounting
B-142
KA-12
Connector
Support metals
Screws
Applicable counters
7
13
KA-01
Contents
18
21
KCM
Kit model number
Electronic
Counters
Products Related to Electronic Counters
CPG-22
Clock-pulse generator CPG-22
Pulse generation
Power source
Electronic counter Output
CPG-22
24V
E
Specifications
CPG-22
Model number
The clock-pulse generator (1 Hz, 10 Hz, and 100 Hz)
provides high-precision digital control using a liquid crystal
oscillator. It can be used as a high-precision timer in
combination with preset counters like KCX.
Output
10Hz
100Hz
Reset input
Power source
Output
resistance
Output
duration
Output
resistance
Output
duration
Output
resistance
Output
duration
Input
resistance
IResponsiveness
Approx. 1.5
(6-9 V)
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 1.5
KCN-T
1Hz
(6-9 V)
Approx. 50 ms
Approx. 1.5
(6-9 V)
Approx. 5 ms
KCY
Operation
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
DC12
KCN-A
The clock-pulse-generator provides the pulse which you can use for application
requiring high-precision timer for a long period.
Approx. 24
Less than 1 ms min. pulse amplitude of 5 ms
DC 12/24 V common (DC 10-30 V)
Storage temperature
10
50
20
70
Ambient humidity/
storage humidity
35
Accessories
None
(with no freezing)
RH (with no dewing)
Terminal arrangement
Socket (F)
KCH-B
External Dimensions (in mm)
85
KCX-RN
Ambient temperature
KCX
Consumption current 30mA
KF-02
2
100Hz output
4.5hole
10Hz output
3
4 5
2
1 8
50
80
8.5
40
0.2
50
19
23
E
6
1Hz output
7
Reset imput
KCM
60
80
80
108
4
Power source
input
(DC10 30V)
B-143
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
Products Related to Electronic Counters
Pulse Generator FG-01
The pulse generator converts the ON/OFF output of E-01Z
(PLC, Add/sub. counter module) to a pulse train for pulsemotor application.
The Generator has voltage output to allow high-speed control of
DC sensor motors and inverter motors.
Settings like low speeds, high speeds, timing related to addition
and subtraction, and DC voltage output can be set in a broad
range via volume on the front panel.
Count output can be switched between positive and negative
logic to allow connection to different types of counters.
Specifications
Item
KCN-T
KCY
Specification
Source voltage
AC90
High-speed 1
50
High-speed 2
100
Low-speed
15
2000Hz
Timing related to addition
and subtraction
30
300ms
directional input
Count mode selection input
264V 50/60Hz 5VA
3500Hz
9000Hz
Changed via
volume
1000Hz
CW/CCW pulse output
5 V positive logic/output current 30 mA/pulse
amplitude 50 s
CW/CCW count output
Open collector output current 30 mA
Pulse amplitude 50 s (possible to switch
between positive and negative logic)
directional input
Reduced speed input
High-speed selection input
Count mode selection input
10
1K
9 V 10 mA Max. (can be changed with volume)
Storage temperature
KCX
180
ON voltage less than 1.5 V
OFF voltage more than 8 V
ON current 10 mA
High-speed selection input
Ambient temperature
KCX-RN
132V
Negative logic input
Reduced speed output
DC output
0
50
20
70
(with no freezing)
Ambient humidity/
storage humidity
35
Accessories
Metal fittings for installation
85
RH(with no dewing)
Drive input with an open collector.
directional input
directional input
Reduced speed
input
KCH-B
FG-01
High-speed
selection input
CW CCW pulse output
(Output for a pulse motor driver)
10
5
CW pulse output
CW CCW count output
(Output for a counter)
KCM
CCW pulse output
CW count output
CCW count output
10
CW
CCW output
Voltage output
(+9 V Max.)
Voltage output is for positive output only; negative voltage is not output.
CW/CCW count output can be switched between positive logic and negative logic.
When direction input is entered, switching to high-speed selection input is not possible.
B-144
470
When using positive logic,
pull up with resistance.
Electronic
Counters
Selecting socket
FG-01
Terminal arrangement
Terminal
number
Explanation
With this input, CW/CCW pulse
1
Directional
outputs and count outputs are
input
2
produced.
Input common terminal
5
Count mode
selection input
6
High-speed
selection input
Allows switching of positive logic
of count output.
H: negative logic/L: positive logic
Allows selection of high speed 1
and high speed 2.
H: high speed 1/L: high speed 2
7
Voltage output
Voltage output corresponding
to the pulse frequency.
8
CW
CCW
Pulse
output
Output to a pulse motor driver.
9
10
CW
11
CCW
Count
output
Output to a counter for pulse
setting.
12
AC180
13
AC90
14
AC0V
KCN-A
0V
KCN-S/W
4
KCN-A
With this input, high-speed
changes to low-speed.
3
Reduced speed
input
264V
AC source input
KCN-B
132V
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
The FG-01's external dimensions and exclusive socket are
the same as those of the KCX Series counters.
Refer to page B-117.
B-145
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
MEMO
B-146
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCN-A
Electronic
Counters
MEMO
B-147
KCM
KCH-B
KCX-RN
KCX
KCY
KCN-T
KCN-B
KCN-S/W
KCN-A
KCV
Electronic
Counters
MEMO
B-148
DIGITAL
TACHOMETERS
How the tachometers work
TC-V Series
TC Series List of Digital tachometers
Eight measurement modes and examples
Merits
Measurement mode
TC-61
TC-6
TC-4L-G/H
TC-41
TC-4
TC-4A
TC-4B
TC-4S/TC-4W
Wiring
Recommended applications
C-1
C-2
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-17
C-19
C-24
C-27
C-29
C-33
C-36
C-38
C-40
C-42
C-43
How the tachometers work
There are two operation principles for measuring revolutional movement.
The KOYO tachometers use the cycle period.
Pulse count
Based on the pulse input from the detector, the tachometer calculates and displays the number of
revolutions per minute (rpm). Using the prescale, it converts the number of revolutions to a
speed then displays the value.
To ensure precision, measurement time or input pulse should be increased.
1 Sec.
Cycle period
The tachometer calculates the number of revolutions (rpm) by multiplying the inverse of the cycle
period (in seconds) by 60 as follows:
1
60 (rpm)
cycle period (in seconds)
The lower the speed is, the more precisely it is measured.
Measurement range: 1 to 9999 pulse cycles/revolution
(On TC-4L model, only 1 or 10 cycles/revolution can be
1cycle period
selected.)
Number of revolutions (rpm)
C-1
Digital Tachometers
This tachometer is provided with a large display
that is easy to read in a small DIN 48 body.
Bright character display is with a large red LED and
a character height of 10 mm, which makes it easy to
read from a distance and at an angle.
In addition, a green LED is used for preset values to
differentiate from measurement values.
Setting of preset values to 0 settings with individual
setting keys for digits has the feel of digital switches, and operation is simple.
Basic function settings are made with digital switches; detailed settings are selected with digit keys,
so operation is easy.
Merits
CE Marking complied
Key protection to lock keys individually
Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent
a malfunction or tampering.
Battery-less memory retention
EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there
is no need for battery maintenance.
Removable terminals
Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can
be removed. After wiring, the terminal cover provides
a safe surface for worry-free use.
Prescaling
Prescaling that can convert the speed and flow for the
speed of revolution into units of time for the workload
is provided.
Stable display
Time settings can be made during measurement to
stabilize the display when high speeds are used.You
can choose 0.2/0.5/1.0/2.0s
High-speed response
The measurement input for this class complies with high
speeds at 20 kcps.
Free power source for the AC type
The source voltage for the AC type covers from AC85264 V; the power source cannot be selected.
High precision
Cycle measurement is used in measurement format to
obtain a high degree of precision at low speeds.
IP65 Protective structure
The front cover panel uses sheet keys, so operation with wet
or dirty hands can be done worry-free. A front cover is also
provided as an option to enhance the protective structure.
Revolution halt is already at 0
Halt determination times that are already displayed as
0 after revolution halt can be selected from
0.2/0.5/1.0/2.0/6.0 s.
Designed in compliance with CE and UL
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
TC-4A
TC-4
TC-41
TC-4L
TC-6
TC-61
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V Series
Equipped with output
A single preset type is also offered. It complies with revolution control.
With zero halt
Unneeded 0s for higher digits are not displayed.
List of Models
Category
Digital
tachometer with
single preset
Digital
tachometer for
dedicated display
Model number system
Sensor Source Voltage
Model Number Number of Digits Source Voltage DC24V 60mA
TC-V6S
Price
TC-V6 -
AC
TC-V6S-C
DC
6
TC-V6
AC
TC-V6-C
DC
Accessories: Installation Frame
C
: DC power
Blank: AC power
S
: Single preset
Blank: Dedicated display
6 : 6-digit
Series Name
C-2
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
General Specifications
Specification
Item
AC power
DC power
Source voltage
AC100
240V
Permitted power fluctuation
AC85
264V
Power consumption
Approx. 11 VA
Sensor power
DC24V (20
Memory Backup
upon Power Failure
EEPROM Writing
Impact resistance
TC-V
28V) 60mA (less than 10%p-p ripple)
Up to 100,000 times
50
20
70
85
35
(with no freezing)
RH (with no dewing)
AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection)
(for the DC type, 0 V, and relay interconnection only)
Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm
No malfunction
Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes
Frequency 10-55 Hz along three axes
Durable
490 m/s2 11 ms along three axes
No malfunction
98 m/s2 11 ms along three axes
Noise resistance
AC power 1.5 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
Protective structure
IP65 (front panel only)
Weight
DC power 1.0 kV between terminals (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
Approx. 150g
Conforming wiring
0.25
Conforming crimped contact
R1.25-3
Permitted torque
0.5Nm
Approx. 110g
1.65mm
2
TC-41
Terminals
TC-6
Durable
Item
Setting
Single with alarm output/without (separate model number)
Number of digits
6 digits
Display
Display of settings: red LED Character height 10 mm
Operational format
Cycle measurement
Set items
Speed of revolution only
Basic setting range
10
999999 rpm (when prescaling is 1)
Prescaling
M
10
9
999999
1
M
999999
0
n
9
0.013% excluding selection of low-speed input (10 Hz) (
0.2
0.5
1.0
0.1% during low-speed input)
2.0s
TC-4S/4W
Setting duration
10
preset settings: green LED character height 7 mm
TC-4B
Category
TC-4A
Specification
Tachometer
Measurement precision
TC-4
Performance Specifications
n
Input logic: Negative logic (no-load input) / Positive logic (load input)
Input
Input resistance: Positive logic 15 k
(AC power)/1.8 k
Negative logic 3.3 k
Inpult voltage:
L
0
3V
H
7
(DC power)
30 V
Setting input response
Max. signal amplitude 5 ms
External reset
No-volt output: NPN open collector output
24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V
*Output
TC-4L
Vibration resistance
Approx. 4 W
TC-61
10
Storage temperature
Withstand voltage
24V
26.4V
Memory Duration 10 years
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
DC12
DC10
Residual voltage less than 1.5 V
Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load)
*Output mode
Compared output / Retained output
Key protection
Setting of arbitrary keys possible
Installation
Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection)
*means that items do not apply to devices for designated display.
C-3
Measurement operations
1) Display of the speed of revolution for one revolution/pulse
The reciprocal ( 1T ) of the IN input cycle (T sec) is multiplied by 60 and displayed as the speed of revolution.
Display
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Pre-revolution
values
1
T2
60rpm
T2
T3
The range for count input 1 P/R is 10
1
T3
60rpm
1
T4
60rpm
T4
999999 rpm during prescaling.
2) Measurement time
This item is used for revolution at high speeds and to stabilize display. Displays the average of a pulse as entered
in the measurement time; when outside the measurement time, the display is updated with each input pulse.
TC-6
TC-61
60rpm
IN
T1
Pulse average in T1
Display
1
T3
Pulse average in T2
60rpm
TC-4L
IN
Measurement time
TC-41
1
T1
T1
Measurement time
T2
Measurement time
T3
Measurement time
Output operations chart (only for devices with output)
Compared output
TC-4A
TC-4
Hold output
Preset values
Preset values
Alarm output
Alarm output
0
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
ON
Reset
OFF
ON
Relay output
OFF
ON
DC output
OFF
ON
Reset
OFF
ON
Relay output
OFF
ON
DC output
OFF
Alarm settings
When alarm settings are 0, DC output is the
same as in output operations for relay output.
Alarm settings should be smaller values than preset values. Performing alarm setting with values that
exceed preset values will result in measurement values of 0; alarm output (DC output) will come ON.
Input single pulse width
Low-speed (10 Hz)
H
H
L
L
50 ms or more
C-4
High-speed (20 Hz)
50 ms or more
25 s or more
25 s or more
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Wiring Diagrams
TC-V6
TC-V6S
Sensor power Measurement input
DC24V60mA
Sensor power
IN
2
3
0V
4
5
Measurement input
DC24V60mA
2
6
IN
0V
3
5
DC output
7
8
9 10 11 12
COM N.C
7
R Reset input
R Reset input
TC-V
1
11 12
N.O
Relay output
AC100 240V power
AC100 240V power
TC-61
OUT
TC-V6-C
TC-V6S-C
Measurement input
IN
0V
IN
0V
3
5
3
5
TC-6
Measurement input
DC output
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
COM N.C
N.O
Relay output
7
R Reset input
R Reset input
11 12
TC-4L
OUT
+
DC12 24V power
DC12 24V power
Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal).
TC-41
Do not connect any of the terminals for the DC input.
AC power
Internal 24 V
3.3k
3
Internal 24 V
ON during negative
logic input
9 N.C.
12
5V
8 COM
1.8k
47k
10 N.O.
IN
3
22k
47k
10 N.O.
5V
7
5V
1.8k
47k
22k
8 COM
22k
3.3k
Reset
input
9 N.C.
TC-4B
5V
11
TC-4A
DC24V
2
ON during negative
logic input
IN
DC power
Reset
input
1 OUT
5 0V
7
TC-4S/4W
Sensor
power
DC24V
TC-4
I/O Circuit Diagrams
47k
22k
1 OUT
5 0V
C-5
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Input Wiring Examples (Measurement input/Reset input)
Proximity switch with NPN open collector output
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output
Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input) (neg)
2
Input logic: Negative logic: (voltage input) (pos)
Sensor source (DC 24V)
Brown
Setting
TC-V
IN
7
Reset
5
0V
TC-61
Black
Blue
IN
7
Reset
5
0V
Blue
Recommended proximity switch: APS
TC-6
3
Black
3
Reset
Black
-
-N
E
DC 2-wire proximity switch
Recommended proximity switch: APS
TC-4L
IN
Green
(black)
White
7
Sensor source (DC 24V)
3
IN
5
0V
Reset
Black
(blue)
Black
5
TC-4
2
White
3
Reset
-E2
Input logic: Arranged with encoder output and set as positive or negative logic
Red
(brown)
Setting
-
Rotary encoder
Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg)
TC-41
Sensor source (DC 24V)
Setting
Black
Reset
0V
Recommended proximity switch: APS - -Z
With the DC type, please supply source voltage above 20 V.
Recommended proximity switch: TRD-J -S
TRD-N -S
Switch or relay
Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg)
Measurement input response: 10 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON)
Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input) (pos)
Measurement input response: 10 Hz (Dip switch 1 ON)
2 Sensor power source (DC 24 V)
TC-4B
TC-4A
2
Brown
Setting
Setting
3
3
IN
Reset
IN
TC-4S/4W
Reset
7
Reset
7 Reset
5
0V
5
0V
There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source.
Output Wiring Examples
NPN open collector output
Relay output
Relay drive possible
OUT 1
0V
Load
Load power
N.C. 9
Load
N.O. 10
Load
5
Load for specified
DC 24 V power source
C-6
COM 8
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Front Panel Layout and Description
Measurement value (red)
Operating mode
Displays measurement values.
Setup mode
Displays setting parameters.
With Single preset
METER
Preset values (green)
Operating mode
Displays preset values.
Setup mode
Displays set items.
OUT
TC-V
Output (red)
Operating mode
Lit when output is ON.
Blinks when alarm
output is ON.
6
4
5
Digit keys
Operating mode
Allows changes in preset values for the operating
mode.
Setup mode
Allows selection of setting parameters.
2
3
1
TC-6
RST
TC-61
K/P
Key protection (red)
Operating mode
Blinks when key protection is ON
(only when the key is ON).
Setup Mode
Displays key protection settings.
RST key
Operating mode
Turns output OFF.
Setup mode
Allows selection of set items.
6
4
5
RST
The Designated Display panel has several lamps
that differ with respect to the Single Preset Counter:
Output display
Protection Display
None
Preset values
Not displayed in Operating mode.
Digit keys
RST keys
Disabled in Operating mode.
2
3
1
TC-4
METER
TC-41
TC-4L
Designated display
1. Changing preset values (Single preset only)
Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one:
0 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Example:
When the counter is preset to
TC-4A
Key Operation
123
Press the 1 key and the display changes to 124
2. Output OFF (Single preset only)
Press the RST key to reset to turn output OFF (Response time
0.1s). When output is ON, pressing the RST key will turn output
OFF.
3. Protecting the keys (Single preset only)
Protection of individual keys can be set with operating keys. When
Key protection is set in Operating mode, pressing a set key will
cause the corresponding LED for the key pushed to blink in order to
indicate that operation has been disabled. As the facfory setup, Key
protection in Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning Dip
switch 7 ON with power supplied will disable all keys.
Press the 3 key and the display changes to 234
METER
TC-4S/4W
After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be
verified after about one second.
TC-4B
Press the 2 key and the display changes to 134
OUT
K/P
6
RST
4
5
2
3
1
C-7
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Configure dip switches
Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode.
Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect.
When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values
Dip switch
ON
TC-V
As the factory setups, all switches are OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TC-61
Selection of the operating mode
Selection of key protection
Selection of halt determination times
Selection of measurement times
Selection of input frequency
TC-6
Input frequency
The input frequency is selected with Dip switch 1.
TC-4L
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Input frequency
SW1
10Hz
ON
20kHz
OFF
Factory setup
Measurement times
TC-41
The measurement times are selected with Dip switches 2 and 3.
ON
TC-4
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
With the cycle measurement format, the display will
change as pulses are input, and the display may
vary during high revolutions.
Measurement times
SW2
SW3
0.2s
OFF
OFF
0.5s
OFF
ON
1.0s
ON
OFF
The average of the pulse input in the measure-
2.0s
ON
ON
ment time can be displayed with setting of the
measurement time to stabilize the display during
Factory
setup
high revolutions.
Halt determination times
TC-4A
The halt determination times are selected with Dip switches 4, 5, and 6.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TC-4B
OFF
Suspension determination times
SW4
SW5
SW6
6.0s(10)
OFF
OFF
OFF
2.0s(30)
OFF
OFF
ON
1.0s(60)
OFF
ON
OFF
0.5s(120)
OFF
ON
ON
function will display 0.
When setting the halt determination
time at 1 P/R to 0.2 s, be aware that the
0.2s(300)
ON
OFF
OFF
maximum revolutions will be 300 rpm.
Factory
setup
After the halt determination time is set
once measurement input is OFF, the
Items in parentheses are maximum revolutions for 1 P/R.
TC-4S/4W
Key protection
With Dip switch 7, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using [Protect keys]. Setting
for keys to protect can performed in Setup mode. As the factory setups, [Do not protect keys] is set.
Key protection
ON
OFF
Settings in Setup
mode take effect
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Do not
SW7
ON
OFF
With the Designated display type, this should be OFF.
Factory setup
Operating mode
The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8.
ON
OFF
C-8
Operating mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW8
Setup mode
ON
Run mode
OFF
Factory setup
Setup Mode
Selection is with the digit key.
Digit key: Displays measurement values.
Digit key: Displays measurement values.
1 Selects retained output.
2 Selects compared output.*
1
2
Decimal point settings (d. p)
Press the Reset key to proceed.
The display position of the decimal point is set
with the digit key. The decimal place is displayed in accordance with the digit key. Digit key
1 will set no decimal place (*No decimal point).
Measurement
values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1
RST
Press the Reset key to proceed.
a
Setting is with the digit key. (*0)
Alarm output settings (set
)
RST
Reset key protection
(rpro)
Setup mode
Measurement
values for display 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Digit key 6 5 4 3 2 1
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Selection of disable or enable to set
the Reset key is with the digit key.
Digit key: for K/P display
RST
Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start the Run mode.
Digit key protection
2. Operations in Setup mode
(ppro)
*Represents the factory setup.
Selection of prescaling values is with
the digit key. (*1 )
RST
Displays measurement values
1
Digit keys 6 5 4 3 2 1
Settings of 1
RST
Prescaling settings 2
(scL2)
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Digit key: Displays measurement values.
1 The exponent will be 1.
Settings of 0 9 are possible.
RST
Press the Reset key to proceed.
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Digit key
K/P display
Not used
1
Disabled with lamp on
1
Enabled with lamp off
Used
999999 are possible.
Selection of prescaling exponents is
with the digit key. (*0 )
Selection of disable or enable to set
the Reset key is with the digit key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
follows:
(scL1)
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Digit key: for K/P display
In Setup mode, the settings can be initialized using the menu as
Prescaling settings 1
(*disabled)
(enabled)
1
2
Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the Setup mode.
• With the Designated display tachometer, items marked with an are skipped.
• Setting parameters are rendered effective by pressing the Reset key and
proceeding to the next step.
• Key protection settings are rendered effective with Dip switch 7 as well as an
AND condition. To begin protection, turn Dip switch 7 ON.
Operational Example
TC-4S/4W
Run mode
Changing preset values
1. Change the preset value from 120 to 240.
Change complete
Before changing
METER
METER
METER
OUT
OUT
OUT
K/P
K/P
K/P
6
RST
4
5
2
3
6
1
RST
4
5
2
3
Press Digit key 2 twice.
METER
OUT
K/P
6
1
TC-61
RST
TC-V
Selection is with the digit key.
TC-6
Output mode settings (c-op)
Press the Reset key to proceed.
TC-4L
RST
1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode
Run mode
pos Selects positive logic.
neg Selects negative logic.*
1
2
TC-41
Prescaling values (10 999999) are set.
Positive or negative logic
Compared/Retained
Any digit can be set for display of the decimal
point.
5) Alarm output
Offset values can be set with respect to preset
values.
0 999999
6) Resetting key protection Setting to disable the reset key can be
performed.
7) Protecting digit keys
Setting to disable any digit key can be
performed.
With a Dedicated Display Tachometer, items 3), 5), 6), and 7) are
skipped.
TC-4
1) Prescaling
2) Input logic
3) Output mode
4) Decimal place
-9
TC-4A
Input logic settings (si g)
Items that can be configured in Setup Mode
TC-4B
Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in
Setup mode.
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
RST
4
5
2
3
6
1
RST
4
5
2
3
1
Press Digit key 3 once.
C-9
Setting Example for Display of the Speed of Revolution
When using a rotary encoder for 100 pulses/revolution,
the speed of revolution can be displayed.
A measurement time of 1.0 s will be used to stabilize the display during high revolutions. In addition, the decimal place
will be after the first digit with the half determination time of
1.0 s.
Measurement axis
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
2. Switching to Setup mode
Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON.
3. Changing setting contents
The setting screen for the
Prescaling mantissa is displayed.
TC-V
These values are initial values.
METER
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
OUT
TC-61
K/P
6
RST
2
4
5
3
Rotary encoder
100P/R
1
The setting screen for the
Prescaling exponent is displayed.
TC-41
TC-4L
TC-6
Press the 1 key twice and "-2" is
set.
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
Calculation of prescaling values
With the tachometer, prescaling is 1 for 1 pulse/
revolution.
Accordingly, prescaling for 100P/R is
The setting screen for Input logic
is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
1
100
Press the RST key to proceed.
=0.01
Prescaling setting is done with the exponent and
mantissa such that
0.01
1
The setting screen for Output mode
is displayed.
These values are initial values.
2
10
OUT
K/P
The setting screen for the
Decimal point is displayed.
Set items
TC-4A
TC-4
Press the RST key to proceed.
Set items
Contents
Measurement time
1.0s
Press the 2 key and the decimal
point will be displayed between the
first and second digit.
Press the RST key and the setting parameters will be written.
Halt measurement time
1.0s
Prescaling exponent
1
Prescaling mantissa
2
OUT
K/P
Setting is complete after this step.
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
4. Switching to Run mode
Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup mode
and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode) (When power is OFF,
setting contents from Setup mode are written).
1. Setting the dip switch
Turn OFF the power, then operate the dip switch.
Select the Measurement time of 1.0 s.
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn Dip switch 2 ON
Turn Dip switch 3 OFF
Select the half measurement time of 1.0 s.
ON
OFF
C-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn Dip switch 4 OFF
Turn Dip switch 5 ON
Turn Dip switch 6 OFF
5. Starting Run mode
Be sure to turn power ON after changing settings in Setup
mode and press the RST key to reset count values.
Common Errors
Error
Error Details
Overflow Error
Data to display exceeds the display range.
Underflow Error
The position of data to display drops below
the display range.
Over Input Frequency
Memory Data Error
Corrective Action
Enter measurement values in normal ranges and the
device will automatically recover (review settings for
prescaling and the decimal point).
The input frequency exceeds 20 kHz.
Lower the input frequency.
Preset/set values and Setup mode items
have changed.
Press the Reset key to eliminate the error display.
Measurement values and timekeeping values will be set
to 0, preset and set values will be 5000, and Setup mode
parameters will be set to factory setups.
TC-6
e01
e02
e04
e21
Error Type
TC-61
Error Codes
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Model Number
Details
Rubber Packing
KC-48P
Prevents water from entering the control panel with
installation between the installation panel and TC-V.
Front Cover
KC-48C
TC-41
Option
TC-4L
Option
Protects the front panel from dirt and the like.
Material: Soft silicone rubber
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
TC-4A
TC-4
Key operation can be performed with the front cover as-is.
C-11
TC-61
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
Precautions
Precautions for Wiring
Precautions for Use
(1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal
and the input common
are internally short-circuited.
0-V terminal
(2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the
voltage.
(3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch.
(4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about one
second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key input
takes effect when the count is reset Valid preset valve will be saved in
the memory of loss of power.
(5)It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep the
setups for the future maintenance.
(6) Use in the following environments should be avoided:
TC-6
A location where the ambient temperature is above 50
Keep the wires away from power line.
With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the
KCV counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible.
Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals.
For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended.
When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts
at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation.
Fork-shaped crimped contacts
or below
10 .
A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt
temperature changes may cause condensation.
A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like.
For angled installation, connection with the contact is
insufficient. Like in the illustration above, install the
contact perpendicular to the horizontal.
Round crimped contact
A location exposed to direct sunlight.
A location with significant vibrations or impact.
TC-4L
(7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation resistance, or the like, detach the control circuit from the main body.
(8) When power is interrupted, writing to the internal EEPROM will take
place. The number of times EEPORM writing can be performed is less
TC-41
than 100,000, so avoid use with frequent power source operation.
Installation and Removal of the Main Body
Installation
Installation of the Terminal Block and Terminal Cover
TC-4A
TC-4
Insert the main body through the panel installation port.
TC-4B
From the rear, mount the installation frame.
Main body
Terminal block
TC-4S/4W
Fixing screw
Terminal block cover
Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally.
Removal
Holding the tabs, spread them 2 3 mm.
While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you.
C-12
Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal block during
shipping.
Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm.
Install the terminal block after wiring is complete.
(in mm)
External Dimensions
63
100 (AC power source)
48
60 (DC power source)
Terminal screw
M3
4 7.62
7.62
6.5
1.12
10
DC power source
66mm
AC power source
106mm
TC-6
Depth
5
50
TC-61
44.5
48
Panel thickness 1
6
Detailed Diagram of the Terminal Block
TC-V
Mounting bracket
Boring Dimensions for Installation
1. When the installation handle is
horizontal
30.48
Mounting
bracket
2. When the installation handle is
vertical
48+0.2
0
70 or more
TC-41
55 or more
45+0.3
0
70 or more
Square hole
45+0.3
0
9.5
TC-4L
(Close installation
possible)
6.5
Digital
Tachometers
TC-V
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
TC-4A
TC-4
Complying wiring:
0.25-1.65 mm2
Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3
Permitted torque:
0.5 Nm
C-13
Digital
Tachometers
TC Series
Digital Tachometers
Merits
Prescaling
Based on a preset scale, the tachometer converts the number of revolutions to a distance, volume or production per unit time. The prescale
function is not included in the TC-4L model.
TC-V
TC-61
Precision
Using a sampling technique, the tachometer precisely measures various speeds and cycles of repeated movements
On the TC-41 model, the displayed value is reset to zero if no pulse
is entered for one second. The counter displays the previous value if
it receives no pulse for six seconds.
TC-6
Quick reset (TC-41/TC-61)
TC-4L
List of Digital Tachometers
Signal output
None (Display only)
Analog
Signal input
Digital
Single preset
Dual preset
Open collector
12V
TC-41
Outside TC
TC-4 / TC-6
TC-4A
TC-4B
TC-4S
Mode 1 only
TC-4L
Functions
Pre- Sam- Decimal Error
Mode scalling pling point report
TC-4W
12V
TC-4
8 modes
TC-4A
TC-4B
TC-4S/4W
Analog output
Digital output
TC-4A
Singlie preset
TC-41
Dual preset
TC-4B
TC-4S
OUT 1
mode 1,3,5,8
Any types
of sensors
TC-61
Mode 1 only 4 modes
TC-41
TC-4W
Magnetic sensor
General purpose
inverter
OUT 1
OUT 2
Meter
Display
C
Proximity switch
C
Recorder
Programmable controller
Analog output is effective in Mode 1 only.
C-14
Open collector
DC 2-wire,
Namur or voltage output
Motor with AC tachometer
generator
Digital
Tachometers
TC Series
Measurement examples
Eight measurement modes and examples
m minute
Motor
INB
INA
1m
Using two detectors, the tachometer measures the speed of an object passing through
a certain point. The prescale can be adjusted
to suit the measurement unit.
m Min.
Cycle time
(Mode 3)
Sec.
Cycle time
One cycle of
operation
The tachometer measures the time for an object
to pass through a certain distance.
Rotary
encoder
INA
TC-V
Using the prescale, it converts the number of revolutions to a speed then displays the value.
Speed=number of revolutions 2 r (r is the
radius of the roller in meters.)
INA
TC-61
Speed
Based on the pulse input from the detector,
the tachometer calculates and displays the
number of revolutions per minute (rpm).
TC-6
Detector
INA
Speed
(Mode 1)
Passing speed
(Mode 2)
Number of revolutions
rpm
Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s
Time elapsed: lnfinite
TC-4L
Revolutions
(rpm)
(Mode 1)
Time lag
(Mode 4)
INB
The tachometer measures the time for an
object to move from the detector A to the
detector B. Its speed can be calculated from
the "time lag" between the two sensors and
their distance.
A
INA
Sec.
B
TC-41
Parts feeder
Press
INA
Sec.
bject being
pressed
The tachometer displays the time elapsed
after an action is started. For example, it measures the time after a press is started or a
valve is opened.
TC-4A
Process time
(Mode 5)
Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s
Length
Measurement
cm
INA
The photoelectric sensor generates pulse
when it detects a moving object. The pulse
count is converted to the length by the rotary
encoder, and displayed on the tachometer.
With the prescalling function, the measurement can be converted at a preset scale.
INB
TC-4B
Length
(Mode 6)
TC-4
Cycle measurement range 10ms 140s
Spacing
(Mode 7)
TC-4S/4W
Rotary encoder
Measurement
cm
INA
INB
The tachometer measures and displays the
space between two adjacent objects (in this
case holes). With the prescaling function, the
measurement can be converted at a preset
scale.
Space
between
holes
Rotary encoder
Accumulate
(Mode 8)
Acuumulated value
Proximity
switch
INA
The tachometer totals individual pulse counts.
It can be used also as a preset counter. With
the prescaling function, the measurement can
be converted at a preset scale.
C-15
X1
45 6
45 6
23
23
90 1
23
X10
23
45 6
90 1
23
X1000
45 6
90 1
X 10 -n
Rotary switch
M
X100
45 6
90 1
Prescaled at 555
Sampling
This function is available only in Mode 1.
The tachometer counts the cycle time of a rotating object. Using this
value, it calculates the number of revolutions per minute. When an
object rotates fast, one cycle period becomes too short to allow precise measurement. The tachometer samples a specified number of
cycles and totals all cycle periods. From this total, it then calculates
one cycle period. This averaging technique minimizes errors at high
speeds. The times of sampling can be set to 1, 10 or 100. (Only 1 can
be selected on the TC-4L model.)
Times of sampling: 1
One cycle period
Times of sampling: 10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Ten cycles' period
Times of sampling : 100
TC-V
TC-4
0
TC-4A
78
TC-61
Dip switch
78
Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed
Set the scale in the form of "M 10-n" where M is a 4-digit integer
and n is a number from 0 to 9. Use the leftmost switch to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the value of M. The prescale
can range from 1 10-9 to 9999 10-0=9999.
Prescaling is not available on the TC-4L model.
78
TC-6
Preset a 4-digit value to determine the scale used to calculate values
for display.
To preset a scale, use the five small rotary switches on the rear
panel.
78
TC-4L
Prescaling
78
TC-41
Merits
90 1
Digital
Tachometers
TC Series
100
Hundred cycles' period
Decimal point Selection
For the 4-digit display, you can select the location of the decimal point.
Measurements are displayed to a precision specified by the decimal
point.
No decimal point
To the first digit after the decimal point
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
To the second digit
To the third digit
List of Error Codes
An error code is displayed to indicate
an overflow, prescale error, or other error
as shown on the right.
Error code
Name
Description
e01
Overflow
Measurement has exceeded upper limit.
e02
Underflow
Measurement is smaller than the value
representable by the lowest digit.
e03
Prescale error
The integer part (M) is set to zero.
e04
Overfrequency
Input frequency has exceeded 10 kHz in Mode 1.
Note: The errors E01, E02 and E04 are automatically cleared when the value returns to the allowable range.
C-16
Measurement modes
The following description does not apply to TC-61 and TC-41.
The TC-4L model does not have the input terminal IN B.
Mode 1: Number of revolutions(rpm)
The tachometer calculates the number of revolutions(rpm)by multiplying the inverse of the cycle period(T)of IN A by 60, and displays the result.
When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the previous value.
IN
B
1
T2
60rpm
60rpm
1
T3
60rpm
Retains
1
T3
60rpm
TC-V
A
1
T1
T2
T1
T3
TC-61
IN
Previous
measurement
Measurement range: 10 to 9999 rpm(at input rate=1 pulse/revolution, times of sampling=1, and prescale=1)
Measurement is made for each cycle only if the cycle period is 300 ms or more. If not, the counter waits for at least
one cycle before it restarts measurement. It displays the previous value if no pulse is entered for six seconds.
Mode 2: Passing speed (m/min.)
The tachometer calculates the speed of an object by multiplying the inverse of the value T by 60. T is time elapsed after the sensor IN A turns
ON until the sensor IN B turns ON. The speed is displayed in meters per minute if the distance between the two sensors is 1 m.
A
IN
B
Ta
T1
T: 10 ms
1
T2
60m/min
T2
1
T3
60m/min
Ta
60m/min
TC-4L
IN
1
T1
Previous measurement
T3
TC-41
Display
TC-6
Display
Digital
Tachometers
TC Series
6 seconds. Ta: 30 ms interval between measurements
TC-4
Mode 3: Cycle time (10 ms to 140 s)
IN
A
IN
B
Previous
measurement
T1
Ta
T1
T2
T2
Ta
T3
Retains T3
T3
T4
T4
TC-4B
Display
TC-4A
The tachometer calculates the cycle period (T) of IN A.
It measures every other cycles ranging from 10 ms to 140 seconds.
When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the current value.
TC-4S/4W
Ta: 30 ms interval between measurements
Mode 4: Time lag (10 ms to 140 s)
The tachometer measures the time elapsed after the sensor IN A turns ON until the sensor IN B turns ON.
Allowable measurements range from 10 ms to 140 seconds.
Display
IN
Previous measurement
T2
A
T1
IN
T1
Ta
T2
B
Ta: At least 30 ms interval between measurements
C-17
Digital
Tachometers
TC Series
Mode 5: Process time (10 ms to 140 s)
The tachometer displays the time elapsed after the sensor IN A is activated.
Allowable measurements range from 10 ms to 140 seconds.
When IN B turns ON, the tachometer stops measurement and retains the current value.
TC-6
TC-61
TC-V
Display
IN
A
IN
B
Previous measurement
TC-4L
Ta
T1
T2
T2
T3
Mode 6: Length
Response of IN A: 10k cps
While IN B is ON, the tachometer counts the frequency of pulse pulse entered to IN A.
The value is displayed when IN B turns off. It is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered.
Previous count
Display
IN
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
8
9 10 11
1
2
TC-4
4
5
6
7
0
8
Count in progress
Ta
T
Ta
B
1ms
20ms
Reset
Mode 7: Spacing
Response of IN A: 10k cps
When IN B turns ON, the tachometer counts the frequency of pulse entered to IN A since the last time IN B turned ON.
The value is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered.
Display
TC-4A
3
8
A
T Count in progress
IN
Previous count
1
IN
2
3 4 5
6
11
7 8 9 10 11 1
2
IN
3 4 5
9
6
7 8 9
1
2
0
3 4 5
6
7 8
A
Count in progress
(at least 20 ms)
TC-4B
T3
Ta: At least 30 ms interval between measurements
1
TC-41
T1
Count in progress
(at least 20 ms)
B
TC-4S/4W
Reset
Mode 8: Accumulate
Response of IN A: 10k cps
(150 cps on TC-4S and 4W in One Shot mode)
The tachometer totals and displays pulse counts entered to IN A.
The count is suspended when IN B turns ON.
The displayed value is reset to zero when a reset signal is entered.
Display
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
Count
disable
IN
Reset
C-18
B
6
7
8
9 10 11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TC-61
Digital
Tachometers
TC-61 Designated Display (6-digit) Multi-function Input Timer
TC-V
This unit for designated revolution display is equipped with an input
circuit that complies with all types of devices.
In addition to pre-zeroed display with revolution suspension (1 or 6 s
after revolution suspension), there is only a slight display drift produced
by non-uniform revolution in order to display averages of measurement
values in 1 s. The device has functions for prescaling, sampling, and
decimal point switching.
60 [rpm]
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
General Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Specified voltage
AC100 120V
200 240V
Permitted power fluctuation
AC90 132V
Specified frequency
50
Power consumption
14VA
Withstand voltage
AC2000 V 1 minute between power source
and external terminals
DC500 V more than 20 M 1 minute between
power source and external terminals
Insulation resistance
180 264V
60Hz
Cycle period measurement
Function
Display only or compatible to various inputs
Screen
Red 7-segment LED 6-digit Character height 14.2 mm
Measurement
range
10 600000 rpm 60 600000 rpm (via dip switch switching)
10 ms 140 s 1 999999 count
10
50
Storage temperature
20
70 (with no freezing)
(with no freezing)
4 modes (modes 1, 3, 5, and 8) with switching
Decimal place
With switching function
Prescaling
M 10-n=10-9 9999 1 M 9999 0 n 9 (M and n are integers)
Sampling
1 time, 10 times, and 100 times with switching (mode 1 only)
Terminals
10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.75 mm along three axes
Vibration Durability
resistance No malfunction 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.35 mm along three axes
Durability 300m s2 11ms along three axes
Impact
resistance No malfunction 100m s2 11ms along three axes
Noise resistance
Protective structure
IP40 (front panel only)
0.1 ms (modes 3 and 5) with switching
Conforming wiring
0.5
1.25mm2
Conforming crimped contact
JIS C 2805
Permitted torque
0.6N m
1.25
3 equivalent
Sensor power
DC12 V 10 14 V 50 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise)
Power-on reset
Time power supply is interrupted 0.5 s/Reset time 0.5 s
External dimensions
96W
Weight
Approx. 450 g
48H
105D (mm)
Accessory
Metal fittings for installation
Conforming Detection Devices
(typical examples)
Sensor for voltage output (12 24V)
General-purpose inverter (5V)
TTL (totem pole output 5V)
Namur Output
TC-6
Rear panel screw terminals
35 90%RH (with no dewing)
1 kV pulse amplitude 1 s
rise 1 ns square-wave pulse
Between power source terminals
0.01% (mode 1)/
Operating mode
Specification
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Measurement method
Precision
Environmental Specifications
Item
Specification
Item
Specification
Item
TC-4L
n
Tn
TC-41
Pre-revolution values
TC-4
Display
Tn
Tn measurement
TC-4A
T2
T1
Voltage input 1
Voltage input 2
Namur Input
DC 2-wire proximity switch output
DC2W input
Gear sensor
AC tachogenerator
Magnetic detection input
IN 1
(Switching via
dip switches)
IN 2
When revolutions of an inverter motor are displayed
digitally, the signal for use by an inverter frequency
(tachometer) is connected to a TC-61. However, this signal is not connected for analog signals (voltage or current).
In addition, set the TC-61 to match the output circuit and
signal level when pulse signals are produced.
IN 1 and IN 2 are not used at the same time.
C-19
TC-4B
Operational
input
T1
The figure on the left is for 1 pulse revolution where sampling=1 and
prescaling=1.
When a cycle is more than 1 s, measurement is with each pulse.
When sampling=10 or 100 or when a cycle of 10 or 100 pulses is less
than 1 s, operation is the same as with sampling=1, and cycles
of pulses input in 1 s are measured. In addition, cycles of 10 or 100
pulses are measured when a cycle of 10 or 100 pulses is more than
1 s.
Forced display of 0 is possible via reset input.
1s
Computation
1s
TC-4S/4W
Example
TC-61
Operation
Digital
Tachometers
TC-61
Front/Rear Panel Explanation
Terminals for connection and switches
for settings are located on the front and
rear panels.
Dip switches (9-bit)
Rotary switches
Prescaling
TC-V
123456789
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Dip switches (3-bit)
TC-61
Terminal
Setting Prescaling
23
23
23
23
23
23
90 1
90 1
23
45 6
X1
Setting when prescaling
is not used.
90 1
90 1
23
23
23
90 1
TC-4L
90 1
0
45 6
78
0
45 6
78
TC-41
90 1
X 10
1 as shown below.
78
45 6
78
78
90 1
TC-4
90 1
X 100
90 1
X 1000
45 6
At factory setup, prescaling values are set to 0001 10 -0=1.
Notes:
1. The range of exponent settings (10 -0) is 0 -9.
2. When prescaling is not used, prescaling settings should be at 1 10 -0
0
-n
45 6
78
X 10
45 6
78
Prescaling values can be set as arbitrary 4-digit values from a
minimum of 1 10 -9 to a maximum of 9999 10 -0=9999.
45 6
45 6
78
45 6
prescaling values=display values
78
Measurement values
Rotary switch turned by a screwdriver
78
TC-6
Prescaling is used to display values resulting when measurement
values obtained are multiplied by fixed constants.
0
1
Configure Rear Panel Dip switches
ON
Switching sampling (1 time, 10 times, or 100 times)
Switching the operating mode (4 modes)
Switching the measurement range
Switching the decimal place
Switching frequency
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TC-4A
1
At factory setup, all dip switches are set to OFF.
TC-4B
Switch 1 Switching frequency
ON position 10 Hz common for IN 1 and IN 2 (low-speed)
ON
OFF
OFF position 10 kHz common for IN 1 and IN 2 (high-speed)
1
TC-4S/4W
Switches 2, 3, and 4 Switching the decimal place
ON
OFF
2
3
Switch
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
4
Switch 5 Switching the measurement range
ON
OFF
ON position Displays 0 1 s after suspending revolution 60
600000 rpm*
OFF position Displays 0 6 s after suspending revolution 10
600000 rpm*
When 1 P/R and prescaling=1
5
Switches 6 and 7 Switching the operating mode (4 modes)
ON
Switch
Mode 1
Mode 3
Mode 5
Mode 8
OFF
6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
6
C-20
7
Switch 8 9 Switching sampling
(effective only in mode 1)
ON
Switch
1 time
10 times
8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
9
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Digital
Tachometers
TC-61
100 times Measurement time 1 s
Regardless of the setting of this dip switch, measurement values will
OFF
be for an average of 1 s.
TC-V
9
ON
Switch 1
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Switch 2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Switch 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Namur input
NPN open
collector input
1
2
3
Input mode
Voltage input 1 Voltage input 2
Switching the input mode for IN 1
TC-61
Configure Rear Panel Dip switches
TC-4L
Voltage input 1: Using a voltage output type with the 12 or 24 V power source of a revolution detection device
Voltage input 2: Using a voltage output type with the 5 V power source of a revolution detection device
Namur input: Using a Namur proximity switch
NPN open collector input: Using the NPN open collector output of a revolution detection device
Notes: 1. When a general-purpose inverter is displayed digitally, the connection terminal pulse output of a frequency meter or revolution meter is used, but these specifications may differ among different companies, so verify use with the inverter manufacturer.
2. When inputting with a relay, use the NPN open collector input mode.
3. When operating in modes 3, 5, or 8, use voltage input 1 or 2.
Input Specifications
Input pulse amplitude
Terminal
number
Specification
IN1 IN2 Low-speed
Type
15 k
6
15 k
2.5
30 V
0
TC-41
Input voltage
ResponInput
siveness resistance ON voltage OFF voltage
50 ms or more
4V
IN1 IN2 High-speed
4
IN 1
Open collector input
(DC 2-wire)
IN 2
4
R
Gear sensor,
AC tachogenerator, etc.
Reset input
(open collector)
10 kHz
switching
10 k
30 ms
1k
2
2
0
1.5 V
6
30 V
0
4V
6
30 V
0
4V
50 s or more
50 s or more
with 10 Hz: more than 0.3 V p-p
with 100 Hz: more than 0.3 V p-p
with 1 kHz: more than 2 V p-p
with 10 kHz: more than 20 V p-p
0
4V
10
30 V
TC-4B
3
1k
4
Input for a magnetic
detection device 10 Hz/
3
3.3 k
30 V
TC-4A
Voltage input 2 10 Hz/
(5 V)
10 kHz
Namur input switching
1
50 ms or more
TC-4
Marking
Voltage input 1
(12 24 V)
2
TC-6
8
1 Switching via side panel dip switches.
2 Pulled up to 12 V internally.
3 When using IN2, turn side panel Dip switches 2 and 3 OFF.
TC-4S/4W
4 When the input frequency is more than 10 Hz, turn rear panel Dip switch 1 OFF (10 kHz).
Structure of the input circuit
Namur input
Voltage inputs 1 and 2
Open collector input
12V
12V
IN 1
3.3k
15k
Internal circuit
(photoisolate)
Internal circuit
(photoisolate)
1k
0V
Internal circuit
(photoisolate)
10k
15k
0V
12V
IN 2
IN 1
IN 1
15k
0V
Reset input
Input for a magnetic detection device
0V
Internal circuit
(photoisolate)
Internal
circuit
RESET
1k
0V
C-21
Digital
Tachometers
TC-61
Terminal Connection
1
12V
2
IN 1
3
IN 2
4
R
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Terminal
number
Marking
Explanation
1
12V
DC output for sensor supply
0V
IN1: Voltage inputs 1 and 2, Namur input, and open collector input
IN2: Gear sensor and AC tachogenerator
Note: IN1 and IN2 cannot be used at the same time.
AC100V
TC-61
TC-V
AC200V
Wiring Examples
Complying sensor
Input mode
TC-6
TC-4L
Voltage output type sensor
(mainly the 5 V power supply of a detection
device)
IN 1
Input
3
IN 2
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
Common for input and sensor power
6
Blank
Not connected
7
Blank
Not connected
8
Blank
Not connected
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
Dip switch setting
Source input
Connection diagram
1
Voltage output type sensor (mainly the 12
or 24 V power supply of a detection device)
Voltage output proximity switch or the like
Ex.) APS-80A-2T
APS-30-2T
2
ON
Voltage input 1
12V
12V
24V
power source
OFF
1
2
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
3
OUT
1
12V
ON
Voltage input 2
0V
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
5V
power source
OFF
OUT
1
2
0V
3
TC-4
TC-41
TTL output encoder or the like
1
Inverter digital display
ON
Voltage input
1 or 2
TC-4A
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
OFF
OUT
1 2 3
In accordance with specifications
for inverter pulse output
(Connection terminals for
a frequency meter)
Inverter
1
Namur output proximity switch
12V
ON
Ex.) NJ0.8-4.5-N
CJ1-12GK-N
Namur input
1
2
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
3
1
DC 2-wire proximity switch
NPN open
collector input
12V
ON
TC-4B
Ex.) APS5-12GK-E/APS3-16F-E
TRD-J -S/RZ
2
3
4
5
IN 2
R
0V
3
1
12V
NPN open
collector input
2
IN 1
OFF
1
NPN open collector type sensor or
relay input
0V
OFF
The NJ type is OFF during detection.
Ex.) APS3-12GMC-Z
APS5-12GK-Z
TC-4S/4W
12V
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
ON
Power
source
OFF
OUT
1
2
0V
3
An NPN open collector output type of proximity switch, rotary encoder, etc.
1
Magnetic detection device
Input for
a magnetic
detection device
12V
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
ON
OFF
1
2
3
Gear sensor, AC tachogenerator, etc.
Notes:
When using a sensor power source (+12 V), the consumption current of the connected sensor should be verified to be less than 50 mA. Connection is possible with all of the examples listed above.
When using input (IN2) for a magnetic detection device, turn all side dipswitches OFF.
Ex.) Gear sensor
AC tachogenerator
C-22
1
ON
12V
OFF
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
(in mm)
External Dimensions
5 Panel thickness for installation
48
1
Digital
Tachometers
TC-61
6
TC-V
Bracket
(attached)
99
96
Detailed Diagram
of the Terminal Block
7.62 7.62
12.5
0.6
0
7
1.3
4.47
TC-4B
TC-4A
TC-4
TC-41
TC-4L
TC-6
6.3
TC-4S/4W
45
92
0.8
0
TC-61
Boring Dimensions for Installation
C-23
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-6
This high-performance unit is for designated revolution display of
multiple functions.
The display is bright and easy to see thanks to a large LED with
character height of 14.2 mm and luminous numerical display in red.
The device has 8 modes to allow measurement of revolutions,
speed, cycles, time differences, duration, length, intervals, and integration. The device has functions for prescaling, sampling, and decimal point switching.
Display
cycle
TC-61
Designated Display
When the impulse pulse cycle is within 0.4 s, the display data
changes every 0.4 s.
General Specifications
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
TC-4L
TC-6
Electrical Specifications
Specified voltage
AC100 120V
Permitted power fluctuation
AC90 132V
Specified frequency
50
Power consumption
14VA
Withstand voltage
AC2000 V 1 minute between power source
and external terminals
DC500 V more than 20 M 1 minute between
power source and external terminals
TC-41
Insulation resistance
TC-4
200 240V
180 264V
Function
Display only
Screen
Red 7-segment LED 6-digit Character height 14.2 mm
Measurement range
10 600000 rpm
10 ms 140 s 1
Precision
Ambient temperature
10
50
Storage temperature
20
70 (with no freezing)
35
(with no freezing)
1 kV pulse amplitude 1 s
rise 1 ns square-wave pulse
Between power source terminals
Protective structure
IP40 (front panel only)
mode 1 / 0.1 ms modes 2 and 5
8 modes
Decimal place
With switching function
Prescaling
M
Sampling
1 time, 10 times, and 100 times with switching (mode 1 only)
1
with switching
10-n=10-9 9999
M 9999 0 n
9 (M and n are integers)
Rear panel screw terminals
Terminals
Vibration Durability 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.75 mm along three axes
resistance No malfunction 10 55 Hz displacement amplitude 0.35 mm along three axes
Durability 300m s2 11ms along three axes
Impact
resistance No malfunction 100m s2 11ms along three axes
Noise resistance
0.01
999999 count
Operating mode
90%RH (with no dewing)
Conforming wiring
0.5
1.25 mm2
Conforming crimped contact JIS C 2805
Permitted torque
1.25
3 equivalent
0.6N m
Sensor power
DC12 V 10 14 V 50 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise)
Power reset
Time power supply is interrupted 0.5 s/Reset time 0.5 s
External dimensions 96W
48H
105D (mm)
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Accessory
Metal fittings for installation
For details related to modes, refer to C-17.
Mode 5 Operating time s
8 modes Mode 1 Revolutions rpm
Mode 6 Measure length
Mode 2 Transit speed m/min.
Mode 7 Internal
Mode 3 Cycles s
Mode 8 Prescaling counter
Mode 4 Time difference s
TC-4B
TC-4S/4W
Cycle period measurement
Specification
Item
Specification
Measurement method
60Hz
Environmental Specifications
Ambient humidity
TC-4A
Item
Specification
Item
Front/Rear Panel Explanation
Terminals for connection and groups of switches for settings are concentrated on the rear panel of the case.
Dip switches (9-bit)
Rotary switches
Prescaling
123456789
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Terminal
C-24
Digital
Tachometers
TC-6
Setting Prescaling
23
23
23
23
23
90 1
90 1
X 10
X1
23
23
90 1
90 1
90 1
Setting when prescaling
is not used.
0
1
90 1
TC-6
0
TC-61
45 6
90 1
23
90 1
23
90 1
23
90 1
45 6
78
0
X 100
1 as shown below.
78
0
45 6
78
78
78
45 6
X 1000
At the factory setup, prescaling values are set to 0001 10 -0=1.
Notes:
1. The range of exponent settings (10 -n ) is 0-9.
2. When prescaling is not used, prescaling settings should be at 1 10 -0
45 6
-n
45 6
78
X 10
45 6
78
Prescaling values can be set as arbitrary 4-digit values from a minimum of 1 10 -9 to a maximum of 9999 10 -0=9999.
45 6
78
prescaling values = display values
45 6
78
45 6
78
Measurement values
Rotary switch turned by a screwdriver
TC-V
Prescaling is used to display values resulting when measurement
values obtained are multiplied by fixed constants.
ON
Switching sampling (1 time, 10 times, or 100 times measurement time: 1s)
Switching the operating mode (8 modes)
Switching the decimal place
Switching frequency
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TC-4L
Configure Rear Panel Dip switches
9
TC-41
At factory setup, all dip switches are set to OFF.
Switch 1 Switching the input frequency
10 Hz common for IN A and IN B (low-speed)
Switches 2, 3, and 4 Switching the decimal place
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9.9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9. 9 9 9 9 9
ON
Switch
OFF
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2
3
4
Switches 5, 6, and 7 Switching the operating mode (8 modes)
ON
OFF
5
6
7
Switches 8 and 9 Switching sampling
(effective only in mode 1)
Switch
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
4
5
6
Mode 6
Mode 7
Mode 8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Switch
1 time
10 times
8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
9
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
100 times Measurement time 1 s
ON
OFF
8
9
When settings are effective for the TC-6, the measurement
time for 1 sampling will be 1-s measurement.
C-25
TC-4B
1
TC-4A
TC-4
OFF position 10 kHz common for IN A and IN B (high-speed)
TC-4S/4W
ON position
ON
OFF
Input specifications
Input pulse amplitude
Specification
Terminal
number
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-6
Marking
Type
ResInput voltage
Input
ponsiveresistance ON voltage OFF voltage
ness
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
10 Hz/
10 kHz
switching
4
R
Reset input
30 ms
1
1k
0
4V
10
INA-INB Low-speed
50 ms
or more
30 V
50 ms
or more
50 s
or more
12V
1 When the input frequency is more than 10 Hz, turn
rear panel dip switch 1 OFF (10 kHz).
IN A
IN B
R
0V
Internal
circuit
1k
Terminal Connection
TC-4L
1
12V
2
3
IN A
IN B
4
R
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Terminal
number
Marking
Explanation
1
12 V
DC output for sensor supply
0V
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
(Display reset in modes 6, 7, and 8)
Common for input and sensor power
6
Blank
Not connected
7
Blank
Not connected
8
Blank
Not connected
9
AC200 V
10
AC100 V
11
AC0 V
AC100V
TC-41
AC200V
Source input
(in mm)
External Dimensions
TC-4A
TC-4
50 s
or more
Structure of the input circuit
TC-61
TC-6
INA-INB High-speed
5 Panel thickness for installation
48
1
TC-4B
Bracket
(attached)
6
99
96
Detailed Diagram
of the Terminal Block
TC-4S/4W
Boring Dimensions for Installation
0.8
0
4.47
7.62 7.62
45
0.6
0
C-26
6.3
12.5
7
1.3
92
TC-4L-G/H
Digital
Tachometers
Power-Saving Small Tachometers
for Display Only
On the 48 mm square panel, the tachometers displays revolution
speeds. The input rate can be set to either one pulse or ten pulses per
revolution.
TC-V
TC-4L-G : AC110V(AC85 115V 50/60Hz)
TC-4L-H : AC220V(AC180 240V 50/60Hz)
General Specifications
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Display interval
Every 0.4 second if input pulse cycle is 0.4 second or less.
Otherwise, 0.4 second plus cycle period. Previous value is displayed for
six seconds after the object stops revolution.
Withstand
voltage
AC2000V 1 Min.
(between power and external terminal)
Screen
Insulaion
resistance
Min. 20M
DC500V
(between power and external terminal)
Precision
Item
10
50
Storage temperature
25
70
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
1
10
9999rpm
1 digit
Available measurement
Number of revolutions per minute (Mode 1 only)
Prescaling
1 or 10 pulses/revolution
2
Times of sampling 1
Specification
Ambient temperature
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 8 mm)
Measurement range
Environment
TC-61
Display only
(with no freezing)
90%RH(with no dewing)
Shock resistance
Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2 (50 G)
No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G)
Noise resistance
1 kV 1
Installation
Socket B or F using optional
Sensor power
DC12V
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second Reset period: 0.5 second
External dimensions 48W
Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
Vibration resistance
No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
Weight
30mA
48H
95D
Approx. 200 g
Accessory
Metal fitting
*1 When prescale is 1.
*2 The pulse rate per revolution can be set to either 1 or 10.
s between power terminals
Input pulse rate
Measurement 1 pulse/revolution
range
10 pulse/revolution
Switch 4 at Position A
10
Position B
999 rpm
one tenth
ten fold
1
9999rpm
Input
Input pulse width
Specification
Terminal
Signal Name
Voltage
Resinumber
Response
stance
ON
OFF
6
IN
Input
10 cps
or
2k cps
Input circuit
Slow
H
+12V
0
4V
10
L
30V
Internal
circuit
Other
input terminals 1k
50ms
50ms
or more or more
1k
Input
pulse
Fast
12mA MAX.
0V
H
Turns ON when input
terminals are short-circuited
with the 0 V terminal.
L
250 s
or more
Switches
Left side
1
2
3
250 s
or more
Switch
4
B
A
Decimal point location
TC-6
Power consumption 6VA
Function
TC-4L
50/60Hz
TC-4
Rated frequency
Specification
Cycle period measurement
TC-4A
Rated voltage
Item
Measurement method
TC-41
Specification
TC-4L-G : AC85 115V
TC-4L-H : AC180 240V
Used to select
at Position A
at Position B
2kcps
10cps
1
Count speed
2
Decimal point location
3
Decimal point location
4
Input pulse rate 1 pulse/revolution 10 pulses/revolution
See the table below for the locations
selected by different combinations of
the swithes.
Switch
9999
9 9 9. 9
9 9. 9 9
9. 9 9 9
2
A
B
A
B
3
A
A
B
B
C-27
TC-4B
Item
TC-4S/4W
Electrical specifications
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4L
Terminal Assignment
T/N
6
5
7
8
4
TC-V
2
10
Not connected
6
Input
Description
Not connected
10
11
110 V or 220 V
depending on models
AC220V
AC110V
1
Not connected
8
View for Rear side
TC-61
12V(Sensor power)
5
7
11
T/N
9
0V
4
9
3
1
Description
3
Not connected for
teminal No.11
2
Wiring examples
Rotary encoder
Proximity switch
DC 2-wire type
6
5
7
TC-6
4
6
5
3
4
TC-4L
9
8
DC 2-wire type
10
2
3
TC-41
8
7
Compatible switches
APS series switches having
a code ending with E or N
Example: APS5-12GK-E
NJ series
Models having a code ending withe E.
Example: NJ2-12GM40-E DC2-wire
proximity switches are also connectable.
9
1
2
1
11
TRD-J -S rotary encoder with
power consumption of less than
30 mA at 12 V
10
11
External Dimensions
(in mm)
Boring dimensions for wall surface mounting
28
TC-4
48
TC-4A
60
2 – 4.5
or M4
Socket F(option)
TC-4B
40 0.2
80.5
31
Boring dimensions for flush mounting
6
45
48
Bracket for flush mounting
+0.3
0
(attached)
45
+0.3
0
TC-4S/4W
Socket B
(option)
Specified sockets
(options)
For wall surface mounting using Socket F or DIN rails: KF-04
4.5
26
47
60
2–
For flush mounting: KB-04
31
40
48
C-28
28
45
TC-41
Digital
Tachometers
Display Only Tachometers with Flexible Input Circuit
TC-V
The display only tachometer features a special circuit to allow
connection to any input device.
Displayed value is reset to zero if no pulse is entered for one
second. Revolution speed is calculated from the average cycle
period of pulse entered during one second. This minimizes the
effect of speed variations. Available options include prescaling,
sampling and decimal point display.
Operation
One second
One second
Tn
When pulse rate per revolution=1, times of sampling=1, and prescale=1.
When times of sampling=10 or 100, and 10 or 100 pulse period is shorter than one second.
The above averaging is not performed if one cycle period exceeds one second, or if 10 or 100 pulse period is longer than one
second.
The displayed value can be reset to zero by input of an external signal.
General Specifications
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Electrical Specification
Item
Item
Specification
Reted voltage
AC90
Rated frequency
50
132V
180
264V
60Hz
Power consumption
14VA
Withstand voltage
AC 2000 V for one minute between
power and external terminal
Insulation resistance
Min. 20M
DC500V
(between power and external terminal)
Display only, compatible to various inputs
Screen
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2 mm)
Precision
25
90
(with no freezing)
RH(with no dewing)
Vibration resistance
Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
Shock resistance
Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 ms2(50 G)
No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 ms2(10 G)
1 kV 1
60
9999 rpm
Number of revolutions per minute(Mode 1 only)
M
1
10-n=10-9 9999
M 9999 0 n
9 (where M and n are integers)
Times of sampling 1,10 or 100 (Mode 1 only)
50
70
9999 rpm
1 digit
Available measurement
Specification
10
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
Noise resistance
Function
Prescaling
Item
Storage temp.
Cycle period measurement
Measurement range 10
Environment
Ambient temp.
Specification
Measurement method
Installation
Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel
Sensor power
DC12V 50mA
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second Reset period: 0.5 second
Output dimensions
96W
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Accsessary
Metal fiting
48H
105D (mm)
Note: Averaging the pulse cycles per second minimizes variations of displayed
value.
s between power terminals
Compatible sensors and switches
12 to 24V DC output sensor
Voltage input 1
5V general purpose inverter
TTL(5V totem-pole output)
Voltage input 2
DC 2-wire proximity switch
Gear sensor
AC tachometer generator
TC-4L
TC-6
60 [rpm]
TC-41
n
Tn
Previous value
TC-4
Display
Calculate
TC-4A
Measure the periods T1 thorough Tn
DC2W input
Electromagnetic sensor
IN 1
(changed by
dip switch)
IN 2
TC-4B
T2
To digitally display the speed of inverter motor,
connect its pulse output to the TC-41 tachometer.
Analog (voltage or current) signals cannot be used.
The TC-41 circuit should be configured so as to
accept the pulse to be counted.
IN 1 and IN 2 cannot be used at the same time.
C-29
TC-4S/4W
T1
TC-61
Pulse input
Digital
Tachometers
TC-41
Switches
The terminals and switches are located
Eight dip swiches (8-bit) Rotary switches for prescaling
on the rear and the side of the
tachometer.
Rear Panel
Side Panel
prescale
TC-V
12345678
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Prescaling
This function allow you to multiply the measured value by
any value within the range shown below.
Use screwdriver to turn the rotary switches.
23
23
23
23
90 1
90 1
23
90 1
1
90 1
Eight dip switches on the rear panel
ON
Times of sampling (1, 10, or 100 times)
OFF
Measurement range
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Decimal point
TC-4A
Input frequency
TC-4B
Switch 1: Input frequency (Count speed)
ON
OFF
ON
10 cps (Low speed) for both IN A and IN B
OFF
10k cps (High speed) for both IN A and IN B
1
TC-4S/4W
Switches 2 and 3: Decimal Point
ON
OFF
2
9 9 9. 9
9 9. 9 9
9. 9 9 9
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Switch
9999
2
3
3
Switch 4: Measurement range
ON
OFF
ON
60 to 9999rpm* Reset to zero when pulse input is suspended for 1 second.
OFF
10 to 9999rpm* Reset to zero when pulse input is suspended for 6 seconds.
4
*When pulse rate per revolution=1, and prescale=1
Switches 5 and 6:
Unassigned
Switches 7 and 8: Time of Sampling
ON
OFF
7
C-30
8
Switch
1 time
10 times
7
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
100 times
X1
The setting when
90 1
0
23
23
23
23
23
90 1
TC-6
90 1
TC-4L
90 1
TC-41
90 1
0
X 10
78
0
78
0
78
78
78
Set the scale in the form of "M 10-9" where M is a 4-digit
-n
X 10
X 1000
X 100
integer and n is a number from 0 to 9. Use the leftmost switch
to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the
value of M. The prescale can range from 1x10-9 to 9999x10-0=9999.
Notes:
1.The exponent (10-n) can be set in a range of to 9.
2.If you do not use a prescale, set the value to 1 (1 10-0) 1 as follows:
Prescaled at 1
45 6
45 6
45 6
45 6
45 6
All the settings are 0 by the default.
45 6
78
45 6
78
78
45 6
78
45 6
78
45 6
Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed
TC-4
Dip switch (3-bit)
90 1
TC-61
Terminal block
Digital
Tachometers
TC-41
Dip switches on the side panel
ON
Switch 1
OFF
ON
Switch 2
OFF
Switch 3
OFF
Input mode
Voltage 1
(12 24V)
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Voltage 2
(5V)
Current 1
(Namur)
Current 2
TC-V
Dip switch for selecting IN1 input mode
OFF
Input Specifications
Terminal
number
IN1 IN2 Low speed
Response Resistance
ON
Voltage input 1
(12 24V)
Selected by
dip switches
15k
0
TC-61
Voltage
OFF
4V
6
1.5V
2.5
0
4V
6
30V
0
4V
6
30V
50 ms or more 50 ms or more
30V
IN1 IN2 High speed
Voltage input 2 10cps
or
(5V)
10kcps
Current input 1
15k
0
1
3.5k
Current input 2
1
1k
3
IN 2
2
Electromagnetic 10cps
or
detector pulse
10kcps
input
4
RESET
Reset input
(open collector)
1
1k
0
10
s or more
1.Pulled up to 12 V by internal circuit.
2.Use the dip switch 1 on the rear panel. Turn it to
OFF to select 10kcps. IN 1 and IN2 cannot be
used at the same time.
0.3Vp-p or more
0.3Vp-p or more
2Vp-p or more
20Vp-p or more
4V
s or more 50
30V
TC-41
30ms
50
10cps:
100cps:
1kcps:
10kcps:
10k
30V
TC-6
Function
TC-4L
Name
IN 1
2
Input pulse width
Specifications
Circuit configuration
Current input 1(Namur input)
12V
Current input 2
12V
+12V
3.3k
IN1
Electromagnetic detector pulse input
12V
Reset input
12V
IN2
TC-4
Voltage inputs 1 and 2
1k
IN1
IN1
R
10k
1k
0V
Sensor
0V
0V
Sensor
Input circuit
Input circuit
Input circuit
TC-4B
Sensor
0V
TC-4A
15k
0V
Terminal Assignment
12V
2
IN A
3
IN B
4
R
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0V
AC100V
AC200V
Terminal
number
Name
1
12V
TC-4S/4W
1
Description
DC sensor power
2
IN 1
Input
3
IN 2
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
Common input: voltage and power
6
Not used
Not connected
7
Not used
Not connected
8
Not used
Not connected
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
ACpower
C-31
Digital
Tachometers
TC-41
Wiring Examples
Sensor
Input
Dip switches
Proximity switch for voltage output
(12 V to 24 V)
12V
ON
Voltage input 1
1
2
12V
ON
TC-61
2
12V
ON
TC-6
2
TC-4L
3
4
5
IN 2
R
0V
0V
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
Brown
3
Blue
1
Sensor for current output
12V
ON
Current input 2
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
OFF
1
2
3
1
Sensor for NPN open collector output
TC-41
2
IN 1
OFF
1
Namur input
or
Current input
Can be connected to Namur or
current input
Models:APS5-12GK-E/APS3-16F-E
TRD-J
-S/RZ
0V
OUT
1
Open collector and DC 2-wire
proximity switch
Models: APS3-12GMC-Z
APS5-12GK-Z
0V
3
Proximity switch for Namur output
Current input 1
(Namur input)
5
R
5 V power
source
OFF
1
The NJ type is turned OFF
at detection time.
4
IN 2
OUT
1
Voltage input 2
3
IN 1
3
General inverter for voltage output(5V)
TTL for totem-pole output
2
12V or 24 V
power source
OFF
Models: APS-80A-2T
APS-30-2T
TC-V
Connection
1
12V
ON
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
Power
source
OFF
1
2
3
OUT
0V
TC-4
Notes:
When using the +12 V sensor power, confirm that the sensor consumes
less than 50 mA. This power is applicable to all the models listed above.
To use IN 2 for electromagnetic detector, turn all the three switches on the
side panel to the OFF positions.
1
ON
TC-4A
Example Gear sensor,
AC tachometer generator, OFF
etc.
12V
1
2
2
3
4
5
IN 1
IN 2
R
0V
3
(in mm)
TC-4B
External Dimensions
5 Thickness of panel
48
1
TC-4S/4W
Bracket
(attached)
6
99
96
External dimensions of terminals block
Boring dimensions
92
0.8
0
7.62 7.62
45
6.3
C-32
12.5
7
0.6
0
1.3
4.47
TC-4
Digital
Tachometers
Display Only Tachometer
TC-V
The red LED screen clearly displays character of 14.2 mm in
height. Eight modes are available for the following
measurements: number of revolutions, speed, cycle time, time
lag, process time, length, spacing, and total.
Options include prescaling, sampling and decimal point display.
Item
Specification
AC90
Rated frequency
50/60Hz
132V/180
264V
Power consumption 14VA
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
AC 2000 V for one minute between
power and external terminal
Measurement method
Cycle period based measurement
Function
Display only
Screen
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display (Character height: 14.2mm)
Measurement range
10
Precision
Min.20M
DC500V
(between power and external terminal)
Available measurements
Prescaling
Environmental specifications
Item
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
50
25
70
(with no feezing)
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
Vibration resistance
Durable along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
90
140s, 1
9999 counts
0.1ms (Modes 2 to 5)
8 modes
M
10-n=10-9 9999
1 M 9999 0
n
9 (M and n are integers)
Times of sampling 1, 10 or 100 (Available only in Mode 1)
Specification
10
9999 rpm, 10ms
1 digit(Mode 1) or
TC-4L
Rated voltage
Specification
Installation
Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel
Sensor power
DC12V 50mA
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second
External dimensions 96W
RH(with no dewing)
Shock resistance
Durable for 11 ms along three axes at 490 m/s2(50 G)
No error for 11 ms along three axes at 98 m/s2(10 G)
Noise resistance
1 kV 1
s between power terminals
48H
105D (mm)
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Accessary
Metal fitting
The following eight modes are
available:
Mode 1: Number of revolutions(rpm)
Mode 2: Speed(meters/minute)
Mode 3: Cycle time(seconds)
Mode 4: Time lag(seconds)
Mode 5: Process time(seconds)
Mode 6: Length
Mode 7: Spacing
Mode 8: Prescale counter
TC-4A
Item
TC-41
Electrical specifications
TC-6
Mechanical and Performance
Specifications
TC-4B
Switches (rear panel)
TC-4S/4W
The terminals and switches are located on the rear of the tacometer.
Eight dip swithes (8-bit)
Rotary swithes for prescaling
Prescale
12345678
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TC-4
General Specifications
TC-61
Displayed value is updated every 0.4 second when input cycle
period is 0.4 second or less.
9 10 11
Terminal block
C-33
Use screwdriver to turn the rotary switches.
23
23
23
90 1
23
90 1
90 1
0
The setting when
not using a prescale
90 1
23
23
90 1
90 1
0
78
TC-6
X1
45 6
78
45 6
78
45 6
78
0
X 10
as follows.
45 6
78
45 6
23
23
23
90 1
23
90 1
Notes:
1.The exponent (10-n) can be set in a range of 0 to 9.
2.If you do not use a prescale, set the value to 1 10-0
X 100
45 6
90 1
-n
Set the scale in the form "M 10-n" where M is a 4-digit
X 10
X 1000
integer and n is a number from 0 to 9.
Use the leftmost switch to set the exponent n, and the other four switches to set the value of M.
The prescale can range from 1 10-9 to 9999 10-0=9999.
45 6
90 1
45 6
78
Measurement Prescale=Value to be displayed
45 6
78
45 6
78
TC-V
Preset a 4-digit value to determine the scale used to calculate
values for display.
78
TC-61
Prescaling
78
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4
0
1
TC-4L
Eight dip switches on the rear panel
ON
Times of sampling (1, 10, or 100 times)
OFF
Operation mode selection (8 modes)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Decimal point selection
TC-4A
TC-4
TC-41
Input frequency
Switch 1: Input frequency (Count speed)
ON
ON
10cps for both IN A and IN B (Low speed)
OFF
OFF
10kcps for both IN A and IN B (High speed)
1
Switches 2 and 3: Decimal Point
ON
Switch
9999
9 9 9. 9
9 9. 9 9
9.9 9 9
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
2
Switches 4, 5 and 6: Measurement range
ON
Switch
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
Mode 8
OFF
4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
4
5
6
Switches 7 and 8: Times of Sampling
ON
OFF
7
C-34
8
Switch
1 time
7
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10 times
100 times
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4
Input specifications
Input pulse width
2
IN A
3
IN B
4
R
Function
Response Resistance
Input
10Hz/10kHz
selection
Input
Reset input
INA
Voltage
ON
INB low speed
INA
OFF
L
50ms or more 50ms or more
1k
0
4V
INB high speed
H
10
30V
30ms
50 s or more 50 s or more
Circuit configuration
TC-V
Name
INA INB reset
Not available in Modes 1 to 5
+12V
Input
pulse
12mA MAX.
Turns ON when input
terminals are short-circuited
with the 0 V terminal.
TC-6
0V
TC-61
Internal
circuit
Other
input terminals 1k
Terminal Assignment
R
6
7
8
9
10
11
Terminal
number
Name
1
12V
0V
Description
DC sensor power
TC-4L
IN B
5
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
Common input: voltage and power
6
Not used
Not connected
7
Not used
Not connected
8
Not used
Not connected
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
AC100V
AC200V
TC-41
IN A
4
AC power
TC-4
3
(in mm)
External Dimensions
Digital switch (TC-4S/4W only)
Dust prevention cover (TC-4S/4W only)
1
5 Thickness of panel
TC-4A
12V
2
Multi-purpose connector
(attached to TC-4B only)
48
TC-4B
1
Bracket
(attached)
2
99
104
114
*1 TC-4B only
*1 TC-4A/4W only
External dimensions of terminal block
Boring dimensions
0.8
0
7.62 7.62
1.3
4.47
7
92
0.6
0
6
9.5
45
96
12.5
1
6.3
C-35
TC-4S/4W
Terminal
number
Specifications
TC-6
TC-61
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4A
In addition to the measurement modes of TC-4, this tachometer
provides analog output.
Prescaling is nothing to do with analog output.
Analog output is available only in Mode 1.
A rotary encoder is required for slow pulse input.
Displayed value is updated every 0.4 second when input cycle period is 0.4
second or less.
Analog output value varies as the measured value does.
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Measurement method
Cycle period based measurement
Function
Analog output(Available only in Mode 1)
Screen
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2mm)
Measurement range 10
TC-4L
Available measurements
TC-41
9999rpm, 10ms
1 digit(Mode 1)or
Precision
TC-4
Digital Tachometer with Analog Output
140s, 1
For the General Specifications,
see page C-33.
9999 counts
0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5)
8 modes
M
Prescaling
Times of sampling
10-n=10-9 9999
1 M 9999 0
n
9(M and n are integers)
1, 10 or 100(Available only in Mode 1)
Installation
Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel
Sensor power
DC12V
50mA
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second
External dimensions
96W
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Axxsessary
Metal fitting
48H
105D
Rear panel
TC-4A
Eight dip switches (8-bit) Five rotary switches for prescaling
Analog output adjuster
prescale
12345678
TC-4B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
TC-4S/4W
Terminal block
Analog output selector
See page C-34 for how to operate these switches.
Input Specifications
Input pulse width
INA
Terminal
number
Specifications
Name
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Function
Voltage
Response Resistance
ON
Reset input
10Hz/10kHz
selection
1k
0
30ms
Not available in analog mode
4V
INA
30V
50ms
50ms
or more or more
50 s
50 s
or more or more
Input circuit configuration
+12V
INA INB Other
reset
input terminals 1k
Input
pulse
12mA MAX.
0V
C-36
INB high speed
L
OFF
10
INB low speed
H
Internal
circuit
Turns ON when input
terminals are short-circuited
with the 0 V terminal.
Output specifications
Output specifications
Input frequency
10
Output characteristics
Voltage output
Current output
ON
100Hz
1
10
1kHz
0.1
10V
0.2
20mA
100
10kHz
0.1
10V
0.2
20mA
Selected by switches
10V
20mA
2
Switches
2
3
1
Linearity
4
3%
Ripple
Max. 20mV
ON
Resonse
time (90 )
ON
ON
Load resistance: Load resistance:
Max. 500
Min. 1k
"
10
100Hz
2.6 seconds
10
100
1kHz
10kHz
0.6 seconds
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4A
" denotes OFF
I/O characteristics
Located on the
right side
ON
Switch 3 ON
10Hz 1kHz
OFF
1
Switch 4 ON
100Hz 10kHz
4
8
4
VR
10
TC-4L
6
3
Use Switches 1 to 4 to select the maximum input
frequency. The dial on the right is used to adjust output
voltage and current. The adjustable range is 5 . No
adjustment is made before delivery.
2
2
4
Input frequency kHz
2
TC-6
6
Analog output circuit
Pulse encoder at 60
pulses/revolution
Note:
Analog output uses frequency-voltage conversion. Use
input frequency of at least 10 Hz. Lower frequency
increase voltage or current ripple.
At less than 600 rpm, an encoder is required for the
input sensor.
It should be rated at 60 pulse/revolution to obtain 10Hz
at 10 rpm and 10k Hz at 10,000 rpm.
7 Voltage output
IN A
F/V
convertor
I/O separator
Current
convertor
6 Current output
0 20mA
R 0
A pulse encoder is required for
speeds below 600 rpm.
10V
R
8 Common
Common terminal 8 is separated from 0 V terminal 5.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Terminal
number
12V
IN A
IN B
R
0V
Current
output
Voltage
output
Analog
output
common
Name
12V
1
AC100V
Description
Sensor power
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Reset(Available in Modes 6, 7 and 8)
5
0V
Common for input and sensor power
6
7
Current
output
Current
output
8
Common
analog output
TC-4B
1
TC-4A
Terminal Assignment
TC-41
Output
8
Analog selector and output adjustor
TC-4
10
TC-61
Dip switches on the side panel (See below).
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
TC-4S/4W
AC200V
AC power
For the external dimensions, see page C-35.
C-37
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4B
Tachometer with Digital Output
TC-4B provides features of digital output (BCD) on the base unit
of TC-4.
TC-V
The TC-4B gives the BCD output faster than displaying the value if input
cycle period is 0.4 second or less.
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
TC-6
TC-61
Item
Specification
Measurement method
Cycle period based measurement
Function
Digital output(BCD 4 digits)
Screen
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display(Character height: 14.2mm)
Measurement range
10
Precision
Available measurements
TC-4L
TC-41
140s, 1
9999 count
0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5)
8 modes
M
Prescaling
TC-4
9999rpm, 10ms
1 degit(Mode 1)or
For the General Specifications,
see page C-33.
10-n=10-9 9999
1 M 9999 0
n
9 (M and n are integrers)
Times of sampling
1, 10 or 100 (Available only in Mode 1)
Installation
Use screws and the terminal block on rear panel
Sensor power
DC12V
50mA
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second
External dimensions
96W
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Accessary
Metal fitting (card edge connection)
48H
8 Modes
110D
Mode 1 : Number of revolutions (rpm)
Mode 2 : Speed (meters/minute)
Mode 3 : Cycle time (seconds)
Mode 4 : Time lag (seconds)
Mode 5 : Process time (seconds)
Mode 6 : Length
Mode 7 : Spacing
Mode 8 : Prescale counter
Switches (rear panel)
TC-4A
Printed circuit board (card edge terminals)
Five rotary swithes for prescaling
Prescale
Eight dip switches
12345678
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Terminal block
9 10 11
See page C-34 for how to operate these switches.
Input terminals
Input pulse width
Specifications
Terminal
number
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
1
Name
2
INA
3
INB
Input
10Hz/10kHz
selection
4
R
HOLD
Reset input
Hold input
30ms
Function
INA
Voltage
Response Resistance
ON
Input
INB low speed
INA
OFF
L
50ms
50ms
or more or more
1k
0
4V
10
30V
50 s
50 s
or more or more
Input circuit configuration
INA INB Reset and hold
+12V
Other
input terminals 1k
Card edge terminal 10
Input
pulse
12mA MAX.
0V
C-38
INB high speed
H
Internal
circuit
Turns ON when input
terminals are short-circuited
with the 0 V terminal.
Output specifications
Timing chart for BCD output with BUSY and HOLD
signal. (example for Model 1)
Output specifications
Open collector
Turns on when resultant value is "1"
Max. 24V
Max. 30mA
Max. 2V
ON
30ms or less
Internal operation
OFF
BUSY signal
15ms
OFF
ON
HOLD signal
9
5
ON
TC-V
BCD output
BCD and BUSY signals
1, 2, 3,
OFF
IN A
TC-61
Output type
Operation
Voltage
Current
Residual voltage
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4B
Max. 30 mA, Withstand voltage 30 V
BCD value is not updated when HOLD signal is ON and BUSY signal is
OFF. Data can be updated as long as BUSY signal is ON.
11 12
BCD output connection
PC
1st digit: 1
2
4th digit: 8
11
13
0V
BUSY
CH
O C
TC-6
TC-4B 1
1A
Input
1B
BCD input
4D
BUSY input
TC-4L
Shunt the common input terminal 11 with the CH terminal
13 to separate the terminal 11 from the common output
terminal 12.
More than one TC-4B tachometer can be connected to a
programmable controller(PC). They can share BCD and
BUSY terminals so the PC can be configured with 17 input
terminals. A diode is required for each of BCD outputs and
BUSY outputs.
Select 1
TC-4B 2
Select 2
1A
1st digit: 1
11
13
4th digit: 8
0V
BUSY
CH
O C
Output
4D
TC-41
2
1B
PC model: SU-6B
IN A
4
IN B
5
R
6
7
8
9
10
11
Terminal
number
Name
1
12V
0V
AC100V
AC200V
Description
DC sensor power
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
Common input: voltage and power
6
Not used
Not connected
7
Not used
Not connected
8
Not used
Not connected
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
TC-4A
3
TC-4B
12V
2
ACpower
TC-4S/4W
1
TC-4
Terminal Assignment
Card edge terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14
4-digit BCD values are generated through the card edge terminals as follows:
Terminal name
Signal
1
B 1A
A 1C
Upper edge(B)
Lower edge(A)
Destination/function
2
1B
1D
1
2
4
8
1 digit
3
2A
2C
4
2B
2D
1
2
4
8
2 digit
5
3A
3C
6
3B
3D
1
2
4
8
3 digit
7
4A
4C
8
9
10 11 12 13
4B BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH
4D BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH
1
2
4
8
4 digit
14
BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH Unused
BUSY HOLD 0V O C CH Unused
OUT O
C
Output Input Common Common
swiching
Separating Terminal 11 and
OUT Terminal 12
These terminals are internally connected.
Short circuit the common input terminal
11 with the CH terminal 13 to separate the
common input and common output.
0V
11
OUT common
12
Common
input
Common
output
CH
13
Card edge terminal 11 is internally connected with Terminal 5 on the internal board.
For the External Dimensions, see page C-35.
C-39
Single Preset
TC-61
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4S
TC-6
TC-4L
Tachometer
The TC-4S and TC-4W has a comparator
function on the basic unit of TC-4.
They are presettable (S for single and W
for dual preset) and give output when the
current value reaches the preset.
TC-4S
TC-4W
On the TC-4W models, two values can be preset and prescaled.
Either OUT1 or OUT 2 signal is generated when the count has
reached the corresponding preset value.
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Specification
For the General Specifications, see
page C-33.
Measurement method
Cycle period based measurement
Function
TC-4S: Single preset TC-4W: Dual preset
Screen
7-segment red LED for 4-digit display (Character height: 14.2mm)
Measurement range
10
9999rpm, 10ms
140s, 1
1 degit(Mode 1) or
Precision
Available measurements
9999 count
0.1ms(Modes 2 to 5)
8 modes
M
Prescaling
TC-41
/ TC-4W
Tachometer
Item
TC-4
Dual Preset
10-n=10-9 9999
1 M 9999 0
n
9 (M and n are integers)
Times of sampling
1, 10 or 100(Available only in Mode 1)
Installation
Use screws and the terminal board on rear panel
Sensor power
DC12V
Power-on reset
Shutdown period: 0.5 second/Reset period: 0.5 second
External dimensions
96W
Weight
Approx. 450 g
Accessary
Metal fitting, dustproof cover
8 Modes
50mA
48H
105D
Mode 1 : Number of revolutions (rpm)
Mode 2 : Speed (meters/minute)
Mode 3 : Cycle time (seconds)
Mode 4 : Time lag (seconds)
Mode 5 : Process time (seconds)
Mode 6 : Length
Mode 7 : Spacing
Mode 8 : Prescale counter
Rear panel and Side panel
TC-4A
Eight dip switches (9-bit) Five rotary switches for prescaling
Analog output adjustor (TC-4W)
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
prescale
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
Terminal block
See page C-34 for how to operate these switches.
Dip switches on the rear panel
ON
OFF
Output mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Times of sampling
Measurement mode
Decimal point
ON
Hold
OFF
Compare or one shot
See page C-34 for how to use these switches.
Input frequency
Reset timer adjustor (TC-4W)
Located on the side panel, this dial adjusts the timer used for reset signal output. The timer starts when the power is turned on. Allowable time
ranges from one second to ten seconds.
C-40
Digital
Tachometers
TC-4S/ TC-4W
Input Specifications
Input pulse width
INA
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
ON
10cps
or
10kcps
Reset input
1k
0
L
OFF
4V
10
50ms
50ms
or more or more
50 s
50 s
or more or more
Input circuit configuration
30V
INA INB Reset
30ms
+12V
Internal
circuit
Other
input terminals 1k
Not available in Modes 1 to 5.
TC-V
IN A
Voltage
Response Resistance
INB high speed
Input
pulse
12mA MAX.
0V
Turns ON when input
terminals are short-circuited
with the 0 V terminal.
TC-61
2
Function
INA
Output specifications
7
OUT2 Contact output 2
Contact capacity
Max. 50ms
200,000 contacts at 220V
2 A(resistance load)
OUT1
7 OUT2
OUT2
8 COM
OUT1 is available only on TC-4W.
Only OUT 2 is available on TC-4S.
Terminal Assignment
Terminal
number
Name
12V
1
1
+12V
2
IN A
TC-6
OUT1 Contact output 1
6 OUT1
Response
3
IN B
4
R
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0V
AC100V
OUT2
OUT1
AC200V
Description
TC-4L
6
Relay output
sensor power
2
IN A
Input
3
IN B
Input
4
R
Reset input
5
0V
Common for input and sensor power
6
OUT1
(TC-4W only)
7
OUT2
(both TC-4S and TC-4W)
8
Common
output
9
AC200V
10
AC100V
11
AC0V
AC power
TC-4
Terminal
number
Output circuit
Specifications
Function
Name
Timing charts
Compare
Mode 1
Preset 2
Preset 1
Preset 1
OUT 2
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 1
Reset
Reset
Generated after a time set on the internal timer.
Hold
Display
TC-4A
Display
Preset 2
Display
The initial status is OFF when powerd-on, it becomes ON after receiving a counting pulse.
Compare
Modes 2 to 7
Preset 2
Preset 2
Preset 1
Preset 1
OUT 2
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 1
Display
TC-4S/4W
Hold
Reset
Reset
Generated after a time set on the internal timer.
Hold
Display
One shot
Mode 8
Preset 2
Preset 2
Preset 1
Preset 1
OUT 2
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 1
Reset
Reset
Display
Time of OUT 2 40
See page C-35 for the external dimension of the counter.
TC-41
Name
INB low speed
H
TC-4B
Terminal
number
Specifications
50ms
In the Compare mode, OUT1 or OUT 2 is generated when
the display value has reached the preset value 1 or 2.
C-41
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC series
Wiring
1
Proximity switch
12V
12V
IN A
Proximity
switch
TC-61
IN B
Proximity
switch
3
4
5
IN A
IN B
R
0V
6
Black
(White)
0V
Blue
(Black)
Black
(White)
0V
Blue
(Black)
Applicable switches
APS series:
Models with an output code of N or E, Z
Example:
APS3-16F-E
NJ, RJ, SJ series:
Models with an output code of E.
Example: NJ2-12GM40-E
TC-6
12V
TC-41
TC-4L
1
2
3
4
5
IN A
IN B
R
0V
TC-4S/4W
TC-4B
TC-4A
TC-4
12V Red
C-42
-RZ
10
11
AC200V
Rotary encoder
TRD-J
9
AC100V
Reset 1
-S
8
Brown
(Red)
OUT
TRD-J
7
Brown
(Red)
OUT
12V
2
OUT
Green
0V
Black
Shield
Digital
Tachometers
TC series
Recommended application 1. Measuring speed between two points
The tachometer can measure the speed of an moving object detected by two sensors. With the sensors positioned as
shown below, the speed in meters per minute is calculated from their pulse counts and distance.
1m
INB
TC-V
INA
meters/minute
TC-61
Sensor
TC-4
Step 1
Select the model.
Step 2
TC-6
Use TC-4 that displays speeds.
Install sensors.
Set the dip switches.
Step 4
Decimal point
To select
Fast Input frequency
OOne digit after decimal point
O(000.0)
O
Operation
mode
Mode 2
O
O
Times of sampling: 1
O
Number of
sampling
Set
OFF
N
FF
N
OFF
FF
FF
FF
TC-41
Set to
Input frequency
TC-4
Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
On the rear panel, set the dip switches as follows:
TC-4A
Step 3
TC-4L
Use photoelectric sensors for inputs to INA and INA.
Select a prescale
Select "1" by setting the rotary switches as follows (if the prescale has been changed from the initial value):
45 6
TC-4B
0
23
90 1
90 1
0
23
23
23
90 1
23
X1
45 6
78
X 10
45 6
78
X 100
45 6
78
0
0
1
Configure the circuit.
1
2
3
4
5
+12V
IN A
IN B
R
0V
6
7
8
9
10
TC-4S/4W
Step 5
X 1000
78
78
45 6
90 1
-n
90 1
X 10
11
AC100V
Photoelectric
Photoelectric
sensor
sensor
Reset(display reset)
IN A
IN B
C-43
TC-V
Digital
Tachometers
TC series
Recommended application 2. Controlling conveyor speed
Based on the pulse input from the sensor, the tachometer
calculates the number of revolutions of the axis shown below.
Using the prescale, it converts the number to a speed then
displays the value. It generates an alarm when the value
exceeds upper or lower limit.
Step 1
Revolution
rod
Select the model.
Step 2
Install a sensor.
Install a sensor so it detects the revolution of the pulley axis. Use an APS3-16F-E proximity switch.
TC-6
Set the dip switches. On the rear panel, set the dip switches as follows:
TC-4L
Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To select
Low Input frequency (less than 10 pulses/revolution)
Decimal point
One digit after decimal point
(000.0)
Operation mode
Mode 1
Sampling mode
Times of sampling: 1
Output mode
Compare
Select a prescale.
-n
X 1000
X 100
X 10
45 6
23
45 6
23
23
23
23
90 1
X 10
45 6
78
45 6
78
45 6
78
200
Using an exponent, the value is
expressed as 6283 10-4 because
0.6283=6283/10000.
To select this scale, set the rotary
switches as follows:
78
D=
6 2 8 3 X 1 0 -4
78
D
6283 = 6283 X 10-4
0.6283 = 10000
901
TC-4
Calculate the circumference of the pulley axis in meters,
then express the value in the form of "M 10-n". M is a
4-digit integer and n is a number of 0 to 9.
For example, if the diameter of the pulley axis is 200 mm,
its circumference in meters is:
200 3.1416 0.001 = 0.62832
TC-4A
Set
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
90 1
Step 4
Set to
Input frequency
90 1
Step 3
TC-41
Proximity
sensor
90 1
TC-61
Use the TC-4W dual preset tachometer to set
upper and lower limits.
X1
TC-4B
Step 5
Configure the circuit.
1
TC-4S/4W
12V
2
3
4
5
IN A
IN B
R
0V
6
7
8
9
10
11
Red(Brown)
Proximity
switch
AC100V
White(Black)
Black(Blue)
Common
OUT2(upper limit)
APS3-16F-E
For control output
OUT2(lower limit)
Notes:
Reset(putput reset)
1. Keep unused terminals open.
2. The AC power should be turned on at the same time as the power for the conveyor motor. This allows the internal timer to disable pulse input until the
conveyor reaches a specific speed. The timer can be set 0 to 10 seconds.
3. When the AC power is turned on earlier than the motor power, the tachometer generates an alarm indicating that the conveyor speed is below the lower limit.
To prevent this, set the internal timer so the output is reset to OFF some time after the AC power is turned on (See below).
Step 6
Adjust the reset timer.
Set the timer so as to reset the tachometer when the conveyor has reached an operating speed.
C-44
DIGITAL TIMERS
KT-V Series
D-2
D-1
KT-V
Digital
Timers
KT-V Series
Digital Timers
A large display that is easy to read has been provided
in a small DIN48 size.
The large red LED is bright with a character height for
display of 12 mm, which allows it to be seen easily from
a distance and at an angle. In addition, set values use
a green LED to differentiate from timekeeping values.
Setting of set values with individual setting keys has
the feel of digital switches. Basic function settings are
made with digital switches; detailed settings are selected with digit keys, so operation is easy.
Merits
CE Mark
Tamper proof
Key protection can be set for individual keys to prevent a
malfunction or tampering.
Various uses with 5 types of operating modes
Settings can be made for ondelay, offdelay, one-shot,
integration, and flicker.
Battery-less memory retention
EEPROM is used to retain values in memory, so there is
no need for battery maintenance.
Display of Elapsed time/Remaining time
The time display can be selected to display elapsed time
and remaining time.
Removable terminals
Maintenance has been reduced via terminals that can be
removed. After wiring, the terminal cover provides a safe
surface for worry-free use.
IP65 Protective structure
The front cover panel uses sheet keys, so operation with
wet or dirty hands can be done worry-free. A front cover
is also provided as an option to enhance the protective
structure.
Power source for a large-capacity sensor
You can source the power for sensor from the built-in P/S
24VDC, 60mA.
Designed in compliance with CE and UL
Free power supply for the AC type
The operating AC voltage is wide as 85VAC 264VAC.
Various types of time ranges
The device covers 10 types of time ranges with times of
0.001 s to 9999 hours.
Model number system
List of Models
Model Number
Number of digits Source Voltage
Sensor Source Voltage
DC24 V 60 mA
KT-V4S-
AC
KT-V4S
4
KT-V4S-C
DC
S
(Accessories) Installation Frame
4
DC power
C
Blank AC power
with output
4 digits
Series Name
D-2
KT-V
Digital
Timers
General Specifications
Specification
Item
AC power
AC100
240 V
Permitted power fluctuation
AC85
264 V
Power consumption
Approx. 11 VA
DC12
DC10
DC24 V (20-28 V) 60 mA (less than 10%p-p ripple noise)
Memory Backup upon
Power Failure
EEPROM Writing Up to 100,000 times
Storage temperature
26.4 V
Approx. 4 W
Sensor power
Ambient temperature
24 V
KT-V
Source voltage
DC power
Memory Duration 10 years
10
50
20
70
(with no freezing)
Ambient humidity
35
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV 1 minute AC 2kV for one minute (for AC input, 0 V, and relay interconnection)
(for the DC type, 0 V and relay interconnection only)
Vibration resistance
Impact resistance
Noise resistance
85
RH (with no dewing)
Durability
Displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10
No malfunction
Displacement amplitude 0.35 mm 10
55 Hz along three axes
55 Hz along three axes
2
Durability
490 m/s along three axes
No malfunction
98 m/s2 along three axes
AC power between terminals 1.5 kV (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
DC power between terminals 1.0 kV (pulse width 1 of s and rise time 1 of ns)
Protective structure IP65 (front panel only)
Weight
Terminals
Approx. 150 g
Conforming wiring
0.25
Conforming crimped contact
R1.25-3
Permitted torque
0.5 Nm
1.65 mm
Approx. 110 g
2
Performance Specifications
Item
Specification
Category
Timer
Operational format
Ondelay, offdelay, one-shot, accumulation, and flicker (with alarm output)
Number of digits
4 digits
Display
Display of timekeeping values: red LED, Character height 12 mm, Set display: green LED, Character height: 7 mm
Time range
0.001 s
/1 h
Display
Timer precision
9.999 s/0.01 s
9999 h/1 min
99.99 s/0.1 s
99 h 59 min/0.1 min
999.9 s/1 s
9999 s/1 s
999.9 min/0.1 h
99 min 59 s/1 min
9999 min
999.9 h
Elapsed time/Remaining time
0.013% or
15 ms (using large values)
Input logic: negative logic (no-load input)/ positive logic (voltage input)
Input
Input resistance: positive logic 15 k
Negative logic 3.3 k
(AC power)/1.8 k
(DC power)
Inpult voltage: "L" 0-3 V "H" 7-30 V
Start input response
Less than 15 ms/5 ms/1 ms
External reset
Min. signal amplitude 5 ms
Output
DC output: NPN open collector output / 24 V 100 mA Withstand pressure 35 V Residual voltage less than 1.5 V
Relay output: 1 transformer relay AC220V 2A (resistance load)
Output duration (flicker)
10-9999 ms variable every 10 ms
Key protection
Setting of arbitrary keys possible
Installation
Exclusively for embedding (terminal block connection)
D-3
Digital
Timers
KT-V
Output Operation Chart
SW
Ondelay
Alarm setting
Remaining time
1
2
OFF
OFF
Elapsed time
Alarm
values
Alarm
values
KT-V
Set values
Reset
0
0
ON
ON
Start
OFF
ON
Reset
Elapsed time
OFF
ON
Relay ON
output OFF
DC ON
output OFF
SW
One-shot
1
2
Remaining time
SW
Accumulation
ON OFF
Elapsed time
Set values
1
ON
Remaining time
2
ON
Elapsed time
Set values
Alarm
values
Reset
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Relay
output OFF
ON
DC
output OFF
Start
1
OFF
Remaining time
Set values
Start
SW
Offdelay
Alarm
values
0
0
ON
ON
Start
OFF
ON
Reset
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Relay ON
output
OFF
DC ON
output OFF
Power ON
source
Relay
output OFF
DC ON
output OFF
OFF
Flicker
(in Setup mode)
Remaining time
Elapsed time
Set values
Alarm
values
0
Start
Reset
Alarm settings
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
t
t
t
t
Relay ON
output
OFF
DC ON
output
OFF
Output time of t is 10
D-4
9990 ms variable (100 ms at shipping time)
When alarm settings are 0, DC
output is the same as in output operations
for relay output.
Alarm settings should be smaller values than preset values.
Performing alarm setting with values that exceed preset values will
result in measurement values of 0; alarm output (DC output) will
come ON.
KT-V
Digital
Timers
Terminal Wiring Diagrams
KT-V4S-C
KT-V4S
Sensor power
Start input
DC24 V 60 mA
IN
0V
3
5
2
Start input
OUT
0V
3
5
DC output
1
7
8
9 10 11 12
AC100
7
8
9 10 11 12
COM N.C. N.O.
COM N.C. N.O.
Relay output
1
OUT
R Reset input
Relay output
240 V power
R Reset input
KT-V
DC output
IN
+
DC12
24 V power
Alarm output is used in combination with DC output (OUT terminal).
I/O Circuit Diagrams
AC power
Sensor
2
power
DC24 V
Internal 24 V
DC power
9 N.C.
DC24V
11
Internal 24 V
12
8 COM
8 COM
5V
5V
3.3k
Start
input
3
1.8k
10 N.O.
47k
Start
input
3
22k
10 N.O.
47k
22k
1 OUT
1 OUT
5V
5V
3.3k
Reset
input 7
9 N.C.
ON during negative
logic input
ON during negative
logic input
1.8k
Reset
input 7
47k
22k
47k
22k
5 0V
5 0V
D-5
Digital
Timers
KT-V
Input Wiring Examples (Start input/Reset input)
Proximity switch with NPN open collector output
Proximity switch with voltage output or PNP open collector output
Input logic: Negative logic: (no-volt input) (neg)
2
Input logic: Negative logic (voltage input) (pos)
2 Sensor source (DC 24V)
Sensor source (DC 24V)
KT-V
Brown
Brown
Start
Start
Black
Black
3
Start input
7
Reset input
5
0V
3 Start input
Reset
Reset
Black
Black
Blue
7 Reset input
Blue
Recommended proximity switch: APS
DC 2-wire proximity switch
-
5 0V
-N
E
Recommended proximity switch: APS
-
-E2
Switch or relay
Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg)
Input logic: Negative logic (no-volt input) (neg)
Start input response: 15 ms
Start
Start
3
Start input
7
5
Input logic: Positive logic (voltage input) (pos)
Start input response: 15 ms
2
Sensor source
(DC 24V)
3
Start input
Start
3
Start input
Reset input
7
Reset input
7
Reset input
0V
5
0V
5
0V
Reset
Reset
Recommended proximity switch: APS
-
Reset
-Z
With the DC type, please supply source
voltage above 20 V.
Input current is heavy, so this connection is
recommended.
There is no DC power source. Use a separate external power source.
Output Wiring Examples
NPN open collector output
Relay output
Relay drive possible
OUT 10
0V
Load power
N.C. 9
Load
N.O. 10
Load
5
Load for specified
DC 24 V power source
D-6
COM 8
Load
KT-V
Timekeeping values (red)
Operating mode
Displays timekeeping values.
Setup mode
Displays setting parameters.
TIMER
OUT
Units
Operating mode
Displays units for timekeeping values.
H: hours/m: minutes/ s: seconds
h :m :s
K/P
4
Key protection (red)
Operating mode
Blinks when key protection is ON
(only when the key is ON).
Setup Mode
Displays key protection settings.
2
3
RST
Set values (green)
Operating mode
Displays set values.
Setup mode
Displays set items.
1
Digit keys
Operating mode
Allows changes in set values.
After changing set values, total key input
is ineffective for about one second. Set
values then take effect.
Setup mode
Allows selection of setting parameters.
RST key
Operating mode
Allows timekeeping values to be reset
(0 for Elapsed time and set values for
Remaining time).
Setup mode
Allows selection of set items.
Time range
Time/Set values
0
0
0
0 00
0 00
Units
9999
9999
9999
99 59
99 59
h :m :s
h :m :s
h :m :s
h :m :s
h :m :s
Key Operation
1. Changing set values
Press a digit key once to increase the corresponding digit by one:
0 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Example: When the current settings are 123
Press the 1 key and the display changes to 124
Press the 2 key and the display changes to 134
Press the 3 key and the display changes to 234
After removing your finder from the key, the settings will be
verified after about one second.
TIMER
When the digit of the display is advanced to 60
(minutes) (seconds)
(hours) (minutes)
2. Resetting the timekeeping values
Press the RST key to reset the timekeeping values. The count is
reset within 0.1 second after the key is pressed. When the Reset
key is pressed in the display mode for remaining time, values
become set values. In the display mode for elapsed time, they
become 0.
OUT
h :m :s
K/P
4
RST
2
3
1
3. Protecting the keys
Turning the Dip switch ON disable the reset and digit keys. If
disabled keys are pressed, the LED for the corresponding key will
blink. If Key protection is selected to disable keys in Setup mode,
Dip switch 6 will come ON. As the factory setup, Key protection in
Setup mode is completely disabled, so just turning Dip switch 6
ON will disable all keys.
D-7
KT-V
Output (red)
Operating mode
Lit when output is ON.
Blinks when alarm
output is ON.
Digital
Timers
Front Panel Layout and Description
Digital
Timers
KT-V
Configure Dip switches
Use the dip switch on the top of the counter to configure varions parameters and operation mode.
Configure dip switches with power off. Operation with power up will have no effect.
When dip switches are re-configured, you must press the Reset key in operating mode to reset the count values.
Dipswitch
ON
At factory setup, all switches are OFF.
2
3
4
5
6
7
KT-V
1
8
Selection of the operating mode
Selection of key protection
Selection of display format
Selection of the time range
Selection of the output mode
Output mode
The output mode is selected with Dip switches 1 and 2. Blink mode for items not present can be selected in Setup mode.
Operation
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW1
SW2
Ondelay
OFF
OFF
Offdelay
OFF
ON
One-shot
ON
OFF
Accumulation
ON
ON
Factory setup
Time range
The time range is selected with Dip switches 3, 4, and 5. The time range for items not present can be selected in Setup mode.
Time range
ON
.
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
.
8
.
SW3
SW4
SW5
s
OFF
OFF
OFF
s
OFF
OFF
ON
s
OFF
ON
OFF
s
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
m
ON
OFF
ON
h
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
m
h
s
m
Factory setup
h: hours m: minutes s: seconds
Display format
The display format is selected with Dip switch 6.
Input mode
SW6
Input for Addition or Subtraction
OFF
Dual input
ON
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Factory setup
Key protection
With Dips witch 7, [Do not protect keys] can be selected to take effect for keys set in Setup mode using [Protect keys]. Setting
for keys to protect can be performed in Setup mode. When this switch is ON, re-supplying power will cause protection to take
effect. As the factory setup, [Do not protect keys] is set.
Key protection
SW7
Settings in Setup mode do not take effect
OFF
Do
ON
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Factory setup
Operating mode
The operating mode is selected with Dip switch 8.
Operating mode
ON
OFF
D-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Run mode
OFF
Setup mode
ON
Factory setup
KT-V
Digital
Timers
Setup Mode
Settings that cannot be selected with dip switches can be set in
Setup mode.
Output mode settings (t-op)
(1) Start input response 1/5/15 ms
Positive or negative logic
(3) Output mode
Flicker mode, dip switch
(4) Time range
0.0 m/0.0 h, dip switch
(5) Output duration
Duration of output in Blink mode can be
set from 10 9990 ms (in 10-ms increments)
RST
Time range settings (rang)
RST
Output duration settings (outt)
(7) Resetting key protection Setting to disable the reset key can
be performed.
RST
Alarm output settings (set
Setup mode
a
1. Switching Between Setup mode and Run mode
)
RST
Reset key protection
(rpro)
Setting Dip switch 8 to ON and turning on the power will start the
Setup mode.
Setting Dip switch 8 to OFF and turning on the power will start the
Run mode.
2. Operations in Setup mode
Digit key protection
RST
Input logic settings (si g)
Selection is with the digit key.
Digit key: Displays timekeeping values.
1
2
RST
pos Selects positive logic.
neg Selects negative logic.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
*
di p
Dip switch selection
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Output duration is set with the digit key.
Digit key 1 to set in increments of 10 ms
will be rendered ineffective ( *100 ms).
0. 1 0 0 s
4 3 2 1
Can be changed from 10 9990 ms.
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Setting is with the digit key (*0 )
Timekeeping
values for display
Digit key
0.0.0.0
4 3 2 1
Press the Reset key to proceed.
Selection of disable or enable to
set the Reset key is with the digit key.
Digit key: for K/P display
Disabled
*
Enabled
Press the Reset key to proceed.
*
*
(*Disabled/enabled)
(*Disabled/enabled)
( Disabled/enabled)
( Disabled/enabled)
Press the Reset key to proceed to the final menu.
Digit key
Not used
1
1
Used
5 Selects 5-ms input response.
15 Selects 15-ms input response.*
Press the Reset key to proceed.
m Selects 0.0 m.
h Selects 0.0 h.
Digit key: for K/P display
Digit key: Displays timekeeping values.
1 Selects 1-ms input response.
1
RST
000. 0
000. 0
1
2
3
4
Selection is with the digit key.
2
3
Digit key: Displays timekeeping values.
Selection of disable or enable to set
the Reset key is with the digit key.
(ppro)
In Setup mode, the count can be initialized using the menu as
follows:
Represents factory setups.
(int)
Selection is with the digit key.
1
2
RST
Start input response settings
*
Dip switch selection
Timekeeping
values for display
Digit key
Setting to disable the arbitrary digit
key can be performed.
Run mode
di p
Press the Reset key to proceed.
1
2
3
Offset values can be set with respect to
preset values.
(8) Protecting digit keys
Digit key: Displays timekeeping values.
1 f Selects Flicker mode.
2
(2) Input logic
(6) Alarm output
Selection is with the digit key.
K/P display
Disabled with lamp on
Enabled with lamp off
• In Flicker mode, items marked with an
are skipped.
• After changing the default settings in Setup mode, press the RST key in
Run mode and reset timekeeping values.
• Setting parameters are rendered effective by pressing the RST key and
proceeding to the next step.
• Key protection settings are rendered effective with Dip switch 7 as well as
an AND condition. To begin protection, turn Dip switch 7 ON.
Operational Example
Changing preset values
1. Change the preset value from 2:00 to 1:30
Before changing
Change complete
TIMER
TIMER
OUT
h :m :s
K/P
OUT
h :m :s
K/P
4
RST
TIMER
2
3
RST
OUT
h :m :s
K/P
4
1
TIMER
2
3
Press Digit key 3 nine times.
RST
h :m :s
K/P
4
1
OUT
2
3
4
1
RST
2
3
1
Press Digit key 2 three times.
D-9
KT-V
Items that can be contiguned in Setup Mode
Digital
Timers
KT-V
Washing Time Control
After pressing the start switch, washing will be performed
for the set time.
The setting screen for
Time range is displayed.
Set item
Output mode
Details
Time range
KT-V
Display format
Key protection
These values are initial values.
One-shot
m
Remaining time
Reset key
S key
Disabled
OUT
K/P
s
Press the RST key to proceed.
The setting screen for
Alarm output is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
1. Setting Dip switches
Press the RST key to proceed.
Operate Dip switches with the power off.
The setting screen for
Reset key protection is displayed.
Select Output mode and One-shot.
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select the time range in
8
Dip switch 1 ON
Dip switch 2 OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
m
7
8
s.
Dip switch 3 ON
Dip switches 4 and 5 OFF
Dip switch 7 ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the 4 key and
permit key protection.
3
key to
OUT
K/P
Be sure to turn power ON after changing settings in
Setup mode and press the RST key to reset count values.
Turn Dip switch 8 ON and then turn power ON.
3. Changing setting contents
The setting screen for
Start input response is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
The setting screen for Input logic
is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
The setting screen for Output mode
is displayed.
These values are initial values.
OUT
K/P
Press the RST key to proceed.
Turn the power OFF after completing setting in Setup
mode and turn Dip switch 8 OFF (Run mode); then turn
power ON.
5. Starting Run mode
2. Switching to Setup mode
D-10
The setting screen for
Digit key protection is displayed.
4. Switching to Run mode
ON
1
K/P
Press the RST key and the setting parameters will be written.
Select Key protection.
OFF
OUT
Press the RST key to proceed.
ON
OFF
These values are initial values.
KT-V
(1) With the DC power source, the 0-V terminal
and the input common 0-V terminal
are internally short-circuited.
(2) Apply the rated voltage in one instant, not by gradually raising the
voltage.
(3) Always use negative input logic to set the DC 2-wire proximity switch.
(4) During counting, changes to preset values will take effect about
one second after key input of the change. In subtraction mode, key
input takes effect when the count is reset valid preset value will be
saved in the memory at loss of power.
(5) It is recommended to use a sheet included in the package to keep
the setups for the future maintenance.
(6) Use in the following environments should be avoided:
A location where the ambient temperature is above 50 or below
10 .
A location where the ambient humidity is above 85% or abrupt
temperature changes may cause condensation.
A location with dust, iron fillings, corrosive gasses, or the like.
A location exposed to direct sunlight.
A location with significant vibrations or impact.
(7) When conducting testing of insulation withstand voltage, insulation
resistance, or the like, detach the control circuit from the main body.
(8) When power is interrupted, writing to the internal EEPROM will take
place. The number of times EEPORM writing can be performed is
less than 10000, so avoid use with frequent power source operation.
Precautions for Wiring
Keep the wires away from power line.
With regard to use in locations where extensive noise is generated, keep the KCV
counter and wires away from the noise source to the extent possible.
Empty terminals are not to be used as relay terminals.
For connection, use of crimped contacts is recommended.
When wiring the 1 and 7 terminals, do not install fork-shaped crimped contacts
at an angle. Use a round crimped contact for angled installation.
Fork-shaped crimped contacts
For angled installation, connection with the contact is insufficient.
Like in the illustration above, install the contact perpendicular to
the horizontal.
Round crimped contact
Installation and Removal of the Main Body
Installation
Insert the main body through the panel installation port.
From the rear, mount the installation frame.
Installation of the Terminal Block and
Terminal Cover
Main body
Terminal block
Fixing screw
Terminal block cover
Installation frame: Can be installed vertically or horizontally.
Removal
Do not use a screw other than the one used to fix the terminal
block during shipping.
Maintain a permitted torque of 0.3 Nm.
Install the terminal block after wiring is complete.
Holding the tabs, spread them 2 3 mm.
While keeping the tabs spread, pull the device towards you.
D-11
KT-V
Precautions for Use
Digital
Timers
Precautions
Error Codes
Common Errors
Error
Error type
e21
Memory data error
Error details
Corrective Action
Press the Reset key to eliminate the error display.
Measurement values and timekeeping values will be set to
0, preset and set values will be 5000, and Setup mode
contents will be set to the factory setups.
Preset/set values and Setup mode items
have changed.
Options
Option
Model Number
Details
Rubber packing
KC-48P
Prevents water from entering the control panel with
installation between the installation panel and TC-V or KT-V.
Front cover
KC-48C
Protects the front panel from dirt and the like.
Material: Soft silicone rubber
Key operation can be performed with the front
cover as-is.
(in mm)
External Dimensions
63
100 (AC power source)
48
60 (DC power source)
48
44.5
Installation frame
Depth
Panel thickness 1 5
6
Detailed Diagram
of the Terminal Block
Terminal screw
M3
4 7.62
7.62
6.5
1.12
50
10
DC power source
66 mm
AC power source
106 mm
Boring Dimensions for Installation
30.48
1. When the installation handle is
horizontal
Installation
frame
2. When the installation handle is
vertical
48+0.2
0
70 or more
55 or more
Complying wiring:
0.25-1.65 mm2
Complying crimped contact: R1.25-3
Permitted torque:
0.5 Nm
D-12
45+0.3
0
70 or more
Square hole
45+0.3
0
9.5
(Close installation
possible)
6.5
KT-V
Digital
Timers
KT-V
PROGRAMMABLE
CAM SWITCHES
List of KOYO Programmable Cam Swithes
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320
FC-21
E-2
E-3
E-12
E-24
E-1
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
Programmable Cam Swithes
List of KOYO Programmable Cam Swithes
Model number
Appearance
Absolute
FC-81F-C
95W
FC-80-C/160
/320
Encoder
80H
Resolution Number of
(number of digits) output points
360/720
8
Response time
Source
voltage
Sensor power
300rpm/360 resolution
150rpm/720 resolution DC12/24V
E-3
60.5D
1600rpm/360 resolution
800rpm/720 resolution
FC-1601F-C
Absolute
360/720
16
AC12/24V
E-3
FC-21
(No dynamic CAM
setting available)
140W
90H
Reference
page
60.5D
1600rpm/360 resolution
800rpm/720 resolution
FC-321F-C
Absolute
360/720
32
DC12/24V
E-3
E-12
(No dynamic CAM
setting available)
140W
90H
60.5D
FC-80-C
105W
100H
100H
360/720
8
300rpm/360 resolution DC12/24V
150rpm/720 resolution
Absolute
360/720
16
1600rpm/360 resolution
800rpm/720 resolution
66D
FC-160
140W
Absolute
AC85
264V
Encoder power
source
12V 70mA
E-12
66D
1600rpm/360 resolution
800rpm/720 resolution
FC-320
195W
100H
E-2
162H
360/720
Absolute
360/515/
720/1024
32
(No dynamic CAM
setting available)
AC85
264V
Encoder power
source
12V 70mA
AC100/
200V
Encoder power
source
12V 70mA
E-12
66D
FC-21
210W
Absolute
80D
24
3600rpm/360 resolution
E-24
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
An embedded installation type, so confirmation
can be done in a normal operating state with
the control panel screen.
Various functions are provided such as timing,
irregularity detection, and a multi-purpose
communication port.
Merits
Easy operation
Simple key operations with the operating panel installed.
Pulse output setting function
This determines the number of pulse per revolution. (divided
output).
Setting changes are possible in Run mode
Fine adjustment of the ON/OFF position of output can be
performed via adjustment mode without stopping the device.
Independent setup
The FC-161F-C can register 8 types of programs and the FC321F-C can register 10. Any programs can be selected via
switching bank input during setup.
Applicable in a broad variety of industries
This series is best suited for timing control of individual types of
injectors, packaging machines, applicators, bottling, etc., in the
food product, packaging, and printing fields.
Also provided as an wall-mounting type
Wall-mounting types of the FC-80-C/FC-320 cam switches are
also provided.
Multi-purpose communication port
With use of the PLC and a PC, allows reading of operating
commands from the PLC, changes in setting values, angles for the
PLC, output state, and the like.
Quick change to a tachometer after completion
of adjustment
Switching of the display for the angle/number of revolutions can
be easily performed with the sheet key switches on the front panel.
Home position adjustment
Any angle can be the home position (0) via 2 methods, applying
external home position input or key operation.
This eliminates the troublesome adjustment of the home position.
Automatic timing function (FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C)
When controlling timing with a cam switch for a machine so as to
change the speed of revolution, the lag in work timing due to a
delay in actuator operation becomes a problem.
This function, an automatic timing function, corrects the lag in
timing. This is done with quick output of only the angle portion
calculated from the speed of revolution at the point when the angle
corresponds to the lag time for actuator operation.
Advanced portion
Advanced portion
Setting angle
Low-speed
Mid-speed
High-speed
Angle setting is easy with the teaching function
Cam output of On and Off angle settings is performed while the
machine is operating.
Users that found program settings for key operation to be a hassle
will be able to enjoy setting with the teaching function.
Uses
Speed changes during start-stop
A device with a speed that changes
A device where speed adjustment is needed
E-3
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
General Specifications
Source voltage
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
FC-21
DC12
Storage temperature
8W
10
+50
20
+70
35
FC-321F-C
26.4V
5W
Ambient temperature
Ambient/Storage humidity
FC-161F-C
24V
Permitted power fluctuation DC10.8
Power consumption
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
Item
(with no freezing)
85%RH(with no dewing)
Ambient environment
No corrosive gas or the like
Vibration resistance
Durability: displacement amplitude 0.5 mm 10-55 Hz 3 directions
Impact resistance
Impact resistance Durability: 500 m/s 3 directions
Noise resistance
1.5 kV between power terminals
1.0 kV between power terminals
Pulse width 1 s/rise 1 s/ square wave pulse
Protective structure
IP54: Rear panel sheet only
Dimensions (W/H/D)
95
Weight
300g
80
60.5(mm)
140
90
60.5(mm)
40
420g
90
60.5(mm)
420g
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Item
FC-81F-C
FC-161F-C
Start:1 Protect: 1
Number of input points
Home position: 1
Encoder input
H
7.5V(OFF)
FC-321F-C
Start:1 Bank entry: 3 Protect: 1
Home position: 1
L
0
2V(ON)
H
7.5
30V(OFF)
L
0
Start:1 Bank entry: 4 Protect: 1
Home position: 1
2V(ON)
Resolution: 360 or 720 per revolution (output code: gray binary)
Control input
H
Output points
8
7.5
30V(OFF)
L
0
2V(ON)
16
32
Output specifications
NPN open collector Withstand voltage: Less than 35 V/current less than 0.1 A
Total number of output areas
16
64
128
Number of revolutions for response
r/min(rpm)
300 at resolution of 360
150 at resolution of 720
1600 at resolution of 360
800 at resolution of 720
1600 at resolution of 360
800 at resolution of 720
Max. 550
Max. 250
Max. 250
Output response time
s
s
Max. 2 s
8 (Banks 0
Source start time
7)
10 (Banks 0
Number of banks
Memory
EEPROM
Resolution
360 or 720 per revolution (selected with a dip switch)
CW/CCW directional switching
Switching with a dip switch
RUN output
Normally on in Run/Adjustment mode (switched with a dip switch)
Display
Angle or rotation speed(selected with a dip switch)
Home position adjustment
Home position as arbitrary position
Protect, copy, pulse output, and communication
Special functions
Protect
RS-232C FC designated protocol
Timing function
None
Present
Accessories
Metal fittings for installation
Communication
E-4
s
Present
9)
Panel Layout and Description
Front panel
Display status
Angle/Speed of revolution
Setup status
Operating
keys
Output status
Start input
FC-21
External home
position
Normal
Mode
Dip switch
[Rear Panel]
Encoder connector
Terminal (cover attached)
Wiring
DC+ DC
HOME I.C
1
ST
PRO
0
3
5
4
2
7
6
O.C
Fuse
Output common
Power source for
cam switch
External home
position input
Load power
(less than 35V)
Load
power source
Start input
DC12/24V
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
(indicates what is displayed)
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C
0 1
2 3
4 5 6 7
Output
Protection input
(connected for protection)
1. The external starting point input is connected for DC output with no chattering.
2. Output common (0.C), input common (1.C), and power source-(DC-) terminals are short-circuited internally.
E-5
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
Panel Layout and Description
Front panel
Display status
(Indicates what is displayed)
Setup status
Bank/FUN
Operating
keys
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Angle/speed of revolution
Start input
External home
position
FC-161F-C
FC-321F-C has 32-point
output display.
Normal
Mode
[Rear Panel]
Encoder connector
Output connector
Terminal block (with cover attached)
E-6
Transmission connector
Dip switch
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
Wiring
DC+
DC
ST
B1
B0
B2
B3
HOME
PRO
I.C
Input common
Power source for
cam switch
Protection input
Start input
0
1
2
3
Bank input
FC-80-C/160
/320
power source
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
(connected for protection)
DC12/24V
External home position
1. Bank input 3 is for FC-321F-C only.
2. The external starting point input is connected for DC output with no chattering.
3. Output common (0.C), input common (1.C), and power source-(DC-) terminals are short-circuited internally.
FC-21
Connector Pin-out
FC-161F-C
Working range
4
5
6
7
12 13 14 15
0
1
2
3 O.C 8
20 21 22 23
28 29 30 31
FC-321F-C
Working range
9 10 11 O.C 16 17 18 19 O.C 24 25 26 27 O.C
Fuse
Load
power
(less than 35 V)
Load
0
7
8
Output
15
Output
16
23
24
Output
31
Output
Switching cam switch output/RUN output is possible only for 31.
Only pin-31 can be selected for either CAM output or RUN output.
Connector for Connection (optional)
Acceptable for use in rose-wire types and terminal unit
types to effectively reduce wiring.
Terminal unit
Cam switch
U-
JT
TF-32D
FC-161F-C
FC-321F-C
Cable connecting the cam switch
and terminal unit TF-32D
U-30JH (3-m cable)
LC-013 (1-m cable)
LC-010
(40 P connector)
Fujitsu Ltd.
Connector FCN-361J040-AU
Cover
FCN-360C040-J1
E-7
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
Initial Settings
Initial settings
Switch 1:
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Power
OFF
Switch 2:
Setting dip switches
FC-80-C/160
/320
CCW 720 RUN
ON
OFF
CW 360 cam
Setting for
shipment
from factory
FC-21
Power
ON
Clear all output
settings
Clear all output settings in setup or teaching mode.
Setting
NG
ON
OFF
ENT
Clear home position adjustment in
FC-161F-C: Banks 0-7
teaching mode.
FC-321F-C: Banks 0-9
CLR
Initial settings
complete
Select encoder resolution.
360: When using resolution of 360/revolution for the encoder
720: When using resolution of 720/revolution for the encoder
Switch 3: Select when using RUN output.
Cam: When using all output as cam output
RUN: When using specified output as RUN output*
Possible output for RUN output
FC-81F-C: Output 7
FC-161F-C: Output 15
FC-321F-C: Output 31
RUN output is ON during normal operation when in
Run/Adjustment mode; when an error occurs, it goes
OFF.
CLR
Clear home position
adjustment
Select the direction of rotation.
CW: Angle increase when encoder shaft is rotated in
CW direction.
CCW: Angle increase when encoder shaft is rotated in
CCW direction.
HOME
ENT
Note) Each bank must be cleared.
Setups for output and setups, changes and clearance
for teaching mode can be done.
Verify that output area settings/home position adjustment values are correct.
OK
Adjustment
NG
Adjustment mode
Performs fine adjustment of output area settings in trial
operation (When not needed, Run in Run mode).
Verity that output is appropriate.
OK
Run
E-8
Run mode
Runs the device.
Determine CW or CCW
by facing the encoder shaft.
List of Operations
Operating mode
SELECT key alternates the angle and rotational speed in the display.
3
Selecting bank number
BANK
4
Selecting output number
Select the output number with the push of the OUT key or the OUT key.
The lamp position for output display changes with each push of the key.
5
Read-out of output area
settings
After specifying the bank number
6
Clear 1 output area
settings
Clear an output area setting that has been read-out with operation of the CLR
7
Clear all output area
settings
After selecting the bank number
Clear all output area
settings within the
specified bank
After selecting the bank number
10
Clear all output area
settings
Writing output area
settings
Wrting output area
11 Settings
(teaching)
The bank number.
or READ
and output number, the READ key
Clear home position
adjustment
operation of the CLR
and output number, clear output area settings with
)) ENT keys.
(or OUT (
OUT
, clear settings with operation of the CLR BANK
ENT keys. However, home position adjustment settings are not cleared.
Clears settings with operation of the
ON
CLR
OFF
Change output area
settings
adjustment settings are not cleared.
Select the bank number* and output number. After displaying the angle to set with the
or
keys, written with the
Select the bank number
ON
OFF
key (ON angle and OFF angle are set in sequence).
and output number. After turning the encoder, the position to
set is halted and written with the
ON
OFF
key
(ON angle and OFF angle are set in sequence).
and stop rotating the encoder at the machinery starting point.
The home position angle is selected with the
Set the bank number
CLR
HOME
HOME
key.
ON
OFF
key.
. Home position adjustment is erased with operation of the
ENT keys and the encoder output angle is displayed as-is.
key or
key
and values to change will be displayed.
Then, press the
Fine adjustment of the
output area settings
15 during operation
(only effective when
Start input is ON)
Note
ENT keys. However, home position
Read-out values for the ON angle or OFF angle to set. Push the
14
ENT keys
when output area to be erased has been read-out.
The home position becomes the written zero angle with the
13
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Note
key is pushed. Alternates ON and OFF angle.
Set the bank number
Setting of home
12
position adjustment
FC-80-C/160
/320
key enters into the selected mode.
FC-21
ENT
Selecting display
9
Run
MODE key selects the Mode. Selection is in sequence from the current mode
Setting
Teaching
Adjustment
Run
2
8
Adjustment
Selecting operating
mode.
Setting
1
Operating procedures
Teaching
Function
ON
OFF
key to write values that changed.
Read-out values for the ON angle or OFF angle to set. The angle is increased via the
key and decreased via the
key.
Changes are complete (fine adjustment) and output operations change at the same time.
Note) Corresponds only to FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C.
An
means that the FC-81F-C does not have
BANK
,
OUT , or
For setting operation of special functions, refer to the Operations Manual.
READ
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
keys.
E-9
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
Error Codes
Error code
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
FC-21
Explanation
Dip switch settings are incorrect.
Verify rotary endocer resolution.
Rotary enocder malfunction.
Rotary encoder code not continous.
Rotary enocder malfunction (not connected).
Cut or short of the connection cable for the rotary encoder.
Affected by external noise.
Memory change error
Contents of setting values (output, home position
adjustment, or timing) have changed
Affected by excessive noise.
All clear and then re-input all settings.
Rotational speed error
Cam switch cannot repsond to the rotary endoeer
rotational speed.
Verfity rotational speed for the rotary encoder.
Verfity rotary encoder resolution.
Output area settings overlap.
Erase overlapping setting values or reset after
changing.
Ouput area settings are protected.
Verify protection input.
Bank input for a bank thta is not present is specified.
Verify bank input.
E20
Rotary encoder
code error
E21
E30
Setting
LED blinking
Cause/Corrective Action
Rotary encoder resolution and cam switch resolution
specifiecations do not match.
Rotary encoder
connection error
E18
E19
FC-80-C/160
/320
Details
Output of a rotary encoder that is not present is detected.
Setting value error
Bank Display
Bank error
A F
Timing function for the FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
This function adnavces via setting of the output ON/OFF angle in proportion with the encoder's rotational speed. Effective for correction of
machinery system delays.
1
Settings/Operation
Enter setting mode.
Push the FUN key and specify 0.
Set the output number with OUT or OUT keys.
Set the timing rotational speed with
or
keys. Write with the
Set the timing rotational angle with
or
keys. Write with the
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
key.
key.
Push the BANK key and return to setting mode.
2 Timing operation
r
Timing angle
Timing rotational speed
r (rotational speed that the endoder is actiually turning at)
Cam output
Timing operation angle
(Timing at which output is advancing)
B
r
A
0
r
B
OFF
ON
A
OFF
ON
r
Notes:
OFF angle should set to at 2 degrees or more. With a short
delay, any change in revolution speed is reflected to the
angle for the selected output.
Revolution speed is reset to zero if angle is not incremented
for 170 ms.
As shown in the following table, response speed and time
depend on how many dynamic angle are set. Up to eight
angles can be set for the outputs 0 to 7.
r
Rotational speed
Timing setting points
1
Output response time (ouptuptu 0-) s
305
Responserotational 360 resolution 1 0 0 0
speed (revoltons/min.) 720 resoltion
500
E-10
2
315
900
450
3
330
800
400
4
350
700
350
5
370
600
300
6
385
500
250
7
415
500
250
8
420
400
200
(in mm)
External Dimensions
95
51
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
9.5
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-81F-C/FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C
FC-21
80
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
140
9.5
51
90
FC-161F-C
FC-321F-C
Boring Dimensions for Installation
FC-81F-C
FC-161F-C / FC-321F-C
90
135
0.5
0.5
0.5
85
75
0.5
Panel thickness
0.5-4 mm
R0
2.5
R0
2.5
E-11
With their convenience and efficiency, the camoperated switches improve your productivity. The
small body allows easy installation and movement.
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320
Merits
Easy operation
With simple key operation, you can set or check values on the
digital display.
RUN time change
You can reposition the switches during runtime.
Easy setup
All you need for setup is simply choose programmed procedures.
Ten program banks are included in the FC-320, and eight banks in
the FC-160 models.
Revolution status at a glance
The circular window displays both the direction and the position
of the revolving axis.
Home position calibration
Dynamic CAM
The FC-320 models provides eight dynamic CAMS witch
automatically tune the ON/OFF timing of the CAM switch.
Switching timing is automatically controlled according to the
actuator response and the cam rotation.
Multi-purpose communication port
Except FC-80-C, all models integrate a port for connection to a
PC. Programs and data can be transferred to and from your
desktop. On the FC-160 and 320 models, programs can be copied
between two corresponding banks.
The absolute encoders for sensor
Three models of rotary encoders are available: TRD-NA, TRDKL and TRD-K. The TRD-NA encoder is 35 mm thick, with
external diameter of 50 mm. Also available are TRD-K reinforced
series and TRD-KL adaptive series.
Precise positioning
The absolute encoders provides higher precision and linearity than
resolvers. They are fully compatible to one another to allow easy
replacement.
Quick response
The switches respond to cam revolving as fast as 1,600 rpm, or
800 rpm at 720 resolution.
Protection against errors
You can prevent potential errors by short circuiting the protect
terminal.
E-12
The position and angle of the encoder is automatically adjusted.
Applicable to DIN rails
The switch can be installed on DIN standard rails, or fixed with
screws.
Battery-less
The counter uses an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells.
Item
FC-80-C
Source voltage
DC10.8
Power consumption
5W
FC-160
26.4V
FC-320
264V
AC85
20VA
Ambient temperature
10
+50
Storage temperature
20
+70
(with no freezing)
Ambient/Storage humidity
35
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
N/A because no insulation is provided AC 2kV for one minute for each of AC input, I/O and frame interconnections
between DC power and I/O terminals. 20M for one minute for each of AC input, I/O and frame interconnections
Vibration resistance
Durable for along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitued No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
85%RH(with no dewing)
Shock resistance
Durable along three axes at 490 m/s2(50 G) No error along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G)
Noise resistance*
1.0kV between power terminals
1.5kV between power terminals
(square wave pulse with 1 s width and 1 ns rise time)
105
Weight
300g
Accessary
None
100
66
140
mm
100
66
195
mm
450g
100
66
mm
550g
FC-21
Dimensions
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Item
FC-80-C
FC-160
Number of input points Start: 1 Protect: 1
Start: 1
Resolution
360 or 720 per revolution(selected by dip switch)
Encoder voltage
H: 7.5V(OFF)
Control voltage
H: 7.5
Output type
8
L: 0
30V(OFF)
L: 0
16
NPN open collector
Total 16 CAMS for 8 outputs
(If could be 16 CAMS for 1 output)
Start: 1
Bank entry: 4
Protect: 1
32 (8 points for Dynamic CAM)
Current: Max. 0.1A Residual voltage: Max. 1.5V
Withstand voltage: Max. 35V
Number of revolutions 300 at 360 resolution
for responser/min(rpm) 150 at 720 resolution
Total 32 CAMS for 16 outputs
(32 times per Bank)
Total 64 CAMS for 32 outputs
(64 times per Bank)
1600 at 360 resolution
800 at 720 resolution
1600 at 360 resolution (without Dyna800 at 720 resolution mic CAM)
Max. 250
Max. 250
Output reseponse
Max. 550
Response to power input
Max. 2s
Number of banks
1
Display
Angle or rotation speed (selected by dip switch)
Direction
CW/CCW (selected by dip switch)
s
s
8 (banks 0 to 7)
s (without Dynamic CAM)
10 (banks 0 to 9)
Normally ON(selected by dip switch): TEST mode
RUN output
Home position calibration
Any position can be selected as home.
Memory
EEPROM
Output pulse frequency
Protect: 1
2V(ON)
Withstand voltage
Dynamic CAM
FC-320
2V(ON)(open collector withstand voltage: Min. 14V)
Total number of
output areas
Program storage
Bank entry: 3
FC-80-C/160
/320
General Specifications
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-80-C/160/320
SRAM memory card
Outputs 0 to 7 only
Any value allowable for currently selected
resolution(one value for each output)
Use dip swich to select CAM or RUN as current output.
Memory card for FC-320, M-01F has discontinued its production.
E-13
Front Panel Description and External Dimensions
Output indicators:
(Unit: mm)
Indicate the currently selected output. Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number.
Angle or revolution speed (RPM) display
Mode indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Teaching
Revolution direction and angle: Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees.
66
105
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-80-C
2.3
FC-80-C/160
/320
8
100
Out form center
DIN rail center
FC-21
Keys
Dip switches
Terminal block
Mode switch: PRG, TEST or RUN
Switch 1:Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution.
Switch 3:Select angle or revolution speed.
Rotary encoder connector
Home position calibrator
Bore dimensions for installation
(105)
Two M4 screws
94
I.C
0
2
1
4
3
6
5
7
O.C
Common Output
Load power source
(Max. DC35V)
Load
Start input
Cam switch power Source
DC10.8 26.4V
ST
89
DC+ DC– PRO
(100)
Wiring Diagram
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Output
Protect input (activated when short circuited)
List of Error Codes
Error code
Description/Possible cause(s)
Cause/Corrective Acfion
E18
Rotary encoder connector error
Resolution is different between the rotary encoder and
the cam switch.
Change the resolution of the rotary encoder or the cam switch.
Check Dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution.
Repair the rotary encoder.
E19
Rotary encoder error or code discontinuity
The rotary encoder has counted a false signal.
The cam switch does not respond to the rotary encoder.
The rotary encoder has generated non-sequential codes.
Eliminate the sources of noise.
Check Dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution.
Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder.
Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder cables.
E21
Memory error
Home position or other setting has been changes.
Eliminate the sources of noise.
Clear all settings then re-enter the correct values.
Value of LED The value is out of allowable range
Same output has been selected more than once.
blinking
E-14
Re-enter the correct value.
Cancel the selection then re-select the output number.
Initializing
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-80-C
Start
Dip switches
Switch 1: Revolution direction(viewed from the rotary encoder)
Set the switch to ON to select CCW, or OFF to select CW.
Turn the power off.
Switch 2: Encoder resolution.
Set the switch to ON to select 720, or OFF to select 360.
Set the dip switches.
Dip swich
The settings are written to the memory.
Turn the power on.
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Switch 3: Angle or revolution speed(RPM)
Set the switch to ON to select RPM, or OFF to select angle.
ON
CLEAR
1
2
FC-80-C/160
/320
OFF
Press the following keys to clear all settings.
Select PRG mode
or Teach mode.
3
ON
OFF
Press the following keys to cancel the currently selected home position..
Select Teach mode
HOME Position ON
FC-21
CLEAR
End
Operating procedures
Available modes
RUN
TEST
Teach
PROG
Step
Procedure
PRG
TEST
RUN
1
Selecting mode
Using the Mode switch, select PRG, TEST or RUN.
2
Selecting PRG or Teach Press the MODE key to switch the mode between PRG and Teach.
3
Selecting output
Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Pressing the key once moves to the next output.
4
Reading angle
Select the output number then press the READ key. ON angle and OFF angle are read out alternately.
5
Clearing individual
settings
Select the output number for the settings to be cleard, and press the CLEAR key then the
ON
key.
6
Clearing all output
selections
Press the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR
OFF
ON
7
Clearing all settings
(except the home position)
Press the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR
OFF
ON
Select the output number for settings to be written. Using the
OFF angle. Press the
8
Writing settings
ON
Teaching the current
settings
10 Setting the home position
11
Clearing the home
position
keys, select the ON angle and the
key to write the ON angle, then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle.
Writing all possible ON angles
Select the "0" (or "0.0") degree, and press the
9
ON
key then the OFF key.
Select the output number for settings to be written. Start the rotary encoder then stop it at the desired position.
Press the
ON
key to write the ON angle, then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle.
Stop the rorary encoder at the desired home position, then press the
Press the CLEAR
key then the
ON
key.
key to clear the home position.
Current angle displayed.
Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be changed. Using the
12 Changing settings
This does not delete the
home positioning set up.
selected. Press the
ON
keys, change the angle
key to write the new ON angle, or press the
OFF
key to write
the new OFF angle. The ON/OFF indicator turns on then turns off.
Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be adjusted. Using the
Adjusting settings
13 during operation
keys, adjust the angle
selected. The new value becomes effective upon adjustment, and is reflected to the current
operation. The ON/OFF indicator flashes during adjustment.
E-15
Front Panel Description and External Dimensions
Bank indicators:
(in mm)
Indicates the currently selected bank. Press the BANK key to select the bank number.
Angle or revolution speed (RPM) display
Status indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Normal
Revolution direction and angle:
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
140
66
Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees.
2.3
Communication
port connector
(RS232C)
100
FC-80-C/160
/320
8
Out form center
DIN
rail center
FC-21
Keys
Terminal block
Dip switches:
Mode indicators:
Mode selector:
Switch 1: Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution.
Switch 3: Select angle or revolution speed. Switch 4: Select RUN or CAM.
PRG and Teach
PRG, TEST or RUN
Bore dimensions for installation
Rotary encoder connector
Output indicators:
(140)
Four M4 screws
129
Indicate the output number and its ON/OFF status selected
89
by depressing OUTPUT key.
Wiring Diagram
G
B0
ST
B2
I.C
B1 PRO
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
8
O.C
10
9
12
11
14 O.C
13
15
Load power source
(Max. DC35V)
Load
0 1 2
BANK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Outputs
8 9 1011 1213 1415 (RUN)
Outputs
PROTECT (activated when short circuited)
E-16
RUN
Common output
Common
input
Cam switch power source
AC85 264V
AC
START
AC
(100)
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-160
Front Panel Description and External Dimensions
(in mm)
Bank indicators: Indicates the bank number selected by bank input/The bank number selected by
BANK key/Record, Replay or
verify selected by + key.
Angle or revolution speed(RPM) display: Indication of angle or revolution speed/dynamic CAM angle or
revolution speed/Record, Replay or Verify
Status indicators: Angle, RPM, ON/OFF, Setup, Start, and Normal
195
Angle is displayed in units of 30 degrees.
This window also displays the SAVE,
COPY or COMPARE status.
66
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Revolution direction and angle:
100
2.3
FC-80-C/160
/320
8
Communication
port connector
(RS232C)
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-320
Center
DIN
rail center
FC-21
Keys
Terminal
block
Dip switches:
Mode indicators:
Switch 1: Selects revolution direction. Switch 2: Select encoder resolution.
Switch 3: Selects angle or revolution speed. Switch 4: Select RUN or CAM.
PRG/Teach/Dynamic CAM/Save
Bore dimensions for installation
Rotary encoder Mode selector:
connector
Output indicators:
PRG, TEST or RUN
(195)
184
89
Four M4 screws
(100)
Indicate the currently selected output. Press the OUTPUT key to select
the output number.
Wiring Diagram
G
B0
ST
B2 PRO
B1
B3
0
I.C
2
1
4
3
6
5
O.C
7
9
8
11
10
13
12
15
14
16
O.C
18
17
20
19
22
21
O.C
23
24
25
27
26
29
28
31
30
RUN
O.C
0 1 2 3
BANK
Common output
Common output
Common output
Common output
Common
input
Cam switch power source
AC85 264V
AC
START
AC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Output
Output
Outputs
Load power
source
(Max. DC35V)
Load
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (RUN)
Outputs
PROTECT (activated when short circuited)
E-17
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-160/FC-320
Initializing
Switch 1: Revolution direction(viewed from the rotary encoder)
Start
Set the switch to ON to select CCW, or OFF to select CW.
Switch 2: Encoder resolution.
Turn the power off.
Set the switch to ON to select 720, or OFF to select 360.
Switch 3: Angle or revolution speed(RPM)
Set the switch to ON to select RPM, or OFF to select angle.
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Set the dip switches.
Switch 4: RUN or CAM
Set the switch to ON to select RUN, or OFF to select CAM.
Dip switch
The settings are written to the memory.
Turn the power on.
FC-80-C/160
/320
ON
OFF
Press the following keys to clear all settings.
Select PRG mode or
Teach mode.
CLEAR
OFF
1
2
3
4
ON
Press the following keys to cancel the home position for the currently
selected bank. (FC-160: Banks 0 to 7 FC-320: Banks 0 to 9)
Select Teach mode.
FC-21
CLEAR
Home position ON
End
Operating procedures
Available modes
Procedure
Model
1
Selecting mode
MODE
TEST
RUN
Using the Mode switch, select MODE, TEST or RUN
(FC-320 ONLY)
(FC-320 ONLY)
FC-160
FC-320
FC-160
2
Selecting PRG or Teach Press the MODE key to switch the
mode in the following sequence:
3
Selecting bank
Press the BANK key to select the bank number.
4
Reading angle
Press the OUTPUT key to select the output number. Pressing the key once moves
to the next output.
FC-160
Select the output number then press the READ key. ON angle and frequency
are read out alternately.
FC-160
5
Clearing individual
settings
PRG
TEACH
D.CAM
ON
FC-160
Press the following keys in the order listed:
7
Clearing individual
bank setting
Select the bank number and output number, then
preess the following keys in the order listed:
8
Clearing all settings for
selected bank
Preess the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR
OUTPUT
9
Clearing all settings
(except the home position)
Preess the following keys in the order listed: CLEAR
OUTPUT
CLEAR
ON
FC-320
CLEAR
OUTPUT
Select the bank number and the output number. Using the
ON angle and the OFF angle. Press the
ON
ON
ON
ON
FC-160
FC-320
FC-160
FC-320
FC-160
FC-320
keys, select the
key to write the ON angle,
FC-160
then press the OFF key to write the OFF angle.
Writing ON angle and pulse frequency
Select the bank number and the output number. Using the
ON angle. Press the
Using the
ON
keys, select the
key to write the angle.
keys, select the pulse frequency. Press the
write the frequency.
E-18
FC-320
FC-320
key.
Clearing all output
selections
10 Writing settings
FC-320
FC-160
FC-320
Select the output number for the settings to be cleared, and press the CLEAR key
then the
6
SAVE
FC-320
ON
key to
RUN
TEST
SAVE
ANGLE
TEACH
PRG
Step
Available modes
Procedure
Model
13
Clearing the home
position
ON
press the OFF key to write the OFF angle.
FC-320
Stop the rotary encoder at the desired home position, then press the
FC-160
HOME
key.
FC-320
Select the bank number then preess the following keys in the order listed:
HOME
CLEAR
ON
Current angle is displayed.
the angle selected. Press the
ON
key, chang
key to write the new ON angle, or press
Adjusting settings
during operation
16 Reading dynamic CAM
FC-320
Select ON angle OFF angle to be adjusted. Using
keys, adjust the angle selected.
The new value becomes effective upon adjustment, and is reflected the current operation.
Select the bank number and the output number then press the READ key. Dynamic
CAM angle and revolution speed are read out altemately.
17 Writing dynamic CAM
angle
FC-160
the OFF key to write the new OFF angle. The ON/OFF indicator turns on then turns
off.
15
FC-160
FC-320
Select the ON angle or OFF angle to be changed. Using the
14 Changing settings
FC-160
key to write the ON angle, then
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
the desired position. Press the
FC-80-C/160
/320
12 Setting the home position
Select the bank number and input number. Start the rotary encoder then stop it at
Select the bank number and the output number. Using the
control angle and revolution speed. Press the
ON
FC-21
Teaching the current
11 settings
RUN
TEST
SAVE
ANGLE
TEACH
PRG
Step
FC-160
FC-320
FC-320
keys, select the
FC-320
key to write the settings.
Select the bank number and the output number, and prees the CLEAR key then the
18
Clearing dynamic CAM
angle
ON
key. Both the dynamic CAM angle and the revolution speed are set to zero.
FC-320
Dynamic CAM angle is cleared also by the CLEAR procedures 6,8 and 9.
19
20
21
Transferring data
between memories
Select the COPY
mode.
Using the communication port, connect two FC-160(or FC-320) units.
Press the CLEAR key then the MODE key." c0py" is diplayed on the circular window.
Press the
ON
Using the
22
key again to proceed.
Bank indicator
f
l
fc-e
e-fc
-fc-
Press the
FC-160
key, select one of the following operations.
Operation
Select SAVE, LOAD
or COPY.
ON
Circular window
SAVE: Saving data from the current unit.
LOAD: Restoring data to the current unit.
COPY: Copying data between two banks of the
current unit.
key again to proceed.
Press the BANK key to display all banks. Using the
Select source and
destination banks.
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-160/FC-320
ON
key, select the
source and the destination. "1" or "2" flashes on the circular window to indicate source
or destination as follows:
SAVE
LOAD
COPY
Angle/revolution speed display
Press the
ON
Source
Destination
Source
Destination
Source
Destination
FC-320
key again to execute the selected operation.
E-19
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-160/FC-320
List of Error Codes
Error code
E18
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
E19
E20
Description
Description/Possible cause(s)
Rotary encoder
connector error
Resolution is different between the
rotary encoder and the cam switch
Rotary encode error
Code discontinuity
The rotary encoder has counted a false signal.
The rotary encoder has generated nonsequential
codes.
Home position or other setting has been
changed.
E21
Memory error
E30
Revolution speed error
E70
E90
99
E80
89
Cause/Corrective Action
Note
Change the resolution of the rotary encoder or the cam
switch.
Verify the dip switch 2 to confirm the encoder resolution.
Repair the rotary encoder.
Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder.
Repair or re-connect the rotary encoder cables.
Eliminate source of noise
Eliminate sources of noise.
Clear all settings then re-enter the correct values.
The cam switch does not respond to the
rotary encoder.
Verify the mode and data for errors.
Verify that the PROTECT terminal is
connected.
Check the communication cable, and repair
if necessary.
Eliminate sources of noise.
Communication failed.
Communication error
COPY operation failed.
Value of
Value error
LED flashing
The flashing values is out of allowable range
Re-enter the correct value.
One of the
bank codes
A to flashing
Same bank has been selected more than once.
Selected bank does not exist.
Cancel the selection then re-select the bank
number.
Bank error
Dynamic CAM Angle and Speed
(specific to FC-320)
(1) Setting the dynamic CAM angle
Follow the procedure "17. Writing dynamic CAM angle" described earlier.
Dynamic CAM angle determines the ON and OFF angles in relation to current revolution speed.
Dynamic CAM speed is used for setting the dynamic CAM angle, and specified in 10 rpm.
(2) Relation of Dynamic Angle and Speed
r
Dynamic speed
Dynamic angle
Notes:
r (where r is the current revolution speed.)
OFF angle should be set to at least 2 degrees. With a short delay,
CAM signal
B
Angle incremented
r
any change in revolution speed is reflected to the angle for the
B point
OFF
ON
selected output.
Revolution speed is reset to zero if angle is not incremented for
170 ms.
As shown in the following table, response speed and time
A point
A
O
Revolution speed
OFF
ON
r
r
depend on how many dynamic angles are set. Up to eight angles
can be set for the outputs 0 to 7.
r
Number of settings
1
Response time ( s)
345
Response speed At 360 resolution 1 1 0 0
(rpm)
At 720 resolution 5 5 0
2
365
1000
500
3
380
900
450
4
400
800
400
5
420
700
350
6
435
600
300
7
465
500
250
8
470
500
250
Recommended application
Blank
paper
Roller
Master
Printed paper
1. An FC cam switch is used to control the OFF angle of the rotary
press. When mounting the master, use the clamp as the reference
position.
2. A rotary encoder is used to control color densities and to position
the the drive shaft of the rotary press. It can be positioned to the
precision of 1.00 mm in horizontal direction.
The system helps minimize adjustments.
Absolute rotary encoder
E-20
Motor
Other applications include control and management of conveyors,
multilayered parking lots, and manufacturing processes.
KOYO Rotary Encoders
Programmable
Cam Switches
TRD
These absolute encoders are ideal for angle control. Combined with the FC series cam switches, they
improve precision and efficiency.
TRD-NA360NWF
TRD-NA720NWF
15
35
2.5
TRD-K360-YC2
TRD-K720-YC2
33
66
13MAX.
10 3 3
5
FC-21
15 1
PC
D6
6
20
78
72
56
42
10
1
Robust
encoders
Four M4 screws
(Diameter: 0.7, Length: 12)
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Surface of installation
Three M3 tap screws
(5 mm log)
90
17 mm or less
Oil seal
FC-80-C/160
/320
45
30
8
PC
D
40
50
0.5
Small encoders
with diameter of
50 mm
5
10
120
TRD-KL360-YC2
TRD-KL720-YC2
33
PC
66
10 33
5
Four M4 screws
(Diameter: 0.7, Length: 6)
15 1
21
15
90
D6
6
Servo mounting is available.
(7)
78
72
56
42
10
1
Adaptive to all
environments
Servo mounting is available.
(27.7)
Terminal connection
FC-80-C/FC-160/FC-320
FC-81F-C (Rear face)
FC-161F-C/FC-321F-C (Rear face)
Unlock
Lock
Ring
Pin Assignment of Connector
13
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
GND
Viewed from the cam switch
Bit location and value Pin Bit location and value
720
360 No.
720
360
1
0V
8 bit6 (25) bit5 (24)
2
12V
9 bit7 (26) bit6 (25)
0
3 bit1 (2 ) Not connected 10 bit8 (27) bit7 (26)
4 bit2 (21) bit1 (20) 11 bit9 (28) bit8 (27)
5 bit3 (22) bit2 (21) 12 bit10(29) bit9 (28)
6 bit4 (23) bit3 (22) 13 Not connected
7 bit5 (24) bit4 (23)
Note: 720 and 360 indicate resolution.
Pin
No.
E-21
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-80-C/160/320
Connectors for the rotary encoders
Absolute rotary encoder
Model
Models with
standard connectors
TRD-NA NWF
TRD-NA NWF5M
Appearance
Appearance
Cable length
Model
Note
With connectors for
FC connection
2m
FC-80-C/160
/320
Connector and cable
5m
Models with relays
and connectors
TRD-NA NWE
3m
F-30GF
5m
F-50GF
10m
F-100GF
360/720
resolution
FC-21
(NPN)
2m
Models with built-in
connectors
TRD-K -YC2
Models with built-in
connectors
TRD-KL -YC2
E-22
2m
F-20ANC2
5m
F-50ANC2
2m
F-20BNC2
5m
F-50BNC2
2m
F-20ANC2A
5m
F-50ANC2A
2m
F-20BNC2A
5m
F-50BNC2A
360
resolution
720
resolution
360
resolution
720
resolution
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
MEMO
E-23
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Using an absolute encoder, these switches can turn
twenty four devices on and off at specified angles.
Merits
Easy to operate programmer
Using the E-15PJ cable, the FC-20P programming unit allows
both local and remote operations.
Up to ten banks for program storage
Bank 0
for program 0
Bank 1
for program 1
Bank 9
for program 9
Resolution Times of programmed switching
360
180/device
512
256/device
720
360/device
1024
512/device
Angles can be controlled to a precision of one degree.
Resolution can be set to 360, 512, 720 or 1,024.
Battery-less
The switches use an EEPROM to eliminate the use of cells.
Dynamic programming
You can re-program procedures during runtime.
Tape storage
The FC-models support tapes for storage of programs.
Home position calibration
The position and angle of the encoder is automatically adjusted.
Write-protected programs
You can protect your programs from writing, modification and
removal.
Teach option
During setup, you can customize your programs according to your
needs.
Self diagnosis
During operation, any errors are reported with displayed codes.
E-24
Front Panel Layout and Description
Position display
ON or OFF angle, home position, selected key or mode
(PRG, TEST or RUN mode)
Angle after home position calibration(TEST or RUN mode)
Output status display
Cam numbers and status (PRG, TEST or RUN mode)
Output status after angle input (TEST or RUN mode)
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Revolution speed (TEST or RUN mode)
FC-80-C/160
/320
Use SHF key to switch cams between 1 to 16 and 17
to 24.
Bank display
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
FC-21
Bank selected by BANK key(PRG or RUN
mode)
Bank selected by BANK SELECT signal(TEST
or RUN mode)
4th digit of position value
FC-20P Programmer
ON/OFF
: Lights when ON angle is displayed.
Flashes when OFF angle is displayed.
RUN
Decimal
point key
Ten keys
: Lights in TEST or RUN mode.
SHF
: Flashes when SHF key is pressed.
POWER
: Lights when power is on.
CPU
: Lights when an error occurred on CPU.
BNK key:
Selects a bank in PRG or run mode.
OUT key:
Selects a cam in PRG, TEST or RUN mode.
REF key:
Reads angle in PRG, TEST or RUN mode.
TCH key:
Reads home position in PRG, TEST or RUN mode.
Select Teach option in PRG mode.
C
SHF key:
Selects a cam range, or selects a specific operation in
combination with another key.
key:
Increments angle by one degree in TEST mode.
Increments angle by one degree during output status
display in all modes.
key:
Decrements angle by one degree in TEST mode.
Decrements angle by one degree during output
status display in all modes.
key:
Displays ON/OFF angle in PRG, TEST or RUN mode.
key:
Executes a program.
key:
Clears a setting, error, cam selection, or previous
operation in PRG mode, or clears readout value in
TEST or RUN mode.
SAVE
SHF
: Saves program in PRG mode.
LOAD
SHF
: Restores program in PRG mode.
VERIFY
F
key:
Selects a function specific to FC-21.
SHF
: Checks program with tape.
E-25
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Output status display
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Cam numbers and status
(PRG, TEST or RUN mode)
Output status after angle input(TEST or RUN mode)
START
BANK
CAM
FC-80-C/160
/320
0V
Lights in RUN mode
FC-21
Lights when an
error occurred
on CPU
Lights when
power is on
Programmer connector
0V G
CAM
AC power
CAM or RUN
AM or BANK 4
Position or revolution speed display
Bank display
ON/OFF angle, home position or key status (PRG mode)
Angle after home position calibration (TEST or RUN mode)
Revolution speed (TEST or RUN mode)
Bank selected by BANK key
(PRG mode)
Bank selected by BANK SELECT signal
(TEST or RUN mode)
Dip switches
CW
CCW
FC-21
Switch number
1
2
3
4
5
Select
Direction
Resolution
Resolution
Number of
output points
CAM 24
512 1024/revolution 720 1024/revolution
24
RUN
Enable
360 720/revolution
16
CAM
Diable
Position
ON
CCW
OFF
CW
360 512/revolution
6
7
8
Write protect Allowable range at 720 resolution Reserved
0
0
359.5
719
CW means the current value increases when the switch turns clockwise, viewed from the encoder axis and CCW means the current value increases
when the switch turns counter clockwise, viewed from the encoder axis.
E-26
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
General Specifications
Items
Specification
120V
FC-21 : AC90
FC-21-1: AC93
195
264V
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
30VA
50
20
Ambient/Storage humidity 35
70
85
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Ambient temperature 0
Storage temperature
126V
240V
(with no freezing)
RH (with no dewing)
Withstand voltage
AC 2kV 1min.
Insulation resistance
Min. 20M
Vibration resistance
Durable for along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.5 mm amplitude
No error along three axes at 10 to 55 Hz with 0.35 mm amplitude
Shock resistance
Durable along three axes at 98 m/s2 (10 G)
Noise resistance
1kV between power terminals(square wave pulsa with 1 s width, 1 ns rise
time, positive/negative polarity, source synchronization and 0 to 360 phase)
Weight
2kg
DC500V
Each of AC input, I/O and
frame interconnections
FC-80-C/160
/320
Power consumption
180
FC-21
Source voltage
Storage tape interface
Item
Specification
Baud rate
830
Modulation
FSK "1" : 2kHz
Head/
End Mark
2kHz
File numbers
0 to 999 arbitrarily
"0" : 1kHz
Note: Use data recorder designed for personal computers.
Music tape recorder are not recommended.
E-27
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Mechanical and Performance Specifications
Specification
Item
Number of input
points
Encoder inut
FC-21
RUN: 1
BANK: 4
10-bit Gray binary codes
Use connector specific to the encoder.
Resolution
360, 512, 720 or 1,024 per revolution (selected by dip switch)
Number of output points
24 or 16 (selected by dip switch)
Output type
Photo-isolated transistor open collector
Voltage: 30V 0.1A (outputs 1 24)
RUN
Normally ON in TEST or RUN mode
May be switched to CAM 24 by dip switch.
Times of ON/
OFF switching
180 at 360 resolution
256 at 512 resolution
Max.
360 at 720 resolution
512 at 1,024 resolution
Response
revolution speed
Number of
banks/programs
ON-OFF interval
resolution 360
resolution 512
resolution 720
resolution 1024
Number of banks
10
7
7
4
5
3
3
2
3
3600rpm
2520rpm
1800rpm
1260rpm
Resolution
360
512
720
1024
2
1
2400rpm 1200rpm
1680rpm
840rpm
1200rpm
600rpm
840rpm
420rpm
Number of outputs
16
24
16
24
16
24
16
24
Direction
CW or CCW(viewed from encoder)(selected by dip switch)
Write-protect
ON or OFF (selected by dip switch)
Select ON to disable write, modification and removal.
Home position
0
0
0
0
359 at 360 resolution
511 at 512 resolution
719 at 720 resolution
1023 at 1024 resolution
Program memory
EEPROM
Output status
display
Programmer panel: Red LED for 16 outputs
(from 1 to16 or 17 to 24)
Main panel:
Red LED (for 24 outputs)
Bank status display
Programmer panel: Red LED for 1-digit numbers with height of 8 mm
Main panel: Red LED for 1-digit numbers with height of 8 mm
Position display
Programmer panel: Red LED for 3- or 4-digit numbers with
height of 8 mm
Main panel:
Red LED for 4-digit numbers with
height of 8 mm
E-28
FC-21
I/O Circuits
BANK
Terminal number1
1
2
2
3
4
3
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 DC24V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
START
CAM outputs
17
12V
20
C5
21
C4
22
C3
23
C2
24
C1
25
C10
26
C9
27
C8
28
Load current: 0.1A
Withstand voltage 30V
1k
2.2
0V
12V
0V
0V 0V
0V
12V
12V
1.2k
Same as the
circuit on the left
29
C7
0V
300
0V
Absolute
encoder
Load current: 0.1A
Withstand voltage 30V
FC-80-C/160
/320
1
C6
FC-21
Specified connector
C11(C12)
Load current: 0.1A
Withstand voltage 30V
4.7k
C15
2.2
2.2
C16
Shield
Encoder connector
C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16
C7
C8
0V
C9 C10
Terminal 18
number
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
30
31
32
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
(Viewed from the FC-21 cam switch)
33
34
L
DC24V
C1
24
G
COM
DC24V
CAM outputs
100
200
AC power source
BANK4
Terminal Assignment
No.
Name
Function
Input Specification
Description
No.
Negative common Terminal common to negative I/O
1
0V
2
START START input Disables all CAM outputs when turned off (except in RUN mode)
3
BANK1
4
BANK2
5
BANK3
6
OUT1
Selects a bank.
CAM outputs
Turn corresponding outputs on or off
according to current settings.
NPN open collector output: DC24V 0.1A
Withstand voltage: Max. 30V
OUT23 CAM/BANK Selects BANK 4 when resolution is 360 and number
of outputs is 16. Otherwise, selects CAM 23.
BANK4 switch
29
OUT24 CAM/RUN
switch
RUN
OUT 24 can be switched to CAM
or RUN
30
0V
Negative common
Terminal common to negative I/O
31
G
GND
Grounds chassis or transformer shielded cable.
32
COM
33
100
34
200
100V
200V
AC power source
Input voltage
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
28
Encoder
input
3mA
Max. 0.2mA Max. 2V Min. 10V
12mA
Max. 2mA Max. 4V Min. 8V
12mA
Max. 2mA Max. 4V Min. 8V
C10
2
28
START input
Function
C1
20
BANK
SELECT
input
27 OUT22
Name
START START input
3
BANK1
4
BANK2
5
BANK3
23
BANK4
BANK input
Encoder power source
No.
C11
C12
Name
Function
Output voltage tolerance Output capacity
12V Encoder power source DC10.8
13.2V
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Max. 70mA
E-29
I/O signals
ENCODER
"L" active
BANK SELECT
ENCODER signal is used to control the absolute encoder and the
cam switch. To enter this signal, connect the encoder connector to
the cam switch connector. Using Dip switches 2 and 3, set the
resolution to 360, 512, 720 or 1,024. This resolution determines
the number of banks. For details, refer to the description of the
BANK SELECT signal.
FC-21
Dip switches
FC-21
2
3
Resolution
360
512
720
1024
Dip switch 2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Dip switch 3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Applicable models of absolute encoders
TRD-K -YCS
(Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024)
TRD-K -YPS
(Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024)
TRD-K -YC2
(Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024)
TRD-KL -YC2
(Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024)
TRD-NA NW
(Resolution: 360, 512, 720 or 1,024)
"L" active
BANK SELECT signals are used to select a bank (i.e. program).
Banks are selected as shown in Tables A below. Tables B show
the number of available banks in relation to resolution and the
number of outputs.
FC-21
BANK SELECT signal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BANK SELECT
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Number
4
of banks Resolution
10
OFF
360
7
360
OFF
7
512
OFF
4
512
OFF
720
5
OFF
3
720
OFF
1024
3
OFF
1024
2
OFF
ON
ON Table A
The START signal controls the CAM output signals according to
programmed instructions. All CAM outputs are turned off when
the START signal turns to the HIGH level.
Run input
OFF
ON
OFF
CAM output
OFF
ON
OFF
200ms MAX.
E-30
10ms MAX.
Table B
As shown below, a bank should be selected before the START
signal is turned on.
START
OFF
ON
10ms MIN.
"L" active
16
24
16
24
16
24
16
24
BANK 4 is used as an output terminal when the number of outputs is 24.
BANKS SELECT
START
Number
of banks
CAM signal turns on or off according to programmed angle.
Using Dip switch 3 or 4, set the number of outputs to 16 or 24.
RUN signal turns on or off to indicate the status in different modes
as follows:
Status
CPU error
Memory error
Low voltage
Other errors
Normal
Dip swich
4
RUN
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Depending on the error, RUN may not turn off.
The following table shows the output numbers selected:
OFF
ON
Mode
TEST
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Number of outputs Output numbers Terminal numbers
16
1 16
6 21
6 29
24
1 24
CAM 24 can be switched to RUN by the dip switch 4 or 5. In this
case, the number of outputs is reduced to 23.
FC-20
In response to ENCODER signal, CAM signal delays as follows:
FC-21
FC-21
PRG
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Dip switch
ON : RUN
ENCODER input
OFF :CAM 24
4
CAM output
130 s MAX.
FC-21
Dip switch
ON : RUN
OFF : CAM 2
5
RUN turns on within 35 seconds after PRG mode is switched to
RUN mode or TEST mode.
Connecting the encoder and the cam switch
Programmable cam switch FC-20/FC-21
Absolute encoder
TRD-K
-Y S
12
1
Encoder power
source(12V)
10
0V
12V
Angle
15
0V
16
B
32
G
33
34
200
31
0V
100
30
COM
Connector
A
AC power source
Keep the encoder cable away from power lines of motors and
clutches.
The shielded cable of the encoder is not connected to its ground
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
"L" active
RUN
FC-80-C/160
/320
"L" active
CAM
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Connect the 0 V terminal 30 to the ground terminal 31.
Using a cable with a section area of 3 to 5.5 mm2 connect the
points A and B as shown.
cable or the frame. Using the specified connector, connect it to
the 0 V terminal.
E-31
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Initializing the cam switch
1
Turn the power off. Connect the FC-20P programmer and the encoder to the cam switch. Set the dip switches to the desired positions.
Write protect should be set to OFF.
2
Select the PRG mode, then turn the power off.
3
According to the dip swich setting, memory allocation.
For the code output setting end origirl calibration valve vary. Perform Step 20.
Programming procedures
Available modes
Step
Procedure
1
Selecting PRG mode
Using the Mode switch, select the PRG mode.
2
Selecting TEST mode
Using the Mode switch, select the TEST mode.
3
Selecting RUN mode
Using the Mode switch, select the RUN mode.
4
Selecting bank
PRG TEST RUN
BNK
Press the BANK key to select the bank number.
5
6
Clearing all settings
for selected bank
Intializing the home
position
Press the following keys in the order listed:
C
3
4
8
Except the home position, all settings for the specified bank are cleared.
0
Press the following keys in the order listed: REF
OUT
7
Writing cam settings
ON angle
Cam number
Output number
OFF angle
Omit the cam number if it is already selected.
OUT
8
Teaching the cam
settings
TCH
Cam number
Run the
machine
being controlled
Current ON angle
TCH
Run the
machine
being controlled
Current OFF angle
Omit the cam number if it is already selected.
OUT
Cam number
9
Reading ON angle
ON angle(may be omitted)
ON angle closest to the entered value is read out.
If the value is omitted, positive ON angle closest to zero is read out.
Using the
keys, specify other ON angles to be read.
OUT
Angle (may be omitted)
10
Reading cam status
Cam status at the entered angle is read out.
If the angle is omitted, status at the angle zero is read out.
Cam number
Use the
Cam status
E-32
keys to increment or decrement angles.
FC-21
Available mode
Step
Procedure
FC-21
PRG TEST RUN
Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be cleared.
11
Clearing angle settings
Press the following keys:
C
The specified ON or OFF angle is cleared,
together with the corresponding OFF angle or ON angle.
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
13
Adjusting settings
during operation
Reading current angle
Using the
keys, adjust the angle selected.
Using the
keys to increment or decrement the angle by one degree.
FC-80-C/160
/320
12
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be adjusted.
Press the REF key to read the current angle of the cam.
14
Programming the
home position
FC-21
Stop the machine at its home position.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
REF TCH
Angle(may be omitted)
The entered angle is programmed as the home position of the machine.
If the angle is omitted, current angle is programmed as home position.
Follow the step 9 above to read ON angle or OFF angle to be changed.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
15
Changing settings
SHF OUT
New ON/OFF angle
Press the following keys in the order listed:
16
Saving data to tape
SHF
SAVE Program number
All settings and home position are saved.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
17
Restoring data from
tape
SHF
LOAD
Program number
Data for the specified program is restored.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
18
Checking data
with tape
SHF
VERIFY Program number
Data for the specified program is checked.
Follow the step 16, 17 or 18 above.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
19
Saving, restoring or
checking data for a
selected bank.
BNK
Bank number
Data for the specified bank is saved, restored or checked.
Press the following keys in the order listed:
20
Clearing all setting and
the home position
F
9
4
2
All settings for all banks are cleared, and the home position is reset to zero.
E-33
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
Available modes
Step
FC-21
PRG TEST RUN
Press the following keys to display current position:
F
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
21
FC-80-C/160
/320
Procedure
Displaying position
or revolution speed
1
Press the following keys to display current revolution speed:
F
2
F
22
BNK Press the following keys to display current bank number
Displaying bank
number
Press
C
key and
F
key at the same to display the previously selected bank.
FC-21
Press the following keys to specify the source and destination banks:
BNK
23
Transferring data
between banks
Source bank number
F
3
Destination bank number
Press the following keys:
24
Setting the frequency
(60 pulses) per
revolutin
OUT
Output number
F
4
This operation is unavailable for the resolution 512 and 1,024.
List of Error Codes
Error
code
Name
Possible cause
Corrective Action
E01
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
E17
E18
E21
E22
E25
Key entry error
Bank number error
Cam number error
Angle error
Write protect error
Duplicate angle
Dip switch error
BNK SELECT error
ENCODER error
Data memory error
Program memory error
Unmatched data
Keys were not pressed as required.
The entered bank number does not exist.
The entered cam number does not exist.
The entered angle does not exist.
Write was attempted in write-protected mode.
Same angle has been set more than once.
A dip switch has been repositioned.
The selected BANK SELECT number does not exist.
The selected ENCODER number does not exist.
Data has been changed.
Program has been changed.
Data in memory does not match data in tape.
Check the operating procedures.
Check the dip switches 2 and 3 to confirm the correct number.
Check the dip switch 3 to confirm the correct number.
Check the dip switch 2 to confirm the correct angle.
Turn the power off, then turn the dip switch 5 off to enable writing.
Follow the step 9, 11 or 7 to clear the setting, then re-enter the value.
Turn the power, then set the dip switch to the correct position. Select the
PRG mode then turn the power on.
Check the dip switch 2 to confirm the current resolution, and check the ENCODER connection.
Turn the power off, then check the dip switches. Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on.
Turn the power off, then check the program. Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on
Clear wrong data, and save or restore correct data to memory or tape.
E26
Unmatched data and dip
switch setting
Data in tape does not match the
setting of a dip switch.
Turn the power off, then set the dip switch to the correct position.
Select the PRG mode, then turn the power on.
Note: No error is displayed when the AC power lowers or shuts down.
Use the C key to clear error codes.
E-34
External Dimensions
(in mm)
(80)
210
56
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
162
138
M4
FC-80-C/160
/320
200
(24)
Encoder connector
Model
Models with cables
and connectors
TRD-K -YPS
Connector and cable
Appearance
Models with
standard connectors
TRD-K -YCS
FC-21
Applicable models of rotary encoders and cables with connectors
Absolute rotary encoder
Appearance
Model
2m
F-50J
F-150J
5m
15m
2m
F-50J
F-150J
2m
Models with built-in
connectors
TRD-K -YC2
F-20C2
2m
Models with built-in
connectors
TRD-KL -YC2
Models with built-in
cables
TRD-NA NW
F-20C2A
MR-16L
2m
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
MR-16M
5m
E-35
FC-21
FC-80-C/160
/320
FC-81F-C
161F/321F-C
Programmable
Cam Switches
FC-21
MEMO
E-36
Application Examples
Packaging uniform quantities
Grouping bars into same quantities
Electronic counter
Electronic
counter
Fence
Conveyor A
Control
board
Photoelectric
sensor
Timer
Control
board
Solenoid
Proximity
switch
Shutter
Conveyor B
Clutch
brake
Metal fragment
Motor
Proximity switch
The photoelectric sensor generates a pulse signal as it detects each product
falling from the conveyor. The electronic counter counts the number or
pulses generated. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter
generates a signal to open the hopper's shutter. The products are ejected
into a box then the next vacant box is conveyed to the same position as the
previous one.
Partitioning products into same quantities
Each bar is brought by the conveyor A to the fence. This make the fence
swing toward the proximity sensor and activates the sensor to feed the bar
onto the conveyor B. The electronic counter counts pulses generated by the
proximity sensor. When the count has reached a preset number, the counter
generates a signal to stop the conveyor A. The conveyor B also stops after
a time set by the timer.
Cutting materials to uniform length
Electronic counter
Cutter
Control
board
Reflex
photoelectric
sensor
Electronic counter
Tact
feeder
Belt conveyor
Stopper
Rotary
encoder
Threaded rod
Motor
Tact conveyor
The electronic counter counts the products fed by the conveyor and
detected by the reflex photoelectric sensor. When the count has reached a
preset number, the counter activates the tact feeder to advance the
conveyor by one step for the next counting cycle.
Counting bottles and checking for caps
Timer
As the threaded rod rotates, the stopper is moved by a preset distance. The
number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary
encoder, and counted by the electronic counter. When the count has
reached a preset number, the cutter is activated to cut the material to a
fixed length.
Sorting materials by length
Control
gate
Multitooth cam
Electronic counter
Control
board
Dual preset
counter
Proximity
switch 1
Proximity switch 2
Proximity 1
Metal plate
Proximity 2
Rejection signal
Accepted material
Proximity switch A
Proximity switch B
Rejected material
The proximity switch checks each bottle for a cap. At the same time, it
activates the counter to count the bottles and display the count. When no
cap is detected within a specified time, the internal timer generates an
alarm.
The proximity switch A generates pulse signals when it detects the rotation
of the multitooth cam. The electronic counter counts the number of pulses
while a metal plate is being detected by the proximity switch B. This count
is compared with the upper and lower limits that specify acceptable size of
plates. Any plate outside the tolerance is rejected.
F-1
Application Examples
Winding wire for constant turns
Proximity switch
Wire
Marking at same intervals
Timer
Detect roller
Rotary
encoder
Cutter
Disk shaped dog switch
Electronic
counter
Solenoid
Brake
Reduction
gear
Stamp
Dual preset
counter
Bobbin
Stop signal
(second setting)
Motor
Preset
interval
Feed roller
Feed motor
Deceleration signal
(first setting)
The proximity switch A generates plus signals when it detects the rotation
of the bobbin. The pulse count is entered to the counter, and compared with
dual preset values: the expected total number of turns of wire, and the total
number minus one. When the pulse count has reached the second setting,
the reduction gear is activated. The bobbin stops completely when the
count equals the first setting. At the same time, the timer activates the
cutter to cut the wire.
Detecting the center of workpieces
As the feed roller rotates, the workpiece is moved to a preset distance. The
number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary
encoder, and counted by the electronic counter. When the count has
reached a preset number, the counter generates a signal to activate the
stamp.
Spacing rolled materials
Rotary encoder
Frequency demultiplier (1/2)
Gate
Servo motor
Electronic counter
Rotary
encoder
Photoelectric
sensor
Control
board
Motor
Electronic counter
Roller mill
The photoelectric sensor generates pulse signals when a workpiece starts to
cover its light. The pulse frequency is halved by the frequency demultiplier
then processed by the rotary encoder for counting. The workpiece is
centered when the count has reached a preset number.
Production management
As the threaded rod rotates, the material is fed by a preset length. The
number of rotations is converted to the number of pulses by the rotary
encoder then counted by the electronic counter. When the count has
reached a preset number, it stops the motor that controls the spacing.
Positioning a grinder
Workpiece
Clutch
Feed motor
Photoelectric
sensor
Clock pulse
generator
Electronic counter
(for product count display)
Set to
expected
production
Completion
signal
Electronic counter
Electronic counter
(for frequency demultiplier) (for standard production display)
The first counter is set to the expected number of products, and the second
counter is set to the standard number of products. The third counter works
with the frequency demultiplier and the clock pulse generator. The clock
controls output rate at ten pulses/second to provide the time required for
one product. The third counter counts the time elapsed for the current
production. It warns an overtime when this value exceeds the standard
production time.
F-2
xim
ity
sw
h
itc
Rotary encoder
o
Pr
Electronic counter 1
Electronic counter 2
Electronic counter 3
When the proximity switch detects a workpiece fed in position, it activates
the motor to rotate the workpiece and accelerate the grinder. The electronic
counters are used to change the speeds of the motor and the grinder.
Application Examples
Displaying the total number of packaged products
Displaying the speeds of moving objects
Four products per
package
Photoelectric
sensor A
Photoelectric
sensor B
Tachometer
Package sensor
Tachometer
The tachometer counts packages containing a fixed number of products. It
is to display the total number of products. For example, it should be set to
"4" for packages each containing four products.
Displaying press process time
The tachometer measures the speed of an object moving from the
photoelectric sensor A to the sensor B. Using the preset scale, the speed is
calculated from the "time lag" between the two sensors and their distance.
Displaying flow rates
Proximity switch
Press
Tachometer
Flow meter
Tachometer
A dog switch is installed so it activates the proximity switch when it
detects the bottom of the press. The tachometer displays the time elapsed
after the proximity switch is activated.
Displaying length
Tachometer
The tachometer counts and displays the number or pulses generated by the
flow meter. This number is multiplied by a preset value to display a flow
rate in liters or cubic meters.
Displaying time for passing through an oven
Length
Pulley
(150 mm in
diameter)
10 meter long oven
Rotary encoder
(60 pulses/rotation)
INA
INB
Photoelectric sensor
ON
in minutes
Pulse waveform
Rotary encoder
When the photoelectric sensor is activated by an object, the tachometer
counts the number of pulses generated by the rotary encoder. This number
is converted to the length.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the time elapsed after each piece of bread enters
into the oven. The time is calculated from the diameter of the pulley, the
number of pulses generated by rotary encoder and the length of the oven.
F-3
Application Examples
Controlling filling timing
Positioning a numerically controlled machine
Filler
Rotary
encoder
Rotary
encoder
Programmable
cam switch
Programmable
cam switch
Motor
Along with the programmable cam switch, the rotary encoder controls the
timing of filling containers, their positions and the timing of transferring
filled containers. The use of the cam switch and the encoder allows easy
positioning and quick adjustment of machines.
Controlling a bottling machine
Capping
Filling
Programmable cam switch
Labeler
Rotary
encoder
The programmable cam switch and the rotary encoder provide overall
control of the entire bottling processes. Filling bottles, capping and labeling
can be controlled from a single turn table. The table can be also controlled
to avoid angular deviations.
F-4
The programmable cam switch and the rotary encoder can be used to
control the position of a numerically controlled machine. Modifying the
cam switch configuration allows you to use different types of workpieces.
Glossary
Multi-counter
Glossary
Preset counter
Counts input pulses, and generates a signal when the count has
reached a preset value. The following diagram shows its circuit
configuration:
Multiple counter functions are built in this counter. It outputs the
count when either of the counter has attained to the preset value.
It is best-suited for maintaining and controlling multiple tools at a
machining center or NC machine tool during tool change.
Type A operation (One Shot output)
Block Diagram (KCX series)
Preset counter
Count
input
Reset
input
Input
circuit
First digit
display circuit
Second digit
display circuit
nth digit
display circuit
First digit
count circuit
Second digit
count circuit
nth digit
count circuit
Auto reset for repeated operations
Generates a signal during a specified time when the number of
input pulses has reached a preset value.
The internal count circuit is automatically reset upon countup to
allow both the next counting cycle and signal output.
Current count can be reset either by activating the reset terminal
(external reset) or by temporarily shutting the power down
(power reset).
Reset
circuit
Set value
Value setting units
Count input
AND
circuit
Output
circuit
Power
source
Output signal
Relay output
One shot output
Sensor power
Dual preset counter
Using pairs of preset values and output circuits, the counter
generates a signal when the count has reached lower or upper
value.
Total counter
Only displays counts, and generates no control signal.
Type B operation (Hold output signal)
Generates and hold a signal when the number of input pulses
has reached a preset value.
The internal count circuit and the hold circuit can be reset either
by activating the reset terminal (external reset) or by
temporarily shutting the power down (power reset).
Batch counter
It contains two preset counters: one counts the number of batches,
and the other generates a signal according to the setting.
External counter
The counter do not have a setting unit at the main body and allows
external connection of a digital switch, rotary switch, card reader,
etc.
KCX- RX series are included in this type.
Set value
Count input
Output signal
Signal held
External reset
All-output counter (Read-out counter)
This counter outputs the count value as a signal to an external
source at any time.
KCX- RN series have this function.
F-5
Glossary
DC and relay signal inputs
Open collector output
DC signal input is invoked by output from a proximity switch,
photoelectric sensor, rotary encoder, or other transistor or
semiconductor circuit.
Relay signal input is controlled by a microswitch, limit switch,
push button switch, or relay.
An open collector gate is not connected with the internal power
source. Therefore, it should be connected with an external power
and load. You can choose any voltage or current(negative load)
levels within the counter specification.
DC signal input
Load
Open collector output
+12 V sensor power
OUT
Sensor
L
OUT
Input terminal
E
Counter
E
Relay signal input
N.C
From
previous
step
DC power
+12 V sensor power
C
E
Input terminal
N.O
E
Sensor
Counter
Totem-pole output
DC and Relay signal outputs
DC signal output means the signal generated by a semiconductor
circuit.
Relay signal output is the signal generated by an internal relay
contact.
Preset electronic counter
A DC output circuit configured like a totem-pole. As shown
below, an output line is located between the serially connected
output transistors Q1 and Q2. It provides higher current than
conventional DC output, using the same positive and negative
loads. The circuit can directly drive a relay.
V
+Power
Q1
N.C
C
Relay signal output
OUT
From
previous step
N.O.
Relay
Q2
E
E
OUT
E
Grounded
DC signal output
Maximum counting speed
Expressed in counts per second (cps), the maximum counting
speed indicates how many pulses the unit can count at the makebreak ratio of 1 to 1(Ta=Tb).
If the ratio is not 1:1, counting is restricted by the pulse width in
relation to the minimum Ta or Tb as shown in Paragraphs (2) and
(3) below.
Ta MIN.
1
Tb MIN.
maximum counting speed
1
(s)
2
(Each model has specific values for these items)
(1) When Ta=Tb
Ta or Tb must be longer than Ta MIN or Tb MIN for the counter
to count pulse.
Input pulse
Ta
Tb
Ta
F-6
Tb
Ta MIN.
Tb MIN.
Glossary
(2)When Ta Tb
Ta must be longer than Ta MIN. for the counter to count pulses.
Input pulse
Ta
Tb
Ta
Ta MIN.
(3)When Ta Tb
Tb must be longer than Tb MIN. for for the counter to count pulses.
Input pulse
Ta
Tb
Tb
Tb MIN.
If you wish to add static signal input, select appropriate input
terminal for desired counting speed or frequency. You should
choose a terminal with the lowest maximum counting speed.
Resets
Power-on reset: Resets the count when power is turned on.
To reset the count, turn the power off then turn it on at any time.
Auto reset: Resets the A type operation upon countup. The
reset duration is shorter than the counter's input cycle at
maximum counting speed. This enables the unit to restart
counting from zero during cycle.
External reset: The count is reset when specific voltage is
applied to the reset input terminal. Some models reset to the
Low level.
Manual reset: The count is reset when you press the button
on the front panel.
Sensor power source
It supplies power to an external device such as a proximity switch,
photoelectric sensor or rotary encoder. All KOYO counters
include a sensor power source. (DC type is not included.)
Glossary for specifications
Count input disable gate (response)
ON DELAY time: The time until input is disabled after turning
ON the disable gate.
OFF DELAY time: The time until input is enabled after turning
OFF the disable gate.
External set input (response)
ON DELAY time: Time for the set gate to be activated.
OFF DELAY time: Time for the set gate to be deactivated.
External reset (response)
ON DELAY time: Time for the counter to be reset.
OFF DELAY time: Time for the counter to be restarted.
Power reset (time)
Time for the counter to be restarted by power input.
Auto reset (time)
Time for the counter to be restarted by countup.
DC output (response)
Time for the DC output terminal to be activated by input of a
preset number of pulses.
Relay output (response)
Time for the output relay's N.O. contact to be closed by input of a
preset number of pulses.
Output disable gate (response)
ON DELAY time: The time until output is disabled after
turning ON the disable gate.
OFF DELAY time: The time until output is enabled after
turning OFF the disable gate.
Bank
Number of programs.
Programs (operation) can be set for each bank.
F-7
F-8
Model Number Index
C
CPG-22
E
E-15PJ
F
F-100GF
F-150J
F-20ANC2
F-20ANC2A
F-20BNC2
F-20BNC2A
F-20C2
F-20C2A
F-30GF
F-50ANC2
F-50ANC2A
F-50BNC2
F-50BNC2A
F-50GF
F-50J
FC-160
FC-20P
FC-21
FC-21-1
FC-320
FC-80-C
FC-81F-C
FC-161F-C
FC-321F-C
FG-01
K
KA-01
KA-12
KB-03
KB-04
KB-12-0
KC-48C
KC-48P
KCH-B4RN
KCH-B6RN
KCM-50
KCM-50-1
KCM-50P
KCM-50P-1
KCM-51
KCM-51-1
KCM-51P
KCM-51P-1
KCN-4SR
KCN-4SR-C
KCN-4ST
KCN-4ST-C
KCN-4T
B-143
E-24
E-22
E-35
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-35
E-35
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-22
E-35
E-12
E-24, E-25
E-24
E-24, E-27
E-12
E-12
E-3
E-3
E-3
B-144
B-117, B-142
B-142
B-117, B-142
B-76, B-142
B-132, B-142
C-11, D-12
C-11, D-12
B-129
B-129
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-134
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-63
KCN-4T-C
KCN-4WR
KCN-4WR-C
KCN-4WT
KCN-4WT-C
KCN-6BR
KCN-6BT
KCN-6SR
KCN-6SR-C
KCN-6ST
KCN-6ST-C
KCN-6T
KCN-6T-C
KCN-6WR
KCN-6WR-C
KCN-6WT
KCN-6WT-C
KCN-A4SR
KCN-A4SR-C
KCN-A4ST
KCN-A4ST-C
KCN-A6SR
KCN-A6SR-C
KCN-A6ST
KCN-A6ST-C
KCV-4S
KCV-4S-C
KCV-6S
KCV-6S-C
KCV-4T
KCV-4T-C
KCV-6T
KCV-6T-C
KCX-1
KCX-1D
KCX-2
KCX-2D
KCX-2DM
KCX-3
KCX-3D
KCX-3DM
KCX-3W
KCX-4
KCX-4D
KCX-4DM
KCX-4RN
KCX-4T
KCX-4W
KCX-4WM
KCX-5D
KCX-5DM
KCX-5W
KCX-6D
B-63
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-54
B-54
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-63
B-63
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-32
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-19
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-86
B-78
B-78
B-78
B-118
B-92
B-86
B-86
B-78
B-78
B-86
B-78
F-9
KCX-6DM
KCX-6RN
KCX-6T
KCX-6W
KCX-6WM
KCX-8T
KCX-B4
KCX-B4M
KCX-B4T
KCX-B4W
KCX-B4WM
KCX-B6
KCX-B6M
KCX-B6T
KCX-B6W
KCX-B6WM
KCY-2-G
KCY-2-H
KCY-2D-G
KCY-2D-H
KCY-4-G
KCY-4-H
KCY-4D-G
KCY-4D-H
KF-02
KF-03
KF-04
KF-12A
KT-V4S
KT-V4S-C
T
TC-4
TC-41
TC-6
TC-61
TC-4A
TC-4B
TC-4L-G
TC-4L-H
TC-4S
TC-V6
TC-V6-C
TC-V6S
TC-V6S-C
TC-4W
F-10
B-78
B-118
B-92
B-86
B-86
B-92
B-96
B-96
B-108
B-96
B-96
B-96
B-96
B-108
B-96
B-96
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-67
B-143
B-117, B-142
B-76, B-142
B-132, B-142
D-2
D-2
C-14, C-33
C-14, C-29
C-14, C-24
C-14, C-19
C-14, C-36
C-14, C-38
C-14, C-27
C-14, C-27
C-14, C-40
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-14, C-40
F-11
For your orders
The following applies to the customer's purchase order and requests for quotations, unless
otherwise specified in quotations, purchase agreement, catalogs, specifications or other related
documents:
1. Warranty
[Period]
KOYO provides one-year warranty for the product delivered to a location specified by the
customer
[Scope]
KOYO replaces or repairs at its expense any parts found to be defective during the above
period unless such defect proves to be caused by:
(1) Abuse or inappropriate use by customer,
(2) What is not part of the product purchased,
(3) Modification or repair done by a person not authorized by KOYO, or
(4) Act of God, or natural disaster or calamity.
This warranty applies to the delivered product itself. KOYO does not assume any loss or
expense deriving from any defect of the product.
2. Services
Services are not included in the purchase agreement. The customer may request the following
services at its expenses:
(1) Installation and testing
(2) Maintenance, check, adjustment and repair
(3) Technical training and education
Each product is packaged according to KOYO's specifications.
GENERAL CATALOG for KOYO Counters and
Controllers 1996 to 2001
Published:
August 2001
Written and edited by:
Design Center, KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
Copyright by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be copied or duplicated.
Information contained in this book is subject to change without prior notice.
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
OVERSEAS SALES DEPARTMENT
171 1-CHOME, TENJIN-CHO, KODAIRA, TOKYO 187-0004 JAPAN
PHONE: TOKYO +81-42-341-7711 / FAX: +81-42-342-6871
E-mail : [email protected]
ẓ㥔䦸㉧傈Ụ㛰昷⅓⏟
High Potential TECH. Co., Ltd.
䶙✧http://www.hpt.com.tw
⅓⏟⏗⋾ⷩ⾐凯⋾巖181噆12㧺Ḳ1
曢婘(02)2719-4662
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement